BookShelfHub

Create products with ease

Full.CX effortlessly transforms your ideas into product requirements.

Full.CX turns product visions into detailed product requirements. The product below was entirely generated using our AI and advanced algorithms, exclusively available to our paid subscribers.

Product Details

Name

BookShelfHub

Tagline

Streamline. Publish. Empower.

Rising Indie Author

Name: Rising Indie Author
Description: Rising Indie Authors are emerging writers who are passionate about storytelling and eager to establish themselves in the literary world. They often juggle writing with other job commitments and are looking for efficient ways to publish and market their work. With a sharp focus on building their brand and reaching their target audience, they utilize BookShelfHub for its user-friendly interface and comprehensive tools that simplify the publishing process.
Demographics: Age: 25-35, Gender: Female, Education: Bachelor's degree in English or Creative Writing, Occupation: Part-time barista and aspiring novelist, Income Level: $25,000-$35,000
Background: Rising Indie Authors often come from creative backgrounds, having been readers and writers since their childhood. They may have participated in writing workshops or online writing communities, which fueled their passion for storytelling. Many have a personal story that inspires their writing, and they aspire to leverage their unique voice to stand out in the crowded literary marketplace. In their spare time, they enjoy reading, attending literary events, and engaging with other writers online.
Psychographics: Rising Indie Authors value creativity, independence, and community. They are motivated by the desire to share their stories and connect with readers who appreciate their work. Their interests include reading diverse genres, participating in writing challenges, and learning about the publishing industry. They believe in the power of storytelling to inspire and evoke change.
Needs: Rising Indie Authors require a platform that helps them efficiently manage their writing, editing, and marketing processes. They need tools for project management, royalty tracking, and analytics to understand their audience's engagement and preferences. They also seek guidance on effective marketing strategies to reach potential readers.
Pain: Rising Indie Authors often face challenges like a lack of time to devote to their writing amidst other job commitments, uncertainty about the publishing process, and difficulties in effectively marketing their work. They may also struggle with budgeting for promotional costs and learning how to build their author brand.
Channels: Rising Indie Authors primarily use social media platforms like Instagram and Twitter to share their writing journey, connect with their audience, and promote their work. They also frequent writing forums, online writing courses, and author blogs to gain insights about publishing and marketing.
Usage: Rising Indie Authors engage with BookShelfHub regularly, using it as a daily tool to track their progress on manuscripts and marketing campaigns. They typically dedicate a few hours a week to explore analytics and sales data, especially after a book launch or marketing push, to assess their strategies and adjust their approach accordingly.
Decision: Rising Indie Authors make decisions based on affordability, ease of use, and the level of support offered by the platform. They are influenced by reviews from fellow indie authors, as well as the demographics and preferences of their target audience. Their motivation lies in finding a platform that can both enhance their creative process and help them succeed in a competitive market.

Tech-Savvy Small Publisher

Name: Tech-Savvy Small Publisher
Description: Tech-Savvy Small Publishers are innovative publishing house managers who stay ahead of industry trends by leveraging technology. They aim to optimize their publishing operations through cloud-based solutions and data analytics, ensuring that they maintain a competitive edge. BookShelfHub serves as their central tool for project management, royalty tracking, and marketing effectiveness, allowing them to manage multiple titles efficiently.
Demographics: Age: 30-45, Gender: Male, Education: Master's degree in Publishing or Business Administration, Occupation: Owner/Manager of a small publishing house, Income Level: $60,000-$100,000
Background: Tech-Savvy Small Publishers often start their careers in various roles within the publishing industry, such as editorial or marketing positions. Over time, they transitioned to founding their own small publishing houses, driven by a desire to promote independent authors and unique voices. They typically embrace continuous learning, often taking classes or attending industry workshops to stay updated on new trends and technologies.
Psychographics: Tech-Savvy Small Publishers value innovation, efficiency, and quality in publishing. They are motivated by a passion for literature and the desire to make a positive impact on emerging writers' careers. Interests include exploring the latest publishing technologies, networking with industry professionals, and advocating for independent voices in the literary world.
Needs: Tech-Savvy Small Publishers require a comprehensive platform that allows them to manage various aspects of their publishing processes seamlessly. They need tools for tracking manuscript submissions, marketing campaigns, inventory management, and sales analytics to make informed decisions.
Pain: Tech-Savvy Small Publishers experience the pain of balancing creative and administrative tasks while navigating an ever-evolving publishing landscape. Challenges include managing workflows effectively, understanding new digital marketing strategies, and keeping up with market trends to remain competitive.
Channels: Tech-Savvy Small Publishers mostly engage with online platforms such as industry newsletters, webinars, and social media communities focused on publishing. They also value software reviews and technology forums as resources for improving their publishing operations.
Usage: Tech-Savvy Small Publishers utilize BookShelfHub frequently, accessing it daily to monitor project progress, track royalties, and analyze data for multiple titles. They rely on its features to streamline their workflow and enhance productivity throughout the publishing process.
Decision: Tech-Savvy Small Publishers base their decisions on the flexibility and functionality of publishing platforms. They seek solutions that are user-friendly and offer robust customer support while also considering peer recommendations and functionality for tracking sales and marketing analytics.

Creative Marketing Maven

Name: Creative Marketing Maven
Description: Creative Marketing Mavens are seasoned professionals specializing in book marketing strategies for independent authors and small publishing houses. They are passionate about storytelling and use their expertise to craft campaigns that resonate with target audiences. Utilizing BookShelfHub's marketing tools, they create compelling promotional content and analyze engagement data to optimize their strategies for success.
Demographics: Age: 28-40, Gender: Female, Education: Bachelor's degree in Marketing or Communications, Occupation: Freelance Marketing Consultant, Income Level: $40,000-$70,000
Background: Creative Marketing Mavens often begin their careers in traditional marketing roles, eventually transitioning to the publishing industry to focus on promoting literature and authors. They draw inspiration from their love for books and storytelling, working closely with writers to understand their vision and translating it into engaging marketing strategies. Their commitment to professional development often leads them to attend marketing workshops and literary events.
Psychographics: Creative Marketing Mavens value creativity, connection, and effectiveness in their work. They are motivated by the challenge of building an author's brand and connecting with readers on a profound level. Their interests include exploring new marketing trends, attending author events, and collaborating with fellow marketing professionals.
Needs: Creative Marketing Mavens require tools that enable them to not only create marketing campaigns but also measure their effectiveness. They need access to audience analytics, integrated project management capabilities, and features that allow for creativity in promotional content.
Pain: Creative Marketing Mavens typically encounter challenges related to tight budgets for marketing campaigns and navigating changes in algorithms on social media platforms. Additionally, they may face difficulties in ensuring that their strategies align perfectly with the author's voice and goals.
Channels: Creative Marketing Mavens engage primarily through social media platforms, marketing blogs, and industry conferences. They also follow trends in online marketing and rely on peer recommendations for marketing tools and platforms.
Usage: Creative Marketing Mavens use BookShelfHub extensively during the campaign planning phase and thereafter to monitor results. They may dedicate multiple hours each week to analyze data and strategize for upcoming campaigns, providing essential feedback to the authors they work with.
Decision: Creative Marketing Mavens make decisions based on the effectiveness of marketing tools, user-friendliness, and the availability of analytics features. They are influenced by success stories and case studies, as well as peer reviews from other marketing professionals.

Data-Driven Literary Agent

Name: Data-Driven Literary Agent
Description: Data-Driven Literary Agents thrive on analyzing market trends and author potential. They leverage analytics tools within BookShelfHub to track author submissions and evaluate the viability of manuscripts. With a keen eye for talent, they strive to connect independent authors with the most suitable publishing opportunities.
Demographics: Age: 35-50, Gender: Male, Education: Bachelor's degree in Literature or Communications, Occupation: Literary Agent, Income Level: $70,000-$120,000
Background: Data-Driven Literary Agents typically have a background in publishing or writing, often starting out as editorial assistants or in marketing roles. Their passion for books drives them to seek out fresh talents and negotiate deals that benefit both writers and publishers. They focus on industry trends, regularly attending conferences and networking events to enhance their professional connections.
Psychographics: Data-Driven Literary Agents value data, analysis, and relationships. They are motivated by the pursuit of fostering authors' careers and helping them find success. Their interests include market research, reading for pleasure, and staying informed about publishing trends.
Needs: Data-Driven Literary Agents require efficient tracking systems for submission management and analytics tools to evaluate potential manuscripts and authors. Understanding audience preferences and market trends is crucial for their operational success.
Pain: Data-Driven Literary Agents often struggle with the overwhelming volume of submissions and managing relationships with multiple clients. They face challenges in making informed decisions swiftly without access to comprehensive data insights, as well as adapting to ever-evolving market trends.
Channels: Data-Driven Literary Agents utilize professional networking sites, publishing industry newsletters, and literary conferences to connect with authors and publishers. They frequent online forums to discuss trends and share insights with peers in the industry.
Usage: Data-Driven Literary Agents engage with BookShelfHub daily, assessing new submissions and managing their roster of authors. They frequently use the platform to analyze trends and make data-informed decisions regarding manuscript potential and marketing strategies.
Decision: Data-Driven Literary Agents base their decisions on the potential for author success, competitive analysis, and the ease of use of platforms. They are influenced by feedback from peers in the industry and prioritize systems that enhance their workflow and client relationships.

Aspiring Book Dealer

Name: Aspiring Book Dealer
Description: Aspiring Book Dealers are enthusiastic entrepreneurs who wish to start their own book-selling venture. They are passionate about literature and engage with authors and publishers to stock their stores with unique titles. Using BookShelfHub, they streamline their inventory management and collaborate with independent publishers to curate a diverse selection of books that appeals to their target market.
Demographics: Age: 25-40, Gender: Non-binary, Education: Some college education or business training, Occupation: Aspiring bookstore owner, Income Level: $30,000-$50,000
Background: Aspiring Book Dealers often grow up loving books, spending hours in local libraries and independent bookstores. They may have worked in retail or customer service roles while dreaming of creating their own store filled with curated literary treasures. Their journey includes attending book fairs and networking with authors and publishers to understand market dynamics and what sells.
Psychographics: Aspiring Book Dealers value community, diversity, and connection with readers. They are motivated by the desire to promote independent authors and foster a love of reading among their customers. Their interests include local literary events, book clubs, and engaging with book-related social media communities.
Needs: Aspiring Book Dealers need reliable systems for inventory management, sales tracking, and developing relationships with authors and publishers. They seek tools that help them streamline their book ordering processes and manage their budgets effectively while promoting titles.
Pain: Aspiring Book Dealers face challenges related to startup costs and navigating the complexities of operating a bookstore. They often struggle with marketing their business, attracting customers, and ensuring they have a diverse inventory that meets their audience's tastes.
Channels: Aspiring Book Dealers engage with platforms such as Instagram for marketing inspiration, book-specific online communities, and industry trade shows to connect with publishers and authors. They appreciate tools that gather insights on market trends and consumer preferences.
Usage: Aspiring Book Dealers interact with BookShelfHub periodically, primarily during the initial setup of their store and when curating new inventory. They may dedicate several hours a week to managing and sourcing titles, especially during book launches or promotional events.
Decision: Aspiring Book Dealers make decisions based on affordability, community engagement values, and resources available for managing inventory and sales. They are influenced by reviews, recommendations from other bookstore owners, and case studies showcasing successful book-selling strategies.

Product Ideas

Collaborative Content Creator: A feature within BookShelfHub that allows independent authors, editors, and marketers to co-create content in real-time. This tool would facilitate collaborative writing sessions, integrated feedback loops, and shared project dashboards, enhancing teamwork throughout the publishing process.
Royalty Insight Tracker: An advanced analytics tool that provides independent authors and small publishers with detailed insights into their royalty earnings across platforms. It would offer projections based on sales trends, geographic performance, and marketing efforts, enabling users to optimize their strategies effectively.
Automated Marketing Campaign Builder: A smart feature that helps users automatically generate marketing campaigns based on sales data and audience behavior. This tool would provide tailored suggestions for social media posts, email newsletters, and promotional strategies, streamlining the marketing process.
Global Distribution Network Integration: A platform expansion that connects BookShelfHub users with international book retailers and online marketplaces. This integration would simplify global distribution logistics, ensuring that independent authors can reach wider audiences with minimal effort.
Onboarding Pathways for Authors: A structured onboarding module tailored to the needs of various author types, including guides, tutorials, and best practices. This feature would help new users navigate the platform effectively, enhancing user experience, satisfaction, and ultimately retention.
Dynamic Audience Engagement Dashboard: An interactive dashboard that visualizes audience engagement metrics such as reads, shares, and reviews. This tool would help authors and publishers track their impact and adjust marketing strategies based on real-time audience feedback.
Book Launch Simulator: An innovative tool that allows authors and publishers to simulate different book launch strategies and their potential outcomes. This would rely on historical sales data and market analysis to help users identify the most effective approaches for their book releases.

Product Features

Real-Time Co-Editing

Authors, editors, and marketers can collaborate on manuscripts simultaneously, with changes reflecting in real-time. This feature streamlines the writing process, reduces miscommunication, and enhances productivity by allowing all team members to contribute instantly, ensuring everyone's input is captured seamlessly.

Requirements

Collaborative Annotation

User Story: As an author, I want to add comments and feedback on specific sections of the manuscript so that my co-editors can understand my thoughts better and facilitate targeted discussions.
Description: The Collaborative Annotation requirement enables authors, editors, and marketers to add comments and suggestions directly onto the manuscript. This functionality allows for contextual discussions around specific sections, enhancing clarity and ensuring all voices are heard. The annotation tool will support threaded conversations, tagging of users, and the option to resolve or dismiss comments, thus streamlining feedback processes. This feature enhances collaboration, reduces miscommunication, and supports dynamic interaction in real-time editing environments.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors and editors are collaborating on a manuscript for a new book. The author makes a suggestion in the first chapter, and the editor replies with a clarification question and tags the author in the comment. This interaction needs to happen in real-time without any delays in the reflected changes.

Given an author is editing the manuscript, when they add a comment on a section of text, then the comment should appear instantly to all members with access to the document, showing the author's name and timestamp.

During a collaborative session, a marketer identifies a segment in the manuscript that could benefit from a marketing strategy. They add a comment suggesting an alteration and tag an author to draw attention to their suggestion.

Given a comment is added by a user, when the comment is tagged to another user, then the tagged user should receive a notification of the comment with the context of the discussion.

An editor notices a comment that is no longer relevant to the current draft. The editor decides to resolve the comment after discussing it with the author during their collaboration session.

Given a comment has been discussed, when the editor selects 'Resolve' on the comment, then the comment should be marked as resolved and visually distinct from unresolved comments to indicate its status.

As authors and editors share feedback on different sections of the manuscript, they require a way to track which comments are still open for discussion and which comments have been resolved or dismissed.

Given multiple comments have been added to the manuscript, when the user views the comment section, then they should be able to filter comments by status (open, resolved, dismissed) to manage feedback effectively.

Authors and editors are working on a tight deadline and need to ensure that each piece of feedback is acknowledged and addressed promptly. They require clarity in conversations about comments for accountability and reference.

Given a threaded conversation occurs under a comment, when a user opens the comment thread, then all responses and tags within that thread should be displayed in a chronological order to maintain clarity in discussions.

Version Control System

User Story: As an editor, I want to view the history of changes made to the manuscript so that I can track edits and restore any previous versions if necessary.
Description: The Version Control System requirement ensures that all changes made collaboratively are logged and can be traced back to specific users with timestamps. This feature allows users to revert to previous versions if needed, review all modifications, and compare different iterations of the manuscript seamlessly. It is crucial for maintaining the integrity of the work and providing confidence in collaborative contributions, thus eliminating fears of losing valuable work or previous ideas.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors and editors are collaborating on a manuscript and need to keep track of changes to ensure all modifications are logged and can be traced back to individual users.

Given multiple users are editing a document simultaneously, when a change is made, then the system must log the user, timestamp, and the nature of the change in the version control history.

An author wants to review previous iterations of their manuscript to evaluate changes made before finalizing their content.

Given a document with version history, when the author selects a previous version, then the system must display that version accurately as it appeared at the time of saving.

Editors and authors are comparing two different iterations of the same manuscript to identify specific edits and changes made throughout the collaboration process.

Given two different document versions, when the user initiates a comparison, then the system must highlight all differences and provide a summary of the changes made between the two versions.

An author realizes a significant deletion was made unintentionally and needs to revert to a previous version of the manuscript to restore lost content.

Given a document with multiple versions logged, when the user selects to revert to a previous version, then the system must replace the current version with the selected previous version, retaining a log of this action.

A small publishing house is conducting a review meeting and requires all contributors to validate their contributions to a manuscript over a set period.

Given a document with active users, when the review period is set, then the system must generate a report detailing all changes made by each user during this period, along with timestamps.

Editors want to ensure that no changes go missing during the editing process by having a backup of each version created.

Given the version control system is in use, when a new version is created, then the system must automatically back up the previous version to prevent loss of data.

A collaborative writing team is discussing the changes made to the manuscript during an online meeting and requires access to the latest edits instantly.

Given users are editing a document in real time, when any edit is made, then the system must provide an instant notification to all active users indicating the changes made, along with the details of the user who made the edit.

Integrated Chat Functionality

User Story: As a marketer, I want to chat with the author and editor while working on the manuscript so that we can address questions and make decisions quickly without delays.
Description: The Integrated Chat Functionality requirement allows real-time messaging between collaborators while they work on the manuscript. This feature will facilitate immediate communication without leaving the editing interface, supporting quick clarifications and decision-making as changes are being made. Users can create group chats for larger discussions or private chats for focused conversations, enhancing the collaborative experience and reducing email clutter.
Acceptance Criteria: Group Chat for Manuscript Collaboration

Given multiple users are collaborating on a manuscript, when any user sends a message in the group chat, then all participants should receive the message in real-time without any delay.

Private Chat for Quick Clarifications

Given a user selects a collaborator for private messaging, when the user sends a message, then the recipient should receive it instantly and be able to respond within the same private chat interface.

User Notification for New Messages

Given a user is active in the editing interface, when a new message is received in either group or private chat, then the user should receive a visual and/or auditory notification indicating the message's arrival.

Search Functionality in Chat History

Given a user wants to find past conversations, when the user uses the search bar to enter keywords, then the chat interface should display relevant previous messages containing those keywords.

Attachment Support in Chat

Given users are in a group or private chat, when a user uploads an attachment, then all participants should be able to see and download the attachment instantly from the chat window.

Chat Functionality on Different Devices

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub on different devices, when any chat message is sent, then it should be synchronized and accessible across all devices in real-time.

Change Notification System

User Story: As a team member, I want to receive notifications for changes made to the manuscript so that I can stay informed about updates and contribute effectively.
Description: The Change Notification System requirement provides instant notifications to users whenever edits or comments are made to the manuscript. This ensures that all team members are kept up-to-date with the latest changes, enabling timely responses and contributions from everyone involved. Users can customize their notification settings based on their preferences, such as receiving alerts for specific types of changes or all updates.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification immediately after a co-editor adds a comment to a manuscript.

Given a user is actively working on a manuscript, when another co-editor adds a comment, then the user receives a real-time notification on their device.

Users can customize their notification settings for different types of changes in the manuscript.

Given a user is in their notification settings, when they select the types of changes they want alerts for, then those settings are saved and take effect for future changes.

Instant notifications are sent out when any changes are made to the manuscript by any collaborator.

Given a manuscript being edited by multiple users, when one user makes a change, then all other collaborators receive a notification of the change immediately.

Users can opt-out of receiving notifications on specific changes while staying updated on others.

Given a user is in their notification preferences, when they selectively disable notifications for certain change types, then they no longer receive alerts for those changes.

System logs and displays a history of all changes made to the manuscript along with notification timestamps.

Given a user accesses the change log, when they view the history of changes, then they see all edits and comments listed with their respective timestamps and user details.

Users want to receive bundled notifications instead of individual notifications for multiple changes made in a short time frame.

Given multiple changes have been made in quick succession, when the user accesses their notifications, then they see a consolidated summary alerting them to all recent changes instead of individual notifications.

User receives notifications via email in addition to in-app alerts based on their preference settings.

Given a user has opted to receive email notifications, when a change occurs in the manuscript, then they receive an email alert in addition to in-app notifications.

User Roles and Permissions Management

User Story: As an administrator, I want to set user roles and permissions for the team so that I can control who can edit, comment, or view sensitive sections of the manuscript.
Description: The User Roles and Permissions Management requirement allows administrators to define roles within the collaborative environment, granting varying levels of access and editing capabilities. This ensures that sensitive content can be protected while empowering team members with appropriate permissions to contribute. Having clear roles helps reduce confusion and streamline the editorial workflow by establishing a chain of responsibility.
Acceptance Criteria: User Role Assignment for Authors, Editors, and Marketers

Given an admin user is logged in, When they navigate to the user management section, Then they can create and assign roles including 'Author', 'Editor', and 'Marketer' with appropriate permissions.

Real-Time Editing Permissions Based on Roles

Given an author is working on a manuscript, When an editor is assigned to review, Then the editor should have access to real-time editing capabilities while the author is editing simultaneously.

Protection of Sensitive Content through Permissions

Given a document containing sensitive content, When roles are assigned, Then only users with the 'Editor' or higher can view or edit the sensitive content while others can only view non-sensitive sections.

Notification of Role Changes to Users

Given an admin has changed a user's role, When the role change is saved, Then the affected user should receive an email notification about their new permissions.

Revoking Access to Previously Assigned Roles

Given an admin user is logged in, When they remove a user from a specific role, Then the user should immediately lose access to features associated with that role.

Audit Log for Role and Permission Changes

Given an admin makes changes to user roles, When the changes are saved, Then an entry should be created in the audit log detailing the changes made, including time and admin username.

Default Role Setting for New Users

Given a new user registers on the platform, When they complete the registration process, Then they should automatically be assigned a default role of 'Contributor' until an admin updates their role.

Integrated Feedback Loop

This tool allows team members to leave comments and suggestions directly on the manuscript, facilitating quick and organized feedback. Users can track discussions, resolve queries, and implement changes efficiently, enhancing the quality of the content through continuous collaboration.

Requirements

Real-time Commenting System

User Story: As an author, I want to receive real-time comments on my manuscript so that I can quickly address feedback and improve my writing before publication.
Description: The Real-time Commenting System allows team members to leave instantaneous comments and suggestions on the manuscript, facilitating organized feedback that updates live. This feature ensures that discussions are visible to all stakeholders, allowing for prompt resolution of queries and the ability to implement changes as they arise. By providing a seamless communication channel within the manuscript interface, it enhances collaboration among authors, editors, and marketers, ultimately improving the quality of the content through ongoing dialogue and feedback.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors and editors are collaborating on a manuscript, discussing various sections in real-time during a scheduled virtual meeting.

Given an author and editor are logged into BookShelfHub, when the author adds a comment on a specific section of the manuscript, then the comment should appear instantaneously for the editor without needing to refresh the page.

A marketing team member wants to provide feedback on a completed manuscript while ensuring their suggestions reach the author and editor promptly.

Given a marketing team member is reviewing the manuscript, when they leave a suggestion in the comment section, then all collaborators should be notified of the new comment via a push notification.

An editor needs to track the progress of addressing comments made by different team members over the course of the manuscript review.

Given there are multiple comments on the manuscript, when the editor marks comments as resolved, then the comment should be visually updated to indicate resolution for all users viewing the manuscript.

An author is working on a manuscript revision based on feedback received from multiple stakeholders and wants to keep track of all discussions related to specific comments.

Given the author is viewing the manuscript with comments, when they click on a comment, then the entire discussion thread related to that comment should be displayed, including timestamps and user names.

An editor is conducting a review session and must address comments, wanting to ensure no comments are overlooked during their review.

Given the editor is viewing the manuscript with existing comments, when they initiate a review cycle, then all unresolved comments must be highlighted prominently for attention.

A user accidentally posts an incomplete comment and wants to edit it before others see it.

Given a user has posted a comment, when they choose to edit it, then they should be able to modify the comment before it is finalized for all collaborators to see.

Feedback Tagging and Categorization

User Story: As an editor, I want to tag feedback by categories so that I can efficiently prioritize comments and address key areas that require improvement in the manuscript.
Description: The Feedback Tagging and Categorization feature allows users to tag comments with specific categories such as 'Grammar', 'Content', 'Structure', or 'Marketing Insight'. This organization helps users to filter and prioritize feedback according to their needs, making it easier to track which areas of the manuscript need more attention. Such categorization also aids in collaboration by allowing team members to focus on their area of expertise, streamlining the feedback process and ensuring that all aspects of the manuscript are thoroughly examined.
Acceptance Criteria: Team members are collaborating on a manuscript and need to provide structured feedback during a virtual meeting session.

Given a manuscript is open, when a user tags a comment as 'Grammar', Then that comment should be displayed under the 'Grammar' category in the feedback section.

An editor reviews feedback from various team members and wants to focus on content-related issues before moving on to grammar and structure.

Given feedback is categorized, when the editor selects the 'Content' category, Then only comments tagged with 'Content' should be displayed for review.

A marketing specialist is reviewing the manuscript to provide insights on its marketability and needs to sift through all feedback efficiently.

Given there are multiple tags on comments, when the marketing specialist filters feedback by 'Marketing Insight', Then only those specific comments should be visible in the feedback view.

A team is conducting a final review and wants to ensure all facets of the manuscript are covered by the feedback provided.

Given all comments are tagged by category, when the team manager views the summary of tags used, Then the summary should reflect all categories used, showing that each aspect has been addressed.

An author wants to ensure they address all constructive feedback on the manuscript before submission.

Given feedback is tagged and categorized, when the author reviews comments tagged as 'Structure', Then they should see a list of all the comments under that category clearly presented for action.

During a discussion in the publishing team, members want to quickly reference specific feedback related to structure for further debate.

Given a comment that is tagged as 'Structure', when the team member selects that comment, Then it should link back to the relevant section of the manuscript for easy reference.

A project manager is assessing the effectiveness of feedback received on the manuscript over time.

Given the categorization feature is in use, when the project manager generates a report, Then the report should provide insights on the number of comments in each category and areas needing more focus.

Discussion Thread History

User Story: As a project manager, I want to access the history of comments and feedback on a manuscript so that I can review the development process and ensure that all suggestions have been addressed.
Description: The Discussion Thread History feature captures and archives all comments and suggestions made on a manuscript, creating a comprehensive timeline of feedback. This history allows users to refer back to prior discussions and decisions, maintaining clarity in the evolution of the manuscript. Additionally, this feature enables new team members to quickly catch up on past exchanges and understand the context behind certain changes or suggestions, thus fostering a more cohesive team environment.
Acceptance Criteria: User retrieves historical discussion threads on a manuscript to understand the feedback given by team members before making edits.

Given that a user is viewing a manuscript, when they select the 'Discussion Thread History' option, then they should see a chronological list of all comments and suggestions made on that manuscript, along with the author's name and timestamp.

Team members want to reference specific comments about a manuscript to inform their current editing decisions.

Given that a user is reading a previous comment in the Discussion Thread History, when they click on the comment, then they should be able to view the full comment and associated thread, ensuring context is clear.

A new team member joins the project and needs to catch up on past discussions regarding the manuscript.

Given that a new user accesses the manuscript for the first time, when they view the Discussion Thread History, then the user should be presented with a curated summary of key discussions and resolutions to ensure they understand the context of the feedback provided.

A team member wishes to ensure that previous suggestions have been addressed in the current manuscript version.

Given that a user views the manuscript and the associated feedback history, when they check the comments, then they should see a visual indication (like checks or strikethroughs) next to resolved comments that have been addressed in the latest manuscript update.

Users need to search for specific feedback on the manuscript to address a particular area of concern.

Given that a user is viewing the Discussion Thread History, when they enter a keyword in the search bar, then the system should present only those comments related to the keyword, maintaining quick access to relevant feedback.

Users want to ensure that they can export discussion history for external review or archival purposes.

Given that a user is in the Discussion Thread History, when they select the 'Export' option, then the application should generate a downloadable document containing all comments and suggestions in a clear and organized format.

Resolve and Acknowledge Feedback

User Story: As a team member, I want to mark comments as resolved so that I can track which feedback has been addressed and which still requires attention.
Description: The Resolve and Acknowledge Feedback function enables users to mark comments as resolved or acknowledged once they have been addressed or taken into consideration. This allows for clear communication about which feedback has been acted upon and provides reassurance to the commenter that their input has been valued. This functionality improves accountability and trackability of feedback, ensuring that nothing is overlooked and that all voices are heard in the publishing process.
Acceptance Criteria: User interacts with a manuscript by leaving a comment suggesting changes to a paragraph.

Given a user has left a comment on the manuscript, when the user marks the comment as resolved, then the comment should display a status of 'resolved' and be grayed out in the comment section.

Multiple users are collaborating on a manuscript and different comments are made regarding the content.

Given multiple users have left comments, when the user acknowledges a comment, then the comment should display a status of 'acknowledged' and be visually differentiated from unresolved comments.

A user wants to review all the feedback received on the manuscript before finalizing changes.

Given the user accesses the feedback section, when the user filters by 'resolved' comments, then only the comments marked as resolved should be displayed, allowing the user to see which feedback has been acted upon.

The feedback loop has been in use for a certain period and stakeholders want to ensure all feedback has been adequately addressed.

Given a user views the feedback summary report, when the user generates the report, then the report should include a count of total comments, resolved comments, and acknowledged comments for transparency.

An author revisits a manuscript after some time and wants to ensure no comments were missed.

Given the author reopens the manuscript, when the author checks the feedback section, then the section should display a history log of all comments along with their current statuses (resolved or acknowledged).

An editor needs to follow up on unresolved comments to ensure they are addressed before publication.

Given the editor checks the feedback section, when the editor filters comments by 'unresolved', then all comments that have not been resolved or acknowledged should be listed for review.

Feedback Summary Report

User Story: As an author, I want to receive a summary report of all feedback so that I can easily identify priority areas for revisions before the final submission.
Description: The Feedback Summary Report generates a condensed overview of all comments and suggestions made on a manuscript, categorized by themes or sections of the document. This report serves as a valuable tool for authors and editors to gauge the most pressing issues and trends in feedback, allowing them to focus their revision efforts efficiently. It can also be useful in the final review stages to ensure that all crucial points raised during feedback discussions have been adequately addressed.
Acceptance Criteria: As an author, I want to view the Feedback Summary Report after incorporating feedback from my editorial team, so that I can ensure all feedback has been addressed before final submission.

Given the manuscript has received feedback, when the author requests the Feedback Summary Report, then the report should display a categorized list of comments organized by themes or sections, including a count of comments for each category.

As an editor, I need to review the Feedback Summary Report to prioritize the revisions needed for the manuscript, so that I can streamline the editing process.

Given the Feedback Summary Report is generated, when I access the report, then I should be able to see a clear overview of which sections have the most comments and the severity of each issue, allowing me to prioritize edits effectively.

As a project manager, I want to ensure the Feedback Summary Report is accurate and reflects all feedback received over the project lifecycle, in order to maintain consistency in revisions across all editorial phases.

Given the manuscript has been revised based on feedback, when I generate the Feedback Summary Report, then all comments should be included in the report, with no feedback omitted, and the report should be timestamped with the latest feedback date.

As an author, I want to be notified when the Feedback Summary Report is ready, so that I can plan my revision schedule accordingly.

Given the Feedback Summary Report has been generated, when the report is ready, then the author should receive an email notification with a link to access the report.

As a reviewer, I want to ensure that the Feedback Summary Report is exportable in various formats, so that I can easily share it with other stakeholders.

Given the Feedback Summary Report is displayed, when I choose to export the report, then it should provide options to export in PDF, Word, and CSV formats, successfully saving the report in the selected format.

As a team leader, I want the ability to filter the Feedback Summary Report based on specific criteria like comment date and section, to quickly analyze feedback trends over time.

Given the Feedback Summary Report is generated, when I apply filters for date range and document sections, then the report should update to reflect only the relevant comments accordingly, allowing for targeted feedback review.

User Permissions Management

User Story: As a project manager, I want to manage user permissions so that the manuscript is only accessible to authorized team members, ensuring content security and integrity.
Description: User Permissions Management controls access rights for team members regarding who can comment, edit, or view the manuscript. By defining permission levels, this requirement ensures that the right individuals have appropriate access based on their roles in the publishing process. This feature enhances security and keeps the manuscript in a controlled environment, thus safeguarding sensitive content while still promoting collaboration among authorized users.
Acceptance Criteria: Team members at BookShelfHub are collaborating on a new manuscript. The project manager needs to ensure that only the assigned editor can make direct edits to the manuscript, while all authors can leave comments.

Given the user permissions are set correctly, when the editor logs in, then they should have edit access to the manuscript. Given the authors log in, when they attempt to make edits, then they should receive an error message stating they do not have permission to edit.

A publisher needs to review a manuscript along with the feedback provided by team members. They should be able to view all comments left on the manuscript without being able to edit the content.

Given the publisher's role is set to 'viewer', when they access the manuscript, then they should be able to see all comments. Given they try to leave a comment, then they should receive an error message stating they do not have permission to comment.

An author wants to ensure that only their assigned team member can comment on their manuscript. They need to confirm that unauthorized users do not have access to leave feedback.

Given the user's permissions are updated, when an unauthorized user attempts to comment on the manuscript, then they should receive an error message stating that they do not have permission to comment. Given the authorized user comments, when the author views the manuscript, then they should see the comment made by the authorized user.

The system administrator needs to change user roles in the management settings to ensure appropriate permissions for a new project involved with manuscript editing.

Given the system administrator updates user roles, when the changes are saved, then they should immediately reflect in the user permissions settings. Given the edited user's permissions, when they attempt to access the manuscript, then their access level should correspond to the newly assigned role.

A team member leaves the project, and the project manager needs to ensure that their access rights are revoked immediately to protect the manuscript's integrity.

Given the team member's status is changed to inactive, when the project manager saves the changes, then the team member should immediately lose all access to the manuscript, resulting in a failure to log in or view the project.

Project Dashboard

A shared, interactive dashboard that keeps all collaborators updated on project timelines, milestones, and tasks. This feature promotes accountability, ensuring that everyone is aware of their responsibilities and deadlines, ultimately leading to a more organized publishing process.

Requirements

Interactive Timeline View

User Story: As a project manager, I want to visualize project timelines so that I can easily keep track of milestones and deadlines and ensure my team is meeting their goals and responsibilities.
Description: The Interactive Timeline View requirement enables users to visualize project timelines in a dynamic and intuitive format. This feature will allow users to easily add, edit, and adjust milestones and deadlines on a shared calendar. Users can drag and drop tasks to reorganize priorities and responsibilities, fostering better collaboration and accountability. By providing a comprehensive view of project timelines, teams can ensure that everyone is aligned and aware of key dates, facilitating timely updates and an organized publishing process.
Acceptance Criteria: As a project manager, I want to view an interactive timeline that displays all project milestones and deadlines, so that I can ensure the team is on track with our publishing schedule.

Given that the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Project Dashboard, then they should see an interactive timeline displaying all milestones and deadlines in a clear visual format.

As an author, I want to drag and drop my tasks on the timeline, so I can easily adjust my priorities based on the project's needs.

Given that the user is on the interactive timeline, when they drag a task and drop it into a new position, then the task's new date and position should be automatically updated and saved on the timeline.

As an editor, I want to add new milestones to the timeline, so that the team can manage the publishing process effectively.

Given that the user is on the interactive timeline, when they click on the 'Add Milestone' button and provide the necessary details, then a new milestone should be added to the timeline and visible to all collaborators immediately.

As a marketer, I want to be notified of upcoming deadlines, so that I can prepare marketing materials in time for the project launch.

Given that the user has access to the interactive timeline, when a deadline is approaching within a specified time frame (e.g., 3 days), then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the upcoming deadline.

As a team member, I want to see a history of changes made to the timeline, so that I can track modifications and updates to project schedules.

Given that the user is viewing the interactive timeline, when they click on the 'View Change History' option, then a list of changes made to the timeline, including who made them and when, should be displayed.

As a collaborator, I want to filter tasks on the timeline by team member, so I can focus on my own responsibilities without distractions from other tasks.

Given that the user is on the interactive timeline, when they select a specific team member from the filter options, then the timeline should only display tasks assigned to that team member, hiding all others.

As a project manager, I want to export the timeline to a PDF format, so I can share it with stakeholders who do not have access to the BookShelfHub platform.

Given that the user is viewing the interactive timeline, when they click the 'Export to PDF' button, then a downloadable PDF version of the timeline should be generated and available for download, maintaining the visual format and details.

Task Assignment and Notification System

User Story: As a team leader, I want to assign tasks and notify team members so that everyone knows their responsibilities and deadlines, reducing the likelihood of missed tasks.
Description: The Task Assignment and Notification System enables project leads to assign specific tasks to team members and automatically send notifications when tasks are assigned, updated, or nearing their deadlines. This feature helps to maintain clarity over responsibilities and ensures all team members are aware of their commitments. Notifications can be customized per user preference, fostering an environment of proactive engagement and accountability within the project.
Acceptance Criteria: Project lead assigns tasks to team members via the Project Dashboard.

Given the project lead is in the Project Dashboard, when they assign a task to a team member, then a notification is sent to the assigned team member's custom notification preferences.

Team member receives a notification about a new task assignment.

Given a task is assigned, when the assigned team member logs into the system or checks their email, then they can see a notification detailing the newly assigned task and its deadline.

Project lead updates a task's deadline and notifies the team member.

Given a task deadline is modified by the project lead, when the project lead updates the task, then the assigned team member receives an updated notification reflecting the new deadline.

Team member marks a task as complete after finishing it.

Given the team member has completed a task, when they mark it as complete in the dashboard, then the system should remove the task from their active tasks list and update its status to 'Completed.'

Project lead checks the status of tasks and outstanding notifications.

Given the project lead is reviewing project progress, when they access the Project Dashboard, then they see an overview of all tasks' current statuses and any outstanding notifications that require action.

Custom notification preferences are set by each user.

Given a user is in their profile settings, when they customize their notification preferences, then the system saves these preferences and applies them for all future notifications sent to this user.

A reminder notification is sent to team members for upcoming deadlines.

Given a task is nearing its deadline, when the system triggers reminder notifications according to user preferences, then all concerned team members receive a notification reminding them of the task due date.

Real-time Collaboration Tools

User Story: As an author, I want to communicate with my editors in real-time so that I can receive immediate feedback and ensure efficient collaboration on my project.
Description: Real-time Collaboration Tools allow team members to communicate and collaborate directly within the dashboard, integrating chat functionalities, comments, and document sharing. This feature promotes immediate feedback and enhances team interaction, providing a space for discussions around specific tasks or milestones. By integrating these tools, the platform aims to minimize the need for external communication channels and keep all project-related discussions centralized and accessible.
Acceptance Criteria: Team members collaborate on a project to publish a new book, using the Project Dashboard to communicate in real-time.

Given a team member is logged into the Project Dashboard, when they initiate a chat with another team member, then both members should receive real-time notifications of new messages.

A project manager needs to gather feedback on a document being reviewed by the editing team within the dashboard.

Given the project manager shares a document within the dashboard, when team members add comments to the document, then all comments should be visible to all collaborators in real-time.

A marketing team is planning a promotional campaign and requires immediate input from authors.

Given the marketing team has created a task for the campaign in the dashboard, when an author logs into the dashboard, then they must be able to view, comment, and respond to the task instantly.

During a collaborative book launch, the editorial team discusses final edits within the dashboard.

Given the editorial team is discussing edits through chat, when a new comment is made, then it should be timestamped and visible to all team members in the chat interface immediately.

The project coordinators need to share a revised timeline with all project members for transparency and alignment.

Given the project coordinators upload a revised project timeline, when any team member accesses the dashboard page, then they should be able to see the updated timeline without needing to refresh the page.

A writer is collaborating on a chapter and has questions for the editor regarding specific sections.

Given the writer is working on a chapter document within the dashboard, when they tag an editor in a comment, then the editor should receive a direct notification about the tag and be able to respond in real-time.

A team member needs to track the historical discussion about a task milestone for better context.

Given a task milestone has been completed, when a team member accesses the task history, then they should be able to view a complete log of all chat discussions related to that task, including drafts and comments.

Progress Tracking and Reporting

User Story: As a project coordinator, I want to track progress and generate reports so that I can analyze our performance and identify areas for improvement.
Description: The Progress Tracking and Reporting feature allows users to monitor the progress of individual tasks and overall project milestones. This functionality includes analytics on task completion rates and project timelines, providing insights into areas needing attention. Users can generate reports on progress at any point in the project lifecycle, which aids in strategic decision-making and resource allocation, ensuring that projects stay on track and meet deadlines.
Acceptance Criteria: User uses the Progress Tracking and Reporting feature to view the current completion status of each individual task within a project on the Project Dashboard.

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Progress Tracking and Reporting section, then they should see an updated percentage completion rate for each task displayed on the Project Dashboard.

The project manager generates a report on project progress at a defined milestone date using the Progress Tracking and Reporting feature.

Given the project manager selects a specific milestone date, when they click on the generate report button, then a report should be produced that includes task completion rates, project timelines, and any overdue tasks.

Collaborators frequently update their task status on the Project Dashboard using the Progress Tracking and Reporting functionality.

Given a collaborator updates their task status to 'complete', when they refresh the Project Dashboard, then the task should reflect the new status, and the overall project completion percentage should update accordingly.

Notifications are sent to users when a project task is nearing its deadline and has not been completed.

Given a task deadline is within 2 days and the task is not marked as complete, when the user accesses their notifications, then they should see a reminder alert about the task deadline.

The analytics section provides insights into areas of the project needing attention based on task completion rates.

Given the user reviews the analytics report, when they analyze the task completion metrics, then they should be able to identify tasks that are lagging behind and require additional resources or focus.

Users can filter tasks by status (completed, in-progress, overdue) on the Progress Tracking and Reporting dashboard.

Given the user is on the Progress Tracking and Reporting dashboard, when they apply a filter for 'overdue' tasks, then only overdue tasks should be displayed, hiding completed and in-progress tasks.

The Progress Tracking and Reporting feature integrates with the project timeline to visually represent progress.

Given the user opens the project timeline view, when they look at the graphical representation, then they should see a color-coded timeline indicating completed, in-progress, and overdue tasks corresponding to the overall progress status.

Milestone Management

User Story: As a publisher, I want to manage project milestones effectively so that I can ensure our timeline is adhered to and we make timely decisions throughout the publishing process.
Description: Milestone Management provides users with the ability to set, edit, and monitor critical project milestones. This feature includes tools for visualizing milestones on the project timeline and alerts when approaching important dates. By centralizing milestone management, teams can ensure that they remain focused on key deliverables and timelines, ultimately enhancing the efficiency and success of projects within the platform.
Acceptance Criteria: Setting and Editing Milestones for a New Publishing Project

Given a user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Milestone Management feature and set a new milestone with specific date and description, then the milestone should appear on the project timeline and be editable.

Receiving Alerts for Upcoming Milestones

Given a user has created milestones, when a milestone date is within 3 days, then the user should receive an automated alert notification via email and in-app message.

Visualizing Milestones on Project Timeline

Given a project has multiple milestones, when the user views the project dashboard, then all milestones should be visually represented on the project timeline in chronological order with clear labels.

Monitoring Update Status of Milestones

Given a user has set milestones, when they mark the status of a milestone as complete, then the milestone should be updated visually on the project timeline and reflect the 'Completed' status.

Collaborating on Milestones with Team Members

Given a user adds a milestone and assigns it to a team member, when the team member accesses the project dashboard, then they should see the assigned milestone along with its due date and description.

Version Control System

This feature tracks changes and maintains a history of document versions, allowing collaborators to view, compare, and restore previous iterations. This ensures that no valuable edits are lost while providing a reliable way to revert back when necessary.

Requirements

Change Tracking

User Story: As an author, I want to track changes made to my manuscript so that I can review edits and restore previous versions when needed.
Description: The Change Tracking requirement involves implementing a robust mechanism that logs all modifications made to documents within BookShelfHub. This system will enable users to review and analyze the evolution of their work, facilitating collaborative editing processes. Users will benefit from knowing who made changes, what those changes were, and when they occurred. This requirement aims to enhance transparency and accountability among collaborators while preventing potential loss of valuable content. By integrating this feature seamlessly with the existing project management tools, teams can ensure that all iterations of their documents are easily accessible and manageable, reinforcing creative workflows without compromising on document integrity.
Acceptance Criteria: User Accesses Change History

Given a user with author permissions, when they select a document and access the change history, then they should see a chronological list of all modifications made to that document, including the user's name, timestamp, and a brief description of the changes made.

Restoring Previous Versions

Given a user with editor permissions, when they view the change history and select a previous version to restore, then the system should revert the document to that version and notify the user that the restoration was successful.

Comparing Document Versions

Given a user with collaborator permissions, when they choose two different versions of a document from the change history, then they should be able to view a side-by-side comparison highlighting added, modified, and deleted text between the two versions.

Activity Logging for Collaborative Changes

Given multiple collaborators working on a document, when changes are made, then each change should be automatically logged with the user's identification, timestamp, and nature of change, ensuring an audit trail for accountability.

Notification of Changes

Given a user subscribed to changes on a document, when a modification is made, then the user should receive a notification detailing the nature of the change and who made it.

Filtering Change History

Given a user accessing the change history, when they use the filter options to search for changes made by specific users or within a specific date range, then the system should return a filtered list that meets the criteria.

Version Comparison

User Story: As a project editor, I want to compare different versions of a document so that I can easily identify changes and make informed feedback to the author.
Description: The Version Comparison feature allows users to visually compare different iterations of a document side-by-side. This requirement includes the development of an intuitive interface that highlights the differences between versions, such as additions, deletions, and modifications. This comparison tool will enable users to quickly identify key changes and understand how their work has evolved over time. By integrating this feature with the overall version control system, users can make informed decisions about which changes to accept or reject, enhancing the collaborative editing process. This functionality is crucial for maintaining high-quality work while minimizing confusion during collaboration.
Acceptance Criteria: User needs to visually compare two different versions of a manuscript to identify changes before finalizing the document.

Given a user is logged into the BookShelfHub and has access to a document with multiple versions, When they select two versions to compare, Then the system displays a side-by-side view highlighting all additions, deletions, and modifications clearly in distinct colors.

An author wants to restore a previous version of their manuscript after reviewing the changes made in the latest version.

Given a user is viewing the version comparison screen, When they select the option to revert to the previous version, Then the system successfully restores the selected version and confirms the action with a notification to the user.

A collaborative team of editors wishes to see a comprehensive change summary after comparing document versions.

Given a user is on the version comparison page, When they select the option for a change summary, Then the system generates a detailed report listing all changes made, including who made the changes and when, which can be exported or printed.

An editor wants to filter the version comparison results to see only the changes made by a specific user.

Given a user is on the version comparison interface, When they apply a filter for changes made by a specific user, Then the system displays only the additions, deletions, and modifications made by that user, while graying out other changes.

A user needs to compare and review changes between different document types (e.g., Word and PDF) within the platform.

Given a user has uploaded versions of various document types, When they initiate a comparison between two documents of different formats, Then the system converts the documents as needed and displays the differences accurately in a side-by-side view.

Restore Previous Versions

User Story: As an author, I want to restore a previous version of my manuscript so that I can revert to a state before the last edits were made if I'm not satisfied with the changes.
Description: The Restore Previous Versions requirement enables users to revert a document to a prior version with ease. This feature will include an intuitive user interface that allows users to select from a history of saved versions and restore them as needed. This capability is essential for mitigating risks associated with unwanted changes or errors introduced during the editing process. By allowing users the confidence to experiment with their work, knowing that they can return to a previously viable version, this requirement will significantly improve the overall user experience and encourage creative exploration within BookShelfHub.
Acceptance Criteria: User accessing the Version Control System to view the list of all saved document versions for restoration.

Given a user on the document management interface, when they click on the 'Version History' button, then they should see a list of all saved versions of the document with timestamps and author information.

User selecting a specific version to restore from the list of previous versions.

Given a user viewing the list of document versions, when they select a specific version and click on the 'Restore' button, then the system should replace the current document with the selected version and update the version history accordingly.

User confirming the restoration process of a document version.

Given a user has selected a previous version to restore, when prompted with a confirmation dialog, then the user confirms and the system successfully restores the document to that version, reflecting the changes immediately in the document view.

User attempts to restore a version that is no longer available due to deletion.

Given a user is viewing the version history of a document, when they attempt to restore a version that has been deleted, then the system should display an error message indicating that the version is not available for restoration.

User testing the restored version for accuracy and completeness after restoration.

Given a user has restored a document version, when they compare the restored document with the original version prior to restoration, then all content should match the historical version exactly with no missing or altered data.

User receives feedback after a successful restoration of a document version.

Given a user has successfully restored a previous document version, when the restoration process is complete, then the system should display a success notification confirming the document has been restored to the selected version.

User checks the version history for accuracy after multiple restorations.

Given a user has restored several document versions, when they access the version history, then they should see an accurate chronological list of all document versions, including those that were restored or deleted.

User Access Controls

User Story: As a project manager, I want to set permissions for team members on who can edit or view documents so that I can ensure sensitive content is only accessible to authorized users.
Description: The User Access Controls requirement defines permissions and roles for collaborators in the version control system. This feature will allow project owners to manage who can view, edit, or restore documents based on their roles within the project. By implementing granular access controls, the risk of unauthorized changes or view access to sensitive materials is minimized. This functionality ensures that collaboration occurs smoothly while safeguarding the integrity of the documents, making sure that only trusted contributors can influence the content. Integrating user access controls will enhance security and confidence among all users when working on shared projects.
Acceptance Criteria: As a project owner, I want to define specific user roles with unique permissions so that team members can have appropriate access based on their contributions to the project.

Given I am a project owner, when I create or edit user roles, then I should be able to set permissions for view, edit, and restore actions on documents for each role.

As a collaborator, I need to understand my access level to documents to ensure I am following best practices for editing and restoring versions without overstepping my permissions.

Given I am a logged-in collaborator, when I view a document, then I should see my access level indicated and be restricted from actions that are beyond my permission, such as editing or restoring if I do not have those rights.

As an administrator, I want to audit user access and modifications to the document versions so that I can ensure compliance with project guidelines and detect unauthorized changes.

Given I am an administrator, when I access the user activity log, then I should see a detailed history of all user actions related to document access, editing, and restorations, including timestamps and user identifiers.

As a collaborator working on a shared document, I want to receive notifications when my access permissions change so that I can adapt my work accordingly without confusion.

Given I am a collaborator, when my access permissions are modified by the project owner, then I should receive an email notification informing me of the change and its implications.

As a project owner, I need to revoke a collaborator's access swiftly in case of changes in team structure or performance issues to secure the document integrity promptly.

Given I am a project owner, when I revoke a collaborator's access, then the collaborator should immediately lose access to the affected documents and receive a notification of the change.

As a user, I want to test different user roles to verify that access controls work correctly before fully implementing them across my team.

Given I am in a testing environment, when I apply different user roles and permissions, then I should be able to replicate the access conditions accurately and see if the system behaves as expected (allowing or denying actions accordingly).

Version History Log

User Story: As an editor, I want to view the complete history of changes made to a document so that I can understand how it developed over time and provide better guidance to the author.
Description: The Version History Log requirement involves creating a comprehensive log of all changes made to documents, providing users with a detailed history of modifications. This feature should include timestamps, user information, and a summary of changes for each version. The version history log will serve as a reference point for users to understand the timeline of their document’s evolution and the rationale behind certain edits. Including this log in BookShelfHub’s toolkit will foster a culture of accountability and awareness during collaborative processes, making it easier to track contribution history and recognize patterns in feedback or revisions.
Acceptance Criteria: Viewing Version History Log

Given a user opens a document, when selecting the 'Version History' option, then the application should display a list of all document versions with timestamps, user information, and a summary of changes for each version.

Comparing Document Versions

Given a user selects two different versions from the version history log, when the user clicks 'Compare', then the application should display a side-by-side comparison of the changes made, highlighting differences clearly.

Restoring Previous Document Version

Given a user is viewing the version history log, when the user selects a previous version and clicks 'Restore', then the application should revert the document to that selected version, confirming the action.

Logging New Changes to Version History

Given a user makes edits to a document and saves it, when the document is saved, then the application should automatically log the new version with a timestamp, the user’s information, and a summary of changes made.

Searching through Version History Log

Given a user is viewing the version history log, when the user enters keywords in the search box, then the application should filter and display relevant versions that match the search criteria.

Exporting Version History Log

Given a user is on the version history log page, when the user clicks 'Export', then the application should generate a downloadable document containing the entire version history with user information and changes.

Collaborative Idea Board

Authors and collaborators can post ideas, topics, and plot points on a shared board, fostering brainstorming sessions that encourage creative input from all participants. This feature enables users to visualize their ideas collectively and ensure all voices are considered.

Requirements

Real-time Collaboration

User Story: As an author, I want to see updates from my collaborators in real-time so that I can immediately respond to their ideas and keep the brainstorming process flowing.
Description: The collaborative idea board must support real-time updates to ensure that all users can see changes as they happen. This requirement includes features such as instant notifications for new ideas, comments, or edits made by any collaborator in the project. By facilitating real-time collaboration, users can engage more actively and effectively brainstorm together, thus enhancing the creative process and decision-making. This integration provides a seamless and dynamic experience for all participants, allowing for timely feedback and alignment on project objectives.
Acceptance Criteria: Collaborators are working on a brainstorming session simultaneously, and one author posts a new idea on the collaborative idea board.

Given that a collaborator is online and viewing the idea board, when a new idea is posted, then the new idea should appear on the collaborator's screen within 2 seconds without a page refresh.

An author comments on an existing idea on the board during a team meeting where multiple collaborators are present.

Given that multiple collaborators are viewing the same idea, when one collaborator adds a comment, then all other collaborators should receive a notification of the new comment within 1 second and see the updated comment section immediately.

A collaborator edits a previously submitted idea while others are discussing it.

Given that a collaborator is discussing an idea, when another collaborator makes an edit to that idea, then all collaborators should see the updated content in real-time with the timestamp of the edit displayed.

Authors want to ensure that they are aware of any changes made to the idea board while they were away.

Given that an author has been away from the idea board for a certain period, when they return, then they should receive a summary of all changes made during their absence, including new ideas, comments, and edits.

All collaborators want to ensure security and privacy of ideas shared during sessions.

Given that a session is taking place, when an author posts an idea, then only invited collaborators should have access to view, comment, or edit that idea on the board for the duration of the session.

A collaborator wants to notify others about a critical change made to an idea.

Given that a collaborator modifies a crucial idea, when the collaborator clicks 'Notify team', then all other collaborators should receive an immediate alert notification about the change, highlighting the specific modification made.

Idea Categorization

User Story: As a collaborator, I want to categorize ideas so that I can easily find and reference them during discussions, making it simpler to stay organized and focused.
Description: Users should have the ability to categorize their ideas based on predefined tags or custom labels such as themes, character development, or plot structure. This feature will help organize thoughts and make it easier for users to navigate and search through the ideas posted on the collaborative board. Providing categorization helps streamline group discussions, allowing users to focus on specific topics and enhances productivity during brainstorming sessions, ultimately leading to improved project management.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors are brainstorming ideas for a new book and want to categorize their thoughts on the Collaborative Idea Board.

Given the user is on the Collaborative Idea Board, when they post an idea, then they should be able to assign at least one predefined tag or custom label to categorize the idea.

Team members are reviewing the ideas posted on the Collaborative Idea Board and need to filter them based on categories.

Given the user is filtering ideas on the Collaborative Idea Board, when they select a specific tag or label, then only the ideas associated with that category should be displayed.

An author wants to edit an already posted idea to add a new category or change the existing category.

Given the user has an existing idea on the board, when they choose to edit that idea, then they should be able to add or change the assigned tags or labels without losing the original content of the idea.

A user wants to see an overview of different categories for the ideas shared on the board before joining a brainstorming session.

Given the user is on the Collaborative Idea Board, when they view the categories section, then they should see a list of all unique tags or labels used for categorization and the number of ideas associated with each category.

A new collaborator signs up to the platform and is shown how to categorize their ideas after posting.

Given the new user has posted their first idea on the board, when the categorization tutorial is triggered, then they should receive clear guidance on how to effectively categorize their ideas with examples.

Users are participating in a brainstorming session and want to quickly identify the most discussed topics based on categorizations.

Given multiple ideas have been categorized on the Collaborative Idea Board, when the user sorts ideas by their assigned category, then the most commonly used categories should be highlighted for easy identification.

Voting System for Ideas

User Story: As a project manager, I want to see which ideas are preferred by the team so that I can prioritize them for our next meeting and focus our efforts on what matters most to everyone involved.
Description: Implementing a voting system allows users to express their preferences for specific ideas or topics posted on the collaborative idea board. This functionality fosters engagement and helps users prioritize which concepts to explore further. By aggregating votes, the most popular ideas can rise to the top, guiding the group's direction based on collective input and improving the planning process for the project.
Acceptance Criteria: Users can vote on ideas posted on the Collaborative Idea Board during a scheduled brainstorming session among authors and collaborators.

Given that the user is logged into BookShelfHub and viewing the Collaborative Idea Board, when they click on the voting button for an idea, then their vote should be recorded and reflected in the total vote count for that idea.

A user wants to see how many votes each idea has received to prioritize discussions in an upcoming meeting.

Given that the user is on the Collaborative Idea Board, when they view the list of ideas, then they should see the total number of votes next to each idea, allowing them to identify the most popular options.

An author wants to remove their vote from an idea after changing their mind during a brainstorming session.

Given that the user has previously voted on an idea, when they click on the voting button again, then their vote should be removed and the total vote count should decrement accordingly.

During a project planning meeting, the team leader wants to ensure transparency and encourage more votes on underrepresented ideas.

Given that the voting period is active, when a user logs into the system, then they should see a notification highlighting ideas with lower vote counts to encourage voting on those topics.

Collaborators need to know which ideas are currently trending to facilitate strategic decision-making.

Given that the user is viewing the Collaborative Idea Board, when they filter ideas by highest votes, then the list should reorder to display ideas starting from the highest to lowest vote count.

Commenting and Feedback Functionality

User Story: As an author, I want to comment on my collaborator's ideas so that I can provide my insights and help refine the concepts we are working on together.
Description: Users should be able to leave comments and feedback on specific ideas within the collaborative board. This requirement includes the ability to reply to comments, allowing for threaded discussions that can help deepen understanding and collaboration. Effectively implementing this feature not only promotes a constructive dialogue but also enriches the ideation process by enabling users to elaborate on thoughts and provide insights, thus enhancing the overall collaboration experience.
Acceptance Criteria: User posts a new idea on the Collaborative Idea Board.

Given an authenticated user, when they post a new idea, then the idea should appear on the board and be visible to all collaborators.

User leaves a comment on an existing idea.

Given a user viewing an idea on the board, when they submit a comment, then the comment should be displayed below the idea and time-stamped appropriately.

User replies to a comment on an idea.

Given a comment exists on an idea, when a user replies to the comment, then the reply should be threaded under the original comment and linked to the user's profile.

User edits their own comment on an idea.

Given a user has posted a comment, when they edit their comment, then the updated comment should replace the original and reflect the edit time.

User deletes a comment they posted on an idea.

Given a user has posted a comment, when they choose to delete it, then the comment should be removed from the board and no longer visible to other users.

User receives notifications for new comments on their ideas.

Given a user has posted an idea, when a new comment is added, then the user should receive a notification in their account dashboard.

User can view all comments made on an idea in chronological order.

Given any specific idea on the board, when a user opens it, then all comments should be displayed in chronological order from oldest to newest.

Visual Idea Mapping

User Story: As a creative thinker, I want to visually map out ideas so that I can better understand the relationships between concepts and facilitate more effective brainstorming sessions with my team.
Description: Integrate visual mapping tools into the collaborative idea board to enable users to create diagrams, flowcharts, or mind maps based on their ideas. This feature will assist users in visualizing complex ideas and their interconnections. By allowing a visual representation of concepts, it enhances comprehension, stimulates further brainstorming, and provides a creative outlet for users to structure their thoughts more clearly. This capability is essential for fostering creativity and strategic thinking.
Acceptance Criteria: Collaborative brainstorming session among authors to visualize plot points and character connections in real-time using the visual idea mapping tools.

Given the user is on the collaborative idea board, When they select the visual mapping tool, Then they should be able to create a diagram that displays relationships between plot points and characters, exporting it as an image.

A team of authors wants to organize their thoughts and structure their ideas for a new book by creating a flowchart on the shared board.

Given the authors are collaborating on a shared idea board, When they create a flowchart with the visual mapping tool, Then other team members should be able to view, edit, and add comments to the flowchart in real-time.

An author needs to illustrate a complex idea that includes several branching concepts and feedback loops.

Given the user is working on their ideas, When they use the mind map feature, Then they should be able to create branches, link ideas, and rearrange nodes intuitively without losing any data.

After a brainstorming session, the team wants to review the visual representations that were created to facilitate discussion and further development of ideas.

Given the team has created multiple visual maps, When they navigate to the visual map gallery, Then they should see all maps created during the session organized by date and author, and be able to open each for review.

Collaborators want to ensure the ideas represented in the visual mapping tools are easily accessible and can be referenced later for editing.

Given the user has created a visual map, When they save it, Then it should be stored in the idea board’s library with tags for easy searching and retrieval.

Authors are participating in a feedback session for the visual maps created on the idea board and want to track suggestions made by team members.

Given the visual map is open for discussion, When a team member leaves a suggestion, Then it should be logged in a visible comment section linked to the specific part of the map for future reference.

Access Control and Permissions

User Story: As a project leader, I want to control who can access and modify our ideas so that we can protect sensitive content and maintain a structured environment for collaboration.
Description: Develop access control features that allow users to set permissions for collaborators on the idea board. Users should be able to designate who can view, edit, or comment on specific ideas. This requirement adds a layer of security and control over creative content, ensuring that sensitive ideas are protected and that users can collaborate in a manner that suits their project needs. By managing permissions, more structured collaboration will take place, enhancing productivity and focus during teamwork.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors and collaborators are collaborating on the idea board. One author wants to limit access to a sensitive plot idea only to specific collaborators while enabling others to view it without editing rights.

Given an author has created a plot idea on the shared board, when they set permissions, then only designated collaborators should be able to view or edit the idea based on the permissions assigned by the author.

An editor is reviewing the ideas on the board and needs to provide feedback. The author has enabled comment permissions for specific collaborators.

Given an editor has access to the idea board, when they select a plot idea, then they should be able to leave comments if permission is granted by the author.

A collaborator wishes to claim ownership of an idea they added to the board, requiring them to set appropriate permissions for future collaborators.

Given a collaborator has added an idea, when they adjust the settings, then they should be able to set permissions for others to edit and view their idea.

A project manager wants to ensure that only key stakeholders can edit various ideas while allowing all team members to view them for transparency.

Given a project manager sets up the idea board, when they configure access rights, then only designated key stakeholders should have edit rights while all others can merely view the ideas.

An author wants to switch permissions on a previously shared idea from public to private, limiting access after initial brainstorming sessions.

Given an idea was publicly shared, when the author changes the settings to private, then only selected individuals should have access to the idea, while all others should lose access.

During a brainstorming session, authors want to ensure that some ideas remain confidential while still encouraging input from all participants.

Given the creators of the idea maintain confidentiality, when participating collaborators input their suggestions, then the ideas marked as confidential should not be accessible to individuals without permission.

A user mistakenly grants editing rights to all collaborators and wants to review and adjust those permissions and roles on the idea board.

Given a user has set up a collaborative board, when they review and modify access rights, then they should be able to easily revoke or adjust editing permissions for all collaborators listed.

Task Assignment & Scheduling

Users can assign specific tasks, set deadlines, and schedule meetings directly within the platform. This feature enhances collaboration by ensuring that each member knows their role and can manage their time effectively to meet project goals.

Requirements

Task Assignment Interface

User Story: As a project manager, I want to assign tasks to my team members so that everyone knows their responsibilities and deadlines, enabling us to collaborate better and meet our publishing goals.
Description: The Task Assignment Interface will provide a user-friendly platform where users can easily assign tasks to specific team members. It will include functionalities such as assigning tasks by role, setting priority levels, and providing descriptions. The purpose of this feature is to enhance communication and clarity within teams, ensuring that all members are aware of their responsibilities and facilitating better project management. Integration with existing project timelines and deadlines will ensure that the tasks are aligned with overall project goals, contributing to timely completion of publishing projects.
Acceptance Criteria: Task Assignment through User Interface in BookShelfHub

Given a team member is on the Task Assignment Interface, when they select a task, then they can assign it to another team member with the ability to set priority (low, medium, high) and provide a task description.

Deadline Setting on Tasks within the Task Assignment Interface

Given a task is assigned on the Task Assignment Interface, when a user sets a deadline, then the deadline is visible to all team members associated with that task and can be edited by the assigner.

Role-based Task Assignment in BookShelfHub Application

Given a user is assigning a task, when they select roles from a dropdown menu, then they can only assign the task to users who fall within the selected role categories defined in the system.

Visibility of Assigned Tasks on Project Timeline

Given tasks are assigned using the Task Assignment Interface, when the project timeline is accessed, then the assigned tasks should be reflected accurately with color codes signifying their status (completed, in progress, not started).

Notification System for Task Assignment Updates

Given a task is assigned or updated on the Task Assignment Interface, when this occurs, then all team members associated with the task receive an immediate notification within the BookShelfHub application.

User Training on Task Assignment Feature

Given the Task Assignment Interface has been implemented, when a training session is conducted, then all team members should demonstrate the ability to assign tasks and manage deadlines with confidence in a practical test.

Deadline Setting

User Story: As an author, I want to set deadlines for my writing tasks so that I can manage my time better and ensure I meet my publishing schedule.
Description: The Deadline Setting feature will allow users to set specific deadlines for each assigned task. This will include functionalities for reminders and notifications to ensure that team members are aware of upcoming deadlines. This feature plays a crucial role in maintaining project timelines and ensuring accountability among team members. It will integrate with users' calendars and provide visual progress indicators, helping teams to track their progress toward project milestones. A clear deadline increases motivation and helps to prioritize tasks effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: As a user, I want to set a deadline for a specific task within a project so that I can keep track of when it needs to be completed.

Given a task is created, when the user inputs a deadline, then the task should display the set deadline visually and include it in the calendar integration.

As a user, I want to receive reminders for upcoming task deadlines to ensure that I do not miss important dates.

Given a deadline is approaching, when the user has set a reminder for the task, then the user should receive a notification according to the specified reminder settings.

As a team member, I want to view the progress of tasks within the project to understand how close we are to meeting our deadlines.

Given multiple tasks within a project, when the user accesses the project dashboard, then the user should see visual progress indicators for each task indicating completion status against the deadline.

As an author, I want to delegate tasks to my editing team with specific deadlines to streamline our workflow.

Given a task is assigned to a team member, when the assigned user views their tasks, then the task should prominently display the deadline and the name of the assignee.

As a user, I want to edit an existing deadline for a task to accommodate project changes.

Given a task with an existing deadline, when the user updates the deadline, then the task should reflect the new deadline everywhere it's displayed, including notifications and the calendar.

Meeting Scheduling

User Story: As a marketing coordinator, I want to schedule meetings with my team members to discuss campaign strategies so that we can effectively align our efforts and achieve our marketing objectives.
Description: The Meeting Scheduling feature will facilitate the organization of meetings directly within the platform. Users will be able to schedule meetings, set agendas, and send invites to relevant team members. This integration will simplify collaboration by ensuring that discussions can be easily arranged without conflicts. By allowing users to synchronize their schedules with integrated calendars, this feature will enhance the visibility of availability and reduce scheduling conflicts, thereby optimizing the team’s time management.
Acceptance Criteria: User schedules a meeting with team members to discuss project updates for the BookShelfHub feature development.

Given that the user selects a date and time for the meeting, When the user adds team members and sets the agenda, Then the meeting should be successfully scheduled and all participants should receive an invite.

A user attempts to schedule a meeting during a time when another meeting is already scheduled for one of the participants.

Given that a user is trying to schedule a meeting, When the selected time conflicts with an existing meeting in the shared calendar, Then the system should notify the user of the conflict and suggest alternative times.

Team members want to view their upcoming scheduled meetings directly on the platform.

Given that users are logged into the BookShelfHub platform, When they navigate to the meeting scheduling section, Then they should see a list of all their upcoming meetings in a clear and concise format.

After scheduling a meeting, a user wants to edit the meeting details.

Given that a user has scheduled a meeting, When they select the meeting and choose to edit, Then they should be able to change the date, time, agenda, and participant list without losing the existing meeting data.

A user wishes to synchronize their platform calendar with an external calendar (e.g., Google Calendar or Outlook).

Given that a user has linked their external calendar to BookShelfHub, When they make changes to their external calendar, Then those changes should automatically reflect in the platform calendar and vice versa without any conflicts.

Users want to receive reminders about their scheduled meetings.

Given that a user has scheduled a meeting, When the meeting time approaches, Then the user should receive a notification reminder via their preferred method (email or platform notification).

Users need to create recurring meetings for weekly team check-ins.

Given that a user selects the recurring option while scheduling a meeting, When they define the frequency and duration of the recurrence, Then the system should create multiple meetings accordingly in the calendar without errors.

Progress Tracking

User Story: As a team leader, I want to track the progress of assigned tasks so that I can identify any delays early and address them effectively to keep the project on schedule.
Description: The Progress Tracking feature will provide users with tools to monitor the completion status of assigned tasks. This functionality will include visual indicators like progress bars and percentage completion metrics, allowing team members to see how their contributions fit into the overall project. Progress tracking will enhance accountability and encourage proactive communication about task statuses and potential roadblocks, ultimately leading to more efficient project management.
Acceptance Criteria: Task Progress Monitoring for Assigned Tasks

Given a user accesses the progress tracking feature, when viewing a specific task, then the user should see a progress bar representing the task's completion percentage and visual indicators for different completion milestones.

Real-Time Updates on Task Status

Given multiple team members are assigned to the same task, when one member updates the task status, then all other members should see the updated progress status in real-time within 2 seconds.

Notifications for Task Completion

Given a user completes an assigned task, when the task is marked as complete, then an automated notification should be sent to all team members associated with the project stating the task is completed.

Historical Progress Tracking

Given the progress tracking feature has historical data, when a user selects a specific date range, then the user should be able to view the percentage of tasks completed during that period and corresponding visual indicators.

Filtering Tasks by Status

Given a user is viewing the task list, when they apply a filter to show only tasks that are 'In Progress', then the system should display only the tasks with that specific status.

Exporting Progress Reports

Given a user wants to analyze project progress, when clicking on the export option, then a downloadable report in CSV format including task completion percentages should be generated.

Integration with Calendar for Deadline Management

Given that a user schedules a task with a deadline, when the task is due, then a calendar reminder should be sent to the user to ensure awareness of the approaching deadline.

Team Notifications

User Story: As a member of the editorial team, I want to receive notifications about my tasks and deadlines so that I stay updated and organized throughout the publishing process.
Description: The Team Notifications feature will send alerts to users regarding task assignments, upcoming deadlines, and meeting schedules. This feature ensures that all team members stay informed and aware of their responsibilities and important dates. Effective notification management fosters collaboration and maintains engagement, leading to improved workflow and productivity across the publishing process. Integration with users’ notifications settings will allow them to customize how and when they receive these alerts.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification for a newly assigned task during a project management session.

Given a user has been assigned a new task, When the task is created, Then the user receives an in-app notification and an email alert for the new assignment.

User is reminded of an upcoming task deadline two days in advance.

Given a task has a deadline, When two days remain until the deadline, Then the user receives a notification alerting them of the upcoming deadline.

Team members are notified about scheduled meetings within the platform.

Given a meeting has been scheduled, When the meeting is created, Then all team members involved receive a notification with meeting details via email and in-app notification.

User customizes their notification settings to receive alerts for only critical updates.

Given a user is in the notification settings menu, When they select 'Critical Updates Only', Then they will only receive notifications for task assignments and upcoming deadlines marked as critical.

User receives a summary of all notifications at the end of the day.

Given it is the end of the day, When the user checks the notifications summary, Then they receive a consolidated overview of all notifications received throughout the day.

User disables notifications and does not receive any alerts for a specified time period.

Given a user disables notifications for a week, When any task assignment or deadline notification occurs, Then the user does not receive any alerts during that week.

Signature Workgroups

Customizable workgroups can be created for different projects or campaigns, allowing users to invite specific team members and maintain focused discussions. This enhances collaboration by ensuring that the right experts are involved in each project while keeping discussions organized.

Requirements

Custom Workgroup Creation

User Story: As a project manager, I want to create customizable workgroups for different book projects so that I can ensure that only relevant team members are involved in discussions and updates, which will enhance collaboration and streamline project management.
Description: The Custom Workgroup Creation requirement enables users to create distinct workgroups tailored to specific projects or campaigns within the BookShelfHub platform. This feature includes functionalities for naming the workgroup, assigning roles (such as author, editor, or marketer), and setting privacy controls to ensure that only invited individuals can access discussions and files. By organizing team members into these targeted workgroups, users can enhance collaboration, streamline communication, and foster more focused discussions while minimizing the noise from unrelated projects. Ultimately, this feature improves project efficiency, allowing teams to better manage their efforts on various publishing tasks without distractions from other initiatives.
Acceptance Criteria: Creating a new custom workgroup for a book launch project.

Given a user has the appropriate permissions, when they enter a name for the workgroup and select team members, then a new workgroup should be successfully created and displayed in the user's workgroup list.

Adding team members to an existing custom workgroup for a marketing campaign.

Given an existing workgroup, when the user invites new members by entering their email addresses and assigns roles, then those members should receive invitations and access to the workgroup.

Setting privacy controls on a custom workgroup to limit access.

Given a user is creating or editing a workgroup, when they select privacy options and save the changes, then only invited users should be able to access the workgroup discussions and files.

Editing the name and roles within a custom workgroup.

Given a user is a workgroup admin, when they edit the workgroup name and modify the roles of existing members, then the updated information should be reflected in the workgroup settings and visible to all group members.

Deleting a custom workgroup no longer needed by the team.

Given a user has admin rights to the workgroup, when they choose to delete it, then the workgroup should be removed from the user's list and no longer accessible to its members.

Viewing the list of all workgroups associated with the user.

Given the user is logged into the BookShelfHub platform, when they navigate to the workgroups section, then all custom workgroups the user is part of should be displayed in a clear, organized manner.

Notifying team members about updates in discussions within a custom workgroup.

Given a custom workgroup has recent activity, when an update is posted to the workgroup discussions, then all members should receive a notification through the platform and via email if enabled.

Team Member Invitations

User Story: As an author, I want to invite my editor and marketing team to my workgroup so that we can collaborate efficiently on my book's launch plan and share ideas in a focused setting.
Description: The Team Member Invitations requirement facilitates the process of inviting specific individuals to join a workgroup within the BookShelfHub platform. Users can easily send invitations via email, providing potential members with a seamless onboarding process. This functionality should support various permission levels (admin, editor, viewer) to ensure that team members have appropriate access based on their role in the project. This feature also includes notifications for team members when they are added to workgroups, ensuring all participants are promptly informed. This enhancement improves collaboration by allowing users to quickly assemble the right team for each project while maintaining control over discussions and decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: User sends an invitation to a new team member for a specific workgroup.

Given the user is on the workgroup invitation page, when they enter a valid email address and click 'Send Invitation', then the system should send an email invitation to the entered address and display a success message.

A team member receives an invitation email and accepts it.

Given a team member receives an invitation email, when they click on the acceptance link in the email, then they should be redirected to the BookShelfHub platform and automatically added to the respective workgroup with the correct permission level.

User attempts to invite a team member with an invalid email address.

Given the user is on the workgroup invitation page, when they enter an invalid email address and click 'Send Invitation', then the system should display an error message indicating the email is invalid and no invitation should be sent.

Admin invites multiple team members to a workgroup at once.

Given the user is on the workgroup invitation page, when they enter multiple valid email addresses separated by commas and click 'Send Invitations', then the system should send individual invitations to each email address listed and display a success message.

A team member is notified when they are added to a workgroup.

Given the user adds a new team member to a workgroup, when the addition is confirmed, then the newly added member should receive a notification within the BookShelfHub platform and an email confirming their addition.

User verifies different permission levels for invited team members.

Given the user invites different team members with varied roles (admin, editor, viewer), when the team members accept the invitation, then they should have access to the workgroup features corresponding to their assigned roles.

Workgroup Discussion Threads

User Story: As an editor, I want to create discussion threads within my workgroup so that I can keep all conversations related to different aspects of the book organized and easy to reference later.
Description: The Workgroup Discussion Threads requirement allows users to initiate and participate in threaded discussions within their customizable workgroups. This feature is essential for maintaining organized conversations on various topics related to the project, ensuring that discussions remain relevant and easy to follow. Each thread allows users to post comments, share documents, and ask questions while receiving notifications for any responses. The ability to create multiple threads within a workgroup enriches the collaborative experience by facilitating focused conversations and keeping track of project progress. Overall, this enhances user engagement and ensures that important information is documented and easily accessible.
Acceptance Criteria: User initiates a discussion thread in a workgroup for a new book project.

Given the user is a member of the workgroup, when they click on the 'Create Thread' button and enter the title and message, then a new discussion thread should be created and visible to all workgroup members.

User shares a document within a discussion thread.

Given the user is in an active discussion thread, when they attach a document and click 'Send', then the document should be uploaded and visible in the thread along with a notification to all members.

User receives notifications for replies in a discussion thread they are participating in.

Given that a user has posted in a discussion thread, when another member replies to that thread, then the user should receive a notification indicating a new response has been posted.

User views a list of all discussion threads in a workgroup.

Given the user is a member of the workgroup, when they navigate to the discussion section, then they should see a list of all existing discussion threads with the most recent activity listed first.

User searches for a specific discussion thread using keywords.

Given the user is in the discussion section, when they enter keywords in the search bar, then the system should display a list of threads that match the search terms relevant to the project.

User edits their comment within a discussion thread.

Given the user has posted a comment, when they click on the 'Edit' option next to their comment, then they should be able to modify the content of their comment and see the updated version immediately after saving.

User archives an inactive thread to clean up the discussion space.

Given the user has the appropriate permissions, when they select an inactive discussion thread and choose 'Archive', then the thread should be moved to the archive section and no longer visible in the active thread view.

Workgroup File Sharing

User Story: As a project contributor, I want to share important files within my workgroup so that all my team members can access the latest resources without having to search through different platforms.
Description: The Workgroup File Sharing requirement provides users with the ability to upload and share documents, images, and resources within their workgroups. This feature streamlines collaboration by allowing team members to access relevant files seamlessly, reducing the need for external communication tools. It includes functionalities for version control, file commenting, and easy retrieval of documents based on project needs. By integrating file sharing directly into the workgroup interface, users can ensure that all team members have access to the latest documents and can collaborate efficiently. This feature ultimately enhances productivity by bringing all necessary resources to a centralized location.
Acceptance Criteria: Team member uploads a document to the workgroup file sharing section for a new project campaign through the BookShelfHub interface, seeking feedback from other members.

Given a team member is logged into the BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the workgroup file sharing section and upload a document, then the document should be visible to all invited members, and an upload confirmation message should be displayed.

A user needs to check the latest version of a document shared within their workgroup, ensuring they are working on the most current file.

Given a user is viewing the file sharing section, when they select a document, then they should see version history and the option to download the latest version.

A team member wants to comment on a shared document for clarity or additional context to enhance collaboration.

Given a document is shared within a workgroup, when a team member adds a comment to the document, then all members should receive a notification of the new comment and view it in the document's comment section.

A user searches for a specific image that was previously uploaded to their workgroup file sharing section based on keywords.

Given the user is in the workgroup file sharing section, when they enter keywords in the search bar, then the system should return all files that match the search criteria, including images and documents.

A user needs to delete a document that is no longer relevant to the project from the workgroup file sharing library.

Given a user has access rights to delete files, when they select a document and choose to delete it, then the document should be permanently removed, and a confirmation message should appear.

Workgroup Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a project manager, I want to access an analytics dashboard for my workgroups so that I can evaluate how effectively my team is collaborating and identify areas for improvement.
Description: The Workgroup Analytics Dashboard requirement equips users with valuable insights into team performance and engagement within their workgroups. This dashboard displays metrics such as the number of active discussions, participant contributions, and document shares, enabling users to assess the effectiveness of their collaboration efforts. By integrating analytics directly into workgroups, project managers and team leaders can identify bottlenecks, recognize contributions, and make informed decisions to enhance productivity. This feature provides critical visibility into team dynamics and reinforces continuous improvement in collaborative practices within BookShelfHub.
Acceptance Criteria: Viewing Workgroup Performance Metrics

Given that a user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Workgroup Analytics Dashboard, then the dashboard should display the total number of active discussions, participant contributions, and document shares for the selected workgroup over the past month.

Identifying Top Contributors

Given that the Workgroup Analytics Dashboard is loaded, when the user selects the 'Contributions' metric, then the dashboard should highlight the top three contributors based on the number of contributions made within the workgroup.

Filtering Data by Date Range

Given that the user accesses the Workgroup Analytics Dashboard, when they apply a date range filter, then the displayed metrics should adjust to reflect only the data within that specified range.

Exporting Analytics Data

Given that the user is viewing the Workgroup Analytics Dashboard, when they click the 'Export' button, then the dashboard data should be downloaded as a CSV file containing the metrics displayed on the dashboard.

Setting Up Notifications for Engagement Metrics

Given that the user has configured the Workgroup Analytics Dashboard, when there is a change in the number of active discussions or contributions, then the user should receive a notification via email regarding the change in metrics.

Visual Representation of Metrics

Given that a user is on the Workgroup Analytics Dashboard, when they view the metrics, then there should be graphical representations (e.g., charts or graphs) for active discussions, contributions, and document shares for easy interpretation.

Earnings Breakdown Dashboard

This feature delivers a comprehensive visual representation of royalty earnings, segmented by platform, time period, and book title. Users can easily identify which channels and works are generating the most revenue, ensuring informed decision-making for future marketing efforts and title promotion.

Requirements

Dynamic Filters

User Story: As a publisher, I want to filter my earnings data by platform and time period so that I can quickly identify which sales avenues are performing best.
Description: The Dynamic Filters requirement enables users to segment their earnings breakdown by various parameters such as platform (e.g., Amazon, Barnes & Noble), time period (e.g., monthly, quarterly, yearly), and specific book titles. This functionality allows users to customize their dashboard view, generating focused insights into their earnings by the criteria that matter most to them. By utilizing dynamic filters, users can swiftly pivot their analysis to uncover trends, spikes, or declines in revenue across distinct segments, thereby streamlining their strategic planning and ensuring a targeted approach to marketing and promotions.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to filter their earnings by a specific platform to analyze revenue generated from Amazon transactions.

Given the user is logged into the BookShelfHub dashboard, when they select 'Amazon' from the platform filter, then only the royalty earnings from Amazon should be displayed on the dashboard.

User seeks to analyze their monthly earnings over the last year by applying a time period filter to the earnings dashboard.

Given the user selects the 'Last 12 Months' option from the time filter, when they apply this filter, then the dashboard should display only the total earnings for each month in the last year.

User wants to view earnings for a specific book title to assess its sales performance and make marketing decisions.

Given the user has a list of book titles on the earnings dashboard, when they select a specific book title, then only the earnings data related to that book should be shown on the dashboard.

User wishes to apply multiple filters simultaneously to gain comprehensive insights into their earnings.

Given the user has selected filters for platform, time period, and book title, when they apply these filters, then the dashboard should display earnings that match all selected criteria accordingly and update in real-time.

User wants to reset all applied filters to return to the default earnings view on the dashboard.

Given the user has multiple filters applied, when they click the 'Reset Filters' button, then all filters should be cleared and the dashboard should revert to displaying total earnings without any segmentation.

User needs to ensure that the earnings data is updated in real-time as they apply different filters.

Given the user applies a filter, when the filter is selected, then the earnings data should refresh instantly without needing to reload the page or manually refresh the dashboard.

Visual Graphs and Charts

User Story: As an author, I want visual graphs of my earnings so that I can easily understand trends and communicate my performance with my publisher.
Description: The Visual Graphs and Charts requirement outlines the implementation of interactive charts and graphs that visually represent the earnings data for users. This feature will include bar charts, pie charts, and line graphs that illustrate earnings over time, by platform, and by book title. Such visual representation of data enhances user understanding and engagement, making it easier to draw insights and recognize patterns at a glance. This capability supports informed decision-making and enables users to communicate performance metrics effectively with stakeholders or teams.
Acceptance Criteria: User navigates to the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard and selects the visual graphs and charts feature to view their royalty earnings over the last month.

Given the user is on the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard, when they select the visual graphs and charts option, then a set of interactive graphs and charts displaying earnings over the last month should be visible, including bar charts, pie charts, and line graphs.

User wishes to analyze royalty earnings segmented by different platforms, such as Amazon, Barnes & Noble, and Apple Books.

Given the user has selected a specific time frame and wishes to filter by platform, when they apply the platform filter, then the visual representation on the dashboard should update to only show earnings relevant to the selected platforms.

User accesses the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard to compare earnings of multiple book titles over the past quarter.

Given the user has multiple book titles in their inventory, when they select the option to visualize earnings by book title for the last quarter, then the visual graphs should reflect accurate, comparative earnings data for each title in that time period.

User wants to export the visual earnings report for presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user has selected the visual graphs and charts, when they click on the export option, then a downloadable file containing the visual graphs and relevant earnings data should be generated.

User explores the functionality of interactive elements within the graphs to gain a deeper understanding of individual earnings.

Given the interactive charts are displayed, when the user hovers over or clicks on individual segments of the charts, then detailed earnings data for that specific segment should be displayed clearly.

User would like to receive visual feedback indicating the accuracy of the displayed earnings data.

Given the earnings data is displayed visually, when the data is loaded, then a loading indicator should appear until the data is fully rendered, confirming that the user is waiting for accurate information.

User needs to easily understand trends in earnings over time through visual representations.

Given the user selects the 'earnings over time' option, when the graphical representation shows fluctuations, then the analysis of trends should indicate increases, decreases, and plateau phases clearly on the line graph provided.

Export Earnings Reports

User Story: As a small publisher, I want to export my earnings data so that I can share it with my financial advisor for better financial planning.
Description: The Export Earnings Reports requirement allows users to download their earnings data in various formats such as PDF, Excel, or CSV. This functionality ensures that users can keep personal records, share information with collaborators or financial advisors, and analyze data externally using spreadsheet tools. By having access to downloadable reports, users can further customize their analysis, integrate it with accounting software, or prepare financial documentation as needed, thereby enhancing the overall utility of the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard.
Acceptance Criteria: User navigates to the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard on BookShelfHub and selects a specific time period and platform for which they want to export earnings data.

Given the user selects the desired time period and platform, when the user clicks on the 'Export' button, then an export options menu should appear allowing the user to choose between PDF, Excel, and CSV formats.

User chooses the CSV format from the export options after selecting the desired time period and platform on the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard.

Given the user selects 'CSV' as the export format and confirms their choice, when the export is processed, then a downloadable CSV file containing the earnings data should be generated and provided to the user with accurate information.

User wants to export earnings data for multiple book titles for the last quarter in PDF format from the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard.

Given the user selects the last quarter and multiple book titles, when the user selects 'PDF' as the export format, then a PDF report should be generated that includes all selected titles and their respective earnings details.

User tries to export earnings data without selecting any platform or time period on the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard.

Given the user attempts to click on the 'Export' button without making any selections, when the action is performed, then an error message should be displayed indicating that both a platform and time period must be selected.

User successfully exports their earnings data and wants to ensure the report contains all relevant information such as revenue sources and totals.

Given the user downloads the earnings report in any format, when they open the file, then it should contain complete and accurate details including revenue sources, earnings totals, and any applicable royalties for the selected time period.

Real-time Updates

User Story: As a marketer, I want my earnings data to update in real-time so that I can adapt my marketing strategies to current performance trends.
Description: The Real-time Updates requirement ensures that the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard reflects earnings data in real-time or near-real-time, providing users with the most current insights into their revenue streams. This feature is critical for maintaining an accurate understanding of financial performance, especially during peak sales periods or promotions. Users can act quickly on insights derived from refreshed data, making immediate adjustments to marketing strategies or campaigns based on the latest revenue trends.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard during a promotional campaign for their latest book release.

Given the user has logged into BookShelfHub, when they access the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard, then the dashboard must display updated royalty earnings within 5 minutes of any transaction occurring across all platforms.

User checks their earnings on the dashboard at the end of the month to evaluate their performance for the previous month.

Given the month has ended and all sales data for that month has been processed, when the user opens the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard, then the dashboard must show aggregated earnings data for the entire previous month, segmented accurately by platform and book title.

User is monitoring live sales data during an online marketing event to optimize their strategies.

Given that the user is running an online marketing campaign, when a purchase is made, then the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard must reflect this sale in real-time, updating the earnings display instantly to show the impact of the marketing effort.

User wants to compare earnings from different platforms to make strategic decisions for the upcoming releases.

Given the user has selected multiple platforms in the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard, when they request the earnings summary, then the dashboard must accurately display a comparison of earnings segmented by platform for the selected time period.

User is engaging in a regular review of their earnings data to plan future marketing efforts.

Given the user decides to view their earnings data weekly, when they access the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard, then the dashboard must provide the option to select different time periods (weekly, monthly, quarterly) for customized earnings reports and refresh the data accordingly without requiring a page reload.

User needs to ensure data accuracy in their revenue reporting on the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard.

Given that the user audits their earnings data, when they cross-check the information on the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard with external sales reports, then all data must match accurately for both earnings total and breakdown by book title and platform to establish reliability.

Customizable Dashboard Layout

User Story: As a user, I want to customize my dashboard layout so that I can have quick access to the earnings metrics that are most important to me.
Description: The Customizable Dashboard Layout requirement allows users to rearrange, add, or remove widgets on the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard according to their preferences. This flexibility enables users to prioritize the information they see first, making the dashboard a personalized tool that caters to individual workflows and analysis styles. By giving users control over their dashboard layout, we enhance user satisfaction, engagement, and overall productivity when analyzing earnings data.
Acceptance Criteria: User is configuring their Earnings Breakdown Dashboard after logging into BookShelfHub for the first time, seeking to personalize the layout to their preferences.

Given the user is on the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard, when they drag and drop widgets to rearrange them, then the dashboard layout should be updated and saved accordingly.

User decides to add a new widget for displaying earnings by book title on their Earnings Breakdown Dashboard for better insights.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they select the option to add a widget, then they should see a list of available widgets, and upon adding a new earnings by book title widget, it should appear in the desired location immediately.

User wants to remove an existing widget from the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard to declutter their view and focus on key data.

Given the user has the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard displayed, when they choose to remove a widget, then the widget should disappear from the dashboard and the layout should save the change without needing to refresh the page.

User is adjusting the layout of their Earnings Breakdown Dashboard while analyzing royalties generated over the past quarter.

Given the user has multiple widgets on their dashboard, when they rearrange the widgets and select the option to save the layout, then the layout should be preserved for future visits to the dashboard.

User is reviewing the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard on a mobile device and wants to ensure that the customizable layout works seamlessly across devices.

Given the user has customized their dashboard layout on a desktop, when they access BookShelfHub on a mobile device, then the customized layout should be displayed correctly and function responsively.

User accesses the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard after making several layout changes and wants to revert to the default layout.

Given the user is on their customized dashboard, when they choose to revert to the default layout option, then the dashboard should reset to its original configuration without user data loss.

Projected Earnings Calculator

This innovative tool allows users to forecast future royalty earnings based on historical sales data and upcoming marketing campaigns. By analyzing trends and user-defined variables, authors and publishers can effectively strategize their efforts to enhance profits and maximize their revenue potential.

Requirements

User Data Integration

User Story: As an independent author, I want the Projected Earnings Calculator to automatically pull in my historical sales data, so that I can easily forecast my future earnings without manually inputting data.
Description: The Projected Earnings Calculator must seamlessly integrate with existing user data in BookShelfHub, allowing users to pull in historical sales data and other relevant variables automatically. This integration enables users to quickly and accurately generate projections without the need for manual data entry, streamlining the workflow and reducing the potential for errors. Ensuring compatibility with various data formats and maintaining data integrity throughout the process are key components of this requirement. The successful implementation of this feature will enhance the usability of the calculator and improve user satisfaction by reducing the time and effort required to generate earnings forecasts.
Acceptance Criteria: Historical Sales Data Retrieval for Earnings Forecasting

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub and has existing sales data, when the user accesses the Projected Earnings Calculator, then the system should automatically retrieve and display the historical sales data without any manual input required.

Variable Customization for Earnings Calculations

Given the user is on the Projected Earnings Calculator page, when the user inputs custom variables such as expected sales growth or marketing expenses, then the calculator should update the projected earnings accordingly and display the new projection without any errors.

Data Format Compatibility

Given different formats of user data (e.g., CSV, Excel, and JSON), when the user attempts to upload sales data into the Projected Earnings Calculator, then the system should successfully import and process the data while preserving data integrity, regardless of its original format.

Error Handling for Missing Data

Given that the user has attempted to generate earnings projections with incomplete historical data, when the user clicks on the 'Generate Projections' button, then the system should display a clear error message indicating the missing data and prompt the user to complete the required fields before proceeding.

Performance Benchmarking During Data Integration

Given that a user is integrating large volumes of historical sales data, when the integration process begins, then the system should complete the data integration within 5 seconds and notify the user once the data is successfully loaded, ensuring minimal interruption to the user experience.

User Satisfaction Feedback Collection

Given that users have utilized the Projected Earnings Calculator after its integration with user data, when the user completes the projections, then the system should prompt users for feedback on the usability and accuracy of the tool to gather insights for future improvements.

Trend Analysis Visualization

User Story: As a publisher, I want a visualization feature in the Projected Earnings Calculator, so that I can clearly see sales trends and make better marketing decisions based on visual data.
Description: The Projected Earnings Calculator should feature a user-friendly visualization tool that allows users to analyze sales trends over time. This tool will provide graphical representations of historical data, helping users to identify patterns and make informed predictions. By incorporating charts and graphs, users can easily interpret complex data, facilitating strategic planning for future marketing campaigns. This visualization will be integrated within the calculator, ensuring that users can access this information without navigating away from the main tool.
Acceptance Criteria: User analyses monthly sales data to determine trends and make future marketing decisions.

Given the user inputs historical sales data into the Projected Earnings Calculator, when they request a trend analysis, then the system displays a line graph showing sales trends over the past 12 months.

User wants to compare sales data before and after a major marketing campaign.

Given the user selects a date range encompassing a marketing campaign, when they view the trend analysis visualization, then the system provides a bar chart comparing sales data from before and after the campaign.

User needs to identify seasonal sales patterns based on historical data.

Given that the user accesses the Projected Earnings Calculator, when they request to view seasonal trends, then the visualization tool displays a detailed seasonal graph highlighting peak sales months and low sales periods.

User intends to evaluate the impact of specific marketing strategies on sales.

Given the user inputs marketing campaign dates and related sales data, when they run the trend analysis, then the visualization tool highlights the correlation between marketing activities and sales performance on the graph.

User wants to export the trend analysis visualization for a report.

Given the user views the trend analysis in the Projected Earnings Calculator, when they select the export option, then the system allows the user to download the visualization as a PDF or image file for reporting purposes.

User requires real-time updates on the trend analysis after inputting new sales data.

Given the user inputs updated sales data into the Projected Earnings Calculator, when they view the trend analysis, then the visualization updates dynamically to reflect the latest data without needing to refresh the page.

User needs a clear legend and labels to understand the data on the visualization.

Given the user views the trend analysis visualization, when they examine the graph, then it includes a clear legend, axis labels, and tooltips that explain data points accurately.

Custom Variables Input

User Story: As a small publishing house, I want to input custom variables into the Projected Earnings Calculator, so that I can create more accurate projections that reflect our specific marketing strategies and market conditions.
Description: The calculator must allow users to input custom variables that can affect earnings, such as expected increases in marketing budgets or seasonal sales shifts. This capability will enable users to create tailored predictions that reflect their unique circumstances, fostering a deeper understanding of potential earnings based on different scenarios. The implementation should include user-friendly forms for inputting these variables and help functionality that guides users in determining which variables may impact their earnings forecasts.
Acceptance Criteria: User inputs custom variables to forecast earnings based on expected marketing budget increase.

Given a user is on the Projected Earnings Calculator page, when they input a marketing budget increase of 20%, then the calculator updates the projected earnings to reflect this variable and shows visual trends based on this input.

User seeks help to understand which variables affect their earnings forecasts.

Given a user clicks on the help icon next to the custom variables input field, when they view the help content, then they should see a list of suggested variables that can impact earnings such as marketing budgets, seasonal shifts, and sales channels.

User enters multiple custom variables to analyze their impact on earnings.

Given a user is on the Projected Earnings Calculator page, when they input different values for marketing budget increase, seasonal sales shift, and anticipated sales growth, then the system should display a detailed earnings forecast considering all custom variables and allow comparison with previous forecasts.

User attempts to input invalid data into the custom variables field.

Given a user is on the Projected Earnings Calculator page, when they try to input a non-numeric value into the custom variable for expected marketing budget increase, then the system should display an error message indicating that only numeric values are accepted.

User saves their custom variable settings for future reference.

Given a user has input custom variables into the Projected Earnings Calculator, when they select the 'Save Settings' option, then the application should successfully store these settings and provide confirmation that the settings have been saved for future use.

User modifies previously saved custom variable settings.

Given a user has accessed the saved custom variable settings, when they change the expected increase in marketing budgets, then the calculator should reflect these changes in the projected earnings calculation and allow the user to save the modified settings.

Export Forecast Reports

User Story: As an author, I want to export my earnings projections into a PDF file, so I can share accurate forecasts with my publisher and partners easily.
Description: Users should be able to export their earnings forecasts into various file formats (PDF, Excel, etc.) for easy sharing and record-keeping. This feature will enable authors and publishers to generate professional reports that can be shared with stakeholders, partners, or for personal records. The export functionality should be straightforward, allowing users to select the format and any specific data they want to include in their reports, enhancing the practical utility of the earnings forecasts generated by the calculator.
Acceptance Criteria: As an author, I want to export my earnings forecast report in PDF format after analyzing my projected sales so that I can share it with my publisher during our upcoming meeting to discuss marketing strategies.

Given the user has generated a projected earnings forecast, when they select the export option and choose PDF format, then a PDF file should be created and downloaded successfully that contains the earnings forecast data as specified by the user.

As a publisher, I want to export a comprehensive earnings forecast report in Excel format to manipulate the data further and include it in my financial documentation, making it easier to track projected earnings over time.

Given the user has generated a projected earnings forecast, when they select the export option and choose Excel format, then an Excel file should be created and downloaded successfully containing all relevant earnings forecast data, organized in a spreadsheet format.

As an independent author, I need to customize the earnings report export by selecting specific data fields, such as total projected earnings, royalty percentages, and marketing costs, to present only the most relevant information to my stakeholders.

Given the user has the ability to customize data fields in the export options, when they select specific data fields to include in their report and choose any file format, then the exported report should accurately reflect the selected data fields and be downloadable in the chosen format.

As a small publishing house, I want to ensure that my exported earnings forecast reports maintain consistent formatting across different file types so I can effectively present them at board meetings and during marketing discussions.

Given the user has selected a file format for export, when they generate reports in PDF and Excel formats, then the reports should maintain consistent layout and styling across formats, ensuring all information is readable and professionally presented throughout.

As a user wanting to share my earnings forecasts, I need to ensure that the export function works seamlessly, without errors, to avoid miscommunication with my stakeholders about my projected earnings.

Given the user has generated a projected earnings forecast, when they attempt to export the report, then the export functionality should complete without errors, allowing the user to share the report without any issues during the export process.

As a frequent user of the earnings calculator, I want to be able to quickly repeat the export process for different forecasts, saving time and effort in generating multiple reports for various stakeholders.

Given the user has generated multiple projected earnings forecasts, when they select the export option, then they should be able to easily repeat the export process for each forecast without having to navigate back to the forecast generation step, streamlining their workflow.

Market Comparison Tool

User Story: As a small author, I want to compare my projected earnings with industry benchmarks, so that I can understand my position in the market and make more informed publishing decisions.
Description: The Projected Earnings Calculator must include a feature that allows users to compare their projected earnings against industry benchmarks or similar publications. This comparison tool will provide valuable insights into how users' earnings potential stacks up against competitors, informing strategic decisions in marketing and production. Users should be able to select benchmarks based on genre, historical performance, and other relevant criteria, ensuring that comparisons are meaningful and actionable.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to compare their projected earnings with industry benchmarks after entering their historical sales data and potential marketing campaigns in the Projected Earnings Calculator.

Given the user has entered their historical sales data and potential marketing campaigns, when they select industry benchmarks based on genre and historical performance, then the system should display a comparison chart showing projected earnings alongside selected benchmarks.

An author seeks specific insights on where their projected earnings fall in comparison to similar publications within their genre, using the Market Comparison Tool.

Given the user has selected a genre and relevant benchmarks, when they request a comparison, then the Market Comparison Tool should return a detailed report showing their projected earnings compared to the average earnings of similar publications in that genre.

A publisher wants to analyze how changes in marketing strategies could impact their earnings compared to the benchmark averages.

Given the user has adjusted their marketing strategy variables in the Projected Earnings Calculator, when they initiate a comparison, then the system should generate a new set of projected earnings based on the input variables and display them alongside the industry benchmarks.

A user wants to save their comparison results for future review or presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user has conducted a comparison using the Market Comparison Tool, when they choose to save the results, then the system should allow them to download a PDF report containing the comparison data and graphs for offline access.

An independent publisher wishes to evaluate their performance over the last year against industry trends to make data-driven decisions for the upcoming year.

Given the user is accessing the Market Comparison Tool, when they input the last year's sales data and select relevant benchmarks, then the system should display an annual performance summary that includes comparisons with industry trends and competitor benchmarks.

Real-time Updates

User Story: As an author, I want my earnings projections to update in real-time when I change my sales data, so I can instantly see the impact of my decisions.
Description: The earnings calculator should provide real-time updates based on newly entered data, allowing users to see how changes affect their projections instantly. This feature will ensure that users can make immediate adjustments to their forecasts as new information becomes available, thus supporting agile decision-making. The system must handle data processing efficiently while maintaining performance, ensuring a smooth user experience as they access updated forecasts.
Acceptance Criteria: User updates the sales data in the earnings calculator to reflect the latest sales figures for a new marketing campaign.

Given the sales data is updated, when the user saves the changes, then the projected earnings should display updated calculations reflecting the new inputs immediately without delay.

An author enters a new marketing strategy with defined budget and timeline to see how it affects their earnings projections.

Given a new marketing strategy is defined, when the user submits it, then the earnings calculator must update the projections in real-time based on the combined historical data and the new strategy inputs.

A publisher reviews the projected earnings in different scenarios based on varying pricing strategies for their book.

Given the user selects different pricing options, when the user applies the changes, then the earnings calculator should reflect accurate projections for each pricing scenario in real-time.

The user receives a notification about a significant change in sales trends and wants to update their forecast accordingly.

Given a notification is received for a sales trend change, when the user opens the earnings calculator, then it must automatically update projections based on the latest historical sales data without requiring manual input.

The system processes multiple updates entered by various users simultaneously, reflecting immediate changes in projections without errors.

Given multiple users are inputting data at the same time, when any user submits their changes, then the earnings calculator must maintain performance and provide accurate real-time updates without lag or incorrect calculations.

A user checks the earnings calculator on a mobile device while at a conference and expects real-time updates without performance issues.

Given the user accesses the earnings calculator via mobile, when they enter any new sales data, then the calculator should display updated projections with a response time of less than 2 seconds and no service interruption.

Geographic Performance Insights

With this feature, users can drill down into sales data by geographic location, providing valuable insights on where their books perform best. This allows independent authors and small publishers to tailor their marketing strategies to specific regions, optimizing their outreach and enhancing sales opportunities.

Requirements

Geographic Sales Mapping

User Story: As an independent author, I want to see my book sales data on a map so that I can identify the regions where my books perform best and tailor my marketing strategies accordingly.
Description: The Geographic Sales Mapping requirement involves the development of a user-friendly interface that allows users to visualize sales data on an interactive map. This feature will include filtering capabilities for different time frames and book titles, enabling users to see detailed sales performance by region. The integration of this feature within BookShelfHub will empower independent authors and publishers to quickly identify which geographic areas yield the highest sales, thereby informing their marketing strategies. Achieving a clear and detailed visual representation of sales data is crucial to optimizing reach and expanding market opportunities for users.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Geographic Sales Mapping interface to analyze the sales performance of their books across different regions.

Given the user is on the Geographic Sales Mapping interface, when they select a specific book title and a time frame, then the system displays an interactive map highlighting sales data by region with appropriate filtering options.

User interacts with the map to view detailed sales performance by region.

Given the user is viewing the interactive map, when they click on a specific region, then the system presents detailed sales statistics including total sales, number of units sold, and customer demographics for that region.

User wants to modify the filters to analyze sales data of multiple titles over a selected time period.

Given the user is on the Geographic Sales Mapping page, when they apply filters for multiple book titles and select a custom date range, then the map updates to reflect the combined sales data for the selected parameters.

User seeks to download the sales data visualized on the map.

Given the user has selected a specific view of the sales data on the map, when they click the download button, then the system generates a CSV file containing the sales data for that view and prompts the user to download it.

User accesses help documentation related to the Geographic Sales Mapping feature.

Given the user is on the Geographic Sales Mapping interface, when they click on the help icon, then the system displays a help documentation overlay that explains how to use the mapping feature effectively.

User navigates to the Geographic Sales Mapping feature from the main dashboard.

Given the user is on the main dashboard of BookShelfHub, when they click on the 'Geographic Sales Mapping' link, then they are redirected to the Geographic Sales Mapping interface without any errors or delays.

User finishes using the map and wants to return to the previous screen without losing their selections.

Given the user has applied filters to the map, when they click on the 'Back' button, then the system retains the user's selections and returns them to the previous screen.

Customizable Sales Alerts

User Story: As a small publisher, I want customizable alerts for my sales data so that I can be promptly informed about important changes in my book performance and act quickly to optimize my marketing efforts.
Description: The Customizable Sales Alerts requirement allows users to set personalized notifications for sales milestones, geographic performance benchmarks, or significant changes in sales trends. This feature will help users stay informed and proactive about their book performance without needing to constantly check their sales dashboard. By integrating these alerts into the platform, users can respond quickly to market changes or capitalize on sales spikes, ultimately improving their marketing effectiveness and sales performance.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets up a sales alert for a specific book to be notified when sales exceed 100 copies in their region.

Given that the user has access to the customizable sales alerts feature, When they set an alert for sales exceeding 100 copies for a specific book in their selected region, Then the system should send a notification within 5 minutes of the sales achieving this milestone.

User modifies an existing sales alert to change the sales milestone from 100 to 150 copies.

Given that the user has an active sales alert set for 100 copies, When the user updates the alert to change the milestone to 150 copies, Then the system should confirm the change and the alert should now trigger notifications only when sales exceed 150 copies.

User receives a notification for a significant sales trend change indicating a spike in sales for a specific book in a geographical area.

Given that the user has set up alerts for significant changes in sales trends, When there is a 50% increase in sales for a specific book in the user’s selected region over a week, Then the system should automatically send a notification to the user detailing the increase and relevant sales data.

User creates multiple alerts for different books with varying sales milestones all at once.

Given that the user is in the customizable sales alerts section, When they input alerts for three different books with respective sales milestones of 50, 100, and 200 copies, Then the system should allow the user to save all alerts simultaneously and confirm the successful creation of these alerts.

User checks if the alerts are functioning by simulating a sales data update.

Given that the user has set up sales alerts for specific thresholds, When they simulate a sales update that meets one of the alert criteria, Then the system should trigger a notification as per the alert settings, validating the alert functionality.

User attempts to set an alert with an invalid milestone (e.g., -10 copies).

Given that the user is attempting to set a sales alert, When they enter an invalid sales milestone of -10 copies, Then the system should reject the request and display an error message indicating that the milestone must be a positive number.

Detailed Sales Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a data-driven author, I want a dashboard that compiles all my sales analytics in one place so that I can analyze trends, compare titles, and gain insights into my sales performance.
Description: The Detailed Sales Analytics Dashboard requirement encompasses creating a comprehensive and intuitive dashboard that aggregates sales data from various sources and presents it in an accessible format. This dashboard will display trend graphs, regional performance metrics, and comparative analytics for different titles and formats. The feature aims to give users a holistic view of their book sales, enhancing their ability to analyze performance over time and make informed decisions. The successful implementation of this feature will combine various key metrics into a single interface, making it easier for users to navigate and understand their sales landscape.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Detailed Sales Analytics Dashboard to analyze their book sales performance over the last six months.

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Detailed Sales Analytics Dashboard, then they should see an overview of sales data aggregated from various sources for the past six months, displayed in trend graphs and regional performance metrics.

User drills down into sales data by geographic location to identify which regions have higher sales.

Given the user selects a specific title from the dashboard, when they view the geographic performance section, then they should see a detailed breakdown of sales by region, including total sales numbers and percentage of total sales per region, within five seconds.

User compares sales performance of multiple titles to determine which book to market more aggressively.

Given the user is on the Detailed Sales Analytics Dashboard, when they select multiple titles for comparison, then they should see a side-by-side analysis of key metrics such as sales volume, revenue generated, and regional performance for each selected title displayed clearly within the same interface.

User wants to analyze trends over time and see if there are any noticeable spikes or drops in sales.

Given the user accesses the trend graph section of the dashboard, when they select a time frame (e.g., last quarter), then they should see a line graph that visually represents sales trends over that time period, highlighting any significant increases or decreases in sales.

User needs to export the sales data for external analysis or reporting purposes.

Given the user is on the Detailed Sales Analytics Dashboard, when they click the 'Export' button, then they should be able to download a CSV file containing all displayed sales data, including filtering options applied to the dashboard.

User allows marketing team to set targeted strategies based on geographic performance insights.

Given the user views the geographic performance insights, when they identify a region with high sales potential, then they should be able to save notes and action items directly within the dashboard for future marketing strategy discussions.

Regional Marketing Optimization Tools

User Story: As an independent publisher, I want access to marketing optimization tools tailored to specific regions so that I can improve my marketing efforts and increase book sales in those areas.
Description: The Regional Marketing Optimization Tools requirement aims to equip users with resources and guidelines tailored to specific geographic markets. This feature will include templates for targeted marketing campaigns, best practice recommendations for promotional efforts, and insights based on regional sales data. This integration will enable authors and publishers to optimize their marketing strategies based on real data, ultimately enhancing their outreach and sales in those locales. By offering guidance that aligns with the geographic performance insights, this feature ensures that users can act effectively on the information at hand.
Acceptance Criteria: Sales data analysis by geographic region for marketing optimization.

Given the user has accessed the Geographic Performance Insights dashboard, When they select a specific region, Then they can view detailed sales data and trends for their books in that region.

Utilization of marketing campaign templates tailored to specific regions.

Given the user is in the Regional Marketing Optimization Tools section, When they select a geographical template for a marketing campaign, Then they can customize and save the campaign details as per their preference.

Access to best practice recommendations based on regional sales data.

Given the user is viewing the insights for a specific geographic area, When they click on the 'Best Practices' link, Then they should see relevant marketing strategies and recommendations applicable to that region.

Integration of analytics with marketing strategy implementation.

Given the user has implemented a marketing strategy based on regional insights, When they monitor the sales data for that strategy, Then they can see the impact of their actions reflected in improved sales performance for that region.

Ability to track effectiveness of targeted marketing efforts.

Given the user has launched a targeted marketing campaign, When they check the analytics of the campaign after a specified period, Then they should be able to see metrics related to engagement and sales performance linked to the targeted region.

User feedback on the effectiveness of the Regional Marketing Optimization Tools.

Given the user accesses a feedback form after utilizing the Regional Marketing Optimization Tools, When they submit their feedback, Then it should be recorded and available for review by the product team.

Historical Sales Performance Review

User Story: As an author, I want to analyze my past sales performance over different periods so that I can recognize trends and make informed decisions for my future marketing efforts.
Description: The Historical Sales Performance Review requirement focuses on providing users with the ability to analyze past sales data to identify trends over time. This feature will allow users to generate reports that highlight sales fluctuations, spot seasonal trends, and correlate performance with marketing campaigns. By understanding how historical sales impact current performance, users can make more informed decisions about future marketing and publishing strategies. Integration of this feature within BookShelfHub will facilitate retrospective analysis, leading to better strategic planning.
Acceptance Criteria: Reviewing sales trends across different time periods to make informed decisions about future marketing campaigns.

Given the user has selected a specific time period, when they generate a historical sales report, then they should see a detailed breakdown of sales data showing trends over time for different book titles across that period.

Analyzing the correlation between past marketing campaigns and sales performance to optimize future strategies.

Given the user has input their past marketing campaigns alongside sales data, when they generate a report, then they should see visual representations correlating marketing efforts with sales fluctuations.

Identifying seasonal sales trends to inform inventory management decisions for upcoming quarters.

Given the user has requested a seasonal sales analysis report, when they view the report, then it should highlight peak sales periods and suggest optimal inventory levels for each season.

Understanding geographic performance of books to target future marketing efforts more effectively.

Given the user has selected specific geographic regions, when they analyze historical sales performance in those regions, then they should receive actionable insights indicating which regions yielded the highest sales.

Evaluating historical sales performance in the context of market changes and competitors' actions.

Given the user has access to market data, when they review their historical sales reports, then the system should provide comparative analyses against competitors to highlight areas for improvement.

Previewing the impact of adjusted pricing strategies on historical sales data to forecast outcomes.

Given the user has made adjustments to their pricing strategy, when they use the historical sales performance review tool, then it should simulate potential impacts on future sales under the new pricing structure.

Generating a user-friendly dashboard summarizing key historical sales metrics for quick overview.

Given the user has logged into the platform, when they access the historical sales dashboard, then they should see a clear overview of key metrics such as total sales, average sales per month, and best-selling titles over the selected timeframe.

Marketing Impact Analyzer

Users can measure the effectiveness of their marketing initiatives against their royalty earnings with this analytics tool. By correlating marketing activities with sales performance, this feature enables authors and publishers to understand which strategies yield the highest ROI, refining future campaigns for greater success.

Requirements

Comprehensive Marketing Dashboard

User Story: As an author or publisher, I want to see a centralized dashboard of my marketing initiatives so that I can quickly assess performance and make informed decisions on future campaigns.
Description: The Comprehensive Marketing Dashboard provides users with a centralized view of all marketing initiatives, offering insights into campaign performance with real-time data visualization. It integrates with existing marketing tools within BookShelfHub and enables users to track metrics such as engagement rates, conversion rates, and audience demographics. This feature enhances decision-making by presenting a clear overview of marketing efforts, allowing users to capitalize on successful strategies and adjust less-effective ones. The dashboard not only aids in assessing current campaigns but also helps in planning future marketing efforts to maximize ROI.
Acceptance Criteria: Viewing Real-Time Campaign Performance Metrics

Given that I am a user logged into the BookShelfHub platform, when I navigate to the Comprehensive Marketing Dashboard, then I should see real-time metrics for all active marketing campaigns, including engagement rates and audience demographics.

Tracking Conversion Rates Over Time

Given that I have launched marketing initiatives, when I select a specific campaign on the dashboard, then I should be able to view conversion rates over different time periods, such as daily, weekly, and monthly.

Integrating with External Marketing Tools

Given that I am using external marketing tools, when I connect these tools to the Comprehensive Marketing Dashboard, then the dashboard should automatically update with data from these linked tools without manual input.

Identifying Top-Performing Marketing Strategies

Given that I have multiple marketing campaigns running, when I review the campaign performance data on the dashboard, then I should be able to identify which campaigns have generated the highest ROI based on sales metrics.

Setting Future Campaign Goals Based on Insights

Given that I have analyzed the performance data presented in the dashboard, when I create a new marketing campaign, then I should have the option to set specific goals based on insights gained from past campaigns.

Exporting Campaign Data for Reporting

Given that I need to share marketing performance data with my team, when I select the export option on the dashboard, then I should be able to download the campaign metrics in a CSV format that is easy to read and share.

Understanding Audience Demographics

Given that I am analyzing the audience engagement data, when I view the audience demographics section of the dashboard, then I should see data segmented by age, gender, and geographic location.

ROI Calculation for Campaigns

User Story: As a publisher, I want to calculate the ROI of my marketing campaigns so that I can determine which strategies are most profitable and allocate my budget effectively.
Description: The ROI Calculation feature allows users to automatically compute the return on investment for specific marketing campaigns, enabling them to understand the financial impact of their efforts. By inputting costs associated with each campaign and correlating them with sales data, this tool provides a straightforward calculation of profits versus costs. This feature is essential for authors and publishers to strategize their marketing budget effectively and prioritize campaigns that yield the best financial outcomes.
Acceptance Criteria: Inputting marketing campaign costs and sales data for ROI calculation.

Given the user inputs the total cost of a marketing campaign and the associated sales revenue, when the user clicks on the 'Calculate ROI' button, then the system should display the correct ROI percentage based on the formula (Sales Revenue - Campaign Cost) / Campaign Cost * 100.

Comparing the ROI of multiple marketing campaigns.

Given the user has entered historical data for at least two marketing campaigns, when the user selects the option to compare ROI, then the system should generate a comparison report displaying the ROI for each campaign side by side.

Generating a visual representation of marketing campaign performance over time.

Given the user has inputted marketing costs and sales data over multiple time periods, when the user requests a graphical report of the ROI trends, then the system should produce a line graph illustrating ROI trends for each campaign time period clearly labeled and easily interpretable.

Providing guidance on maximizing ROI from future campaigns.

Given the user has accessed the ROI Calculation feature, when the user reviews the ROI calculation results, then the system should offer actionable insights and recommendations based on historical data to improve campaign performance and ROI in future initiatives.

Validating that error handling works when incorrect data is entered.

Given the user inputs invalid data (e.g., negative numbers for costs or sales), when the user attempts to calculate ROI, then the system should display a meaningful error message advising the user of the nature of the input error.

Exporting ROI reports for offline use.

Given the user has generated an ROI report, when the user selects the 'Export' option, then the system should allow the user to download the report in a commonly used format (e.g., PDF or CSV) without loss of data integrity.

Campaign Effectiveness Reporting

User Story: As a marketer, I want to generate reports on the effectiveness of my marketing campaigns so that I can analyze performance trends and improve future efforts based on insights we gather.
Description: The Campaign Effectiveness Reporting feature generates detailed reports on the performance of marketing campaigns over specified time frames. These reports include data on sales performance, customer engagement, and marketing costs, providing users with a holistic view of their initiatives' effectiveness. By analyzing these reports, authors and publishers can refine their marketing strategies based on data-driven insights, optimizing their efforts for better outcomes in future campaigns.
Acceptance Criteria: Generate a report for marketing campaign effectiveness over a quarterly period.

Given a selected marketing campaign for the specified quarter, when the report is generated, then it must include sales performance metrics, customer engagement data, and marketing costs.

View the generated report in various formats (PDF, Excel, and HTML).

Given a report is generated, when the user selects the desired format for downloading, then the report should successfully download in that format without data loss or corruption.

Filter campaign effectiveness reports by campaign type and date range.

Given the report generation page, when the user applies filters for campaign type and a date range, then the displayed report should reflect only the campaigns that fit the applied criteria.

Share the campaign effectiveness report with team members via email.

Given a generated report, when the user selects the share option and inputs email addresses, then the system should send the report to the specified addresses with no errors.

Compare two or more marketing campaigns' effectiveness side-by-side.

Given two or more selected campaigns, when the user initiates a comparison, then the report should display a side-by-side analysis of sales performance, customer engagement, and costs for each campaign.

View historical effectiveness reporting to identify trends over multiple quarters.

Given a selection of historical quarters, when the user requests a trend report, then the system should provide data visualizations that highlight trends in sales performance and marketing costs over the selected periods.

Segmented Audience Analysis

User Story: As a publisher, I want to analyze my audience segments to refine my targeting strategy so that I can create personalized marketing efforts that resonate well with each group.
Description: Segmented Audience Analysis empowers users to dive deep into their audience data, allowing for the identification of different customer segments based on behavior, preferences, and purchasing history. This feature integrates with marketing initiatives to tailor campaigns specifically for each segment, improving engagement rates and conversion chances. By understanding their audience better, authors and publishers can create targeted marketing strategies that resonate more effectively with their customers, enhancing the overall success of their campaigns.
Acceptance Criteria: Analyzing the segmented audience data for an upcoming book launch campaign.

Given the user has defined multiple customer segments based on behavior and preferences, when the user accesses the Segmented Audience Analysis tool, then the tool should display relevant audience metrics for each defined segment with visual representations of the data.

Creating a targeted marketing campaign based on audience segment insights.

Given the user reviews the audience insights from the Segmented Audience Analysis, when the user selects a specific segment to create a marketing campaign, then the system should allow the user to customize campaign strategies and messages specific to that audience segment.

Evaluating the effectiveness of a previously executed campaign targeted at a specific audience segment.

Given the user has previously executed a marketing campaign for a defined audience segment, when the user compares campaign performance metrics to segmented audience preferences, then the system should provide an overall engagement score and suggestions for future campaigns.

Identifying which customer segments yielded the highest conversion rates.

Given the user has access to sales data and audience segmentation, when the user runs an analysis report, then the report should clearly indicate which segments had the highest conversion rates and provide actionable insights to optimize future marketing efforts.

Integrating segmented audience analysis with ongoing marketing activities.

Given the user is executing a marketing campaign, when the user applies insights from the Segmented Audience Analysis, then the system should automatically adjust the campaign parameters to better target the identified segments accordingly.

Multi-channel Performance Tracking

User Story: As a marketer, I want to track the performance of my campaigns across multiple channels so that I can identify the best platforms for my marketing efforts.
Description: The Multi-channel Performance Tracking feature allows users to monitor the performance of their marketing campaigns across various platforms, including social media, email, and online ads. This integration provides insights into which channels are driving the most engagement and sales, helping users allocate resources efficiently. By understanding the effectiveness of each marketing channel, authors and publishers can optimize their strategies accordingly, ensuring better resource utilization and higher ROI.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors analyze their marketing strategies using the Multi-channel Performance Tracking feature during a quarterly review meeting.

Given the author has configured their marketing channels, When they access the Multi-channel Performance Tracking dashboard, Then they should see an overview of engagements and sales for each channel, with data updated within the last 24 hours.

A small publishing house wants to assess which of their social media campaigns had the highest impact on sales during a book launch event.

Given the publishing house has inputted campaign data prior to the launch, When they run a performance report after the event, Then they should receive a detailed comparison of the effectiveness of each social media campaign based on engagement metrics and resulting sales.

An author proactively seeks to optimize their email marketing strategy after reviewing the performance metrics from the last campaign.

Given the author has previously run multiple email campaigns, When they access the Multi-channel Performance Tracking feature and select the email channel, Then they should view the engagement rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates for each campaign, allowing them to identify trends and optimize future emails.

A marketing manager at a publishing house reviews the overall effectiveness of digital advertising campaigns to report to stakeholders.

Given the marketing manager has implemented various online ads, When they generate a comprehensive report using the Multi-channel Performance Tracking tool, Then the report should include conversion rates, ROI for each ad, and suggestions for adjusting future spend based on performance data.

An independent author uses the Multi-channel Performance Tracking feature to compare sales generated from email newsletters versus social media posts.

Given the author has linked their sales data with email and social media campaigns, When they retrieve a comparative report, Then they should be able to see side-by-side analytics showing sales figures, engagement rates, and the overall impact of both channels on their latest book release.

A user checks the historical performance data to evaluate long-term trends in their marketing effectiveness.

Given the user has access to historical marketing data, When they select a date range in the Multi-channel Performance Tracking feature, Then they should be able to view and analyze trends regarding engagement and sales over the selected period.

Revenue Trend Alerts

This notification system keeps users informed of significant changes in their royalty earnings, such as spikes or drops. By providing timely alerts, authors and publishers can respond quickly to emerging trends, adjusting their marketing tactics or inventory strategies to capitalize on opportunities or mitigate losses.

Requirements

Revenue Trend Notifications

User Story: As an author, I want to receive real-time notifications about changes in my royalty earnings so that I can adjust my marketing strategies accordingly and maximize my revenues.
Description: The Revenue Trend Notifications requirement aims to develop a system that automatically tracks and analyzes the royalty earnings of authors and publishers. This feature will send real-time alerts to users when significant changes occur in their revenue patterns, such as spikes or drops. By implementing a machine learning algorithm, the system will intelligently identify noteworthy trends and notify users via email or in-app notifications, allowing them to quickly respond to evolving market conditions. This functionality will empower authors and publishers to make informed decisions about their marketing and inventory strategies, thereby optimizing their revenue potential and enhancing their overall business performance.
Acceptance Criteria: Notification of Revenue Spikes

Given a user has set up their account for revenue notifications, When there is a spike of more than 20% in their royalty earnings within a 7-day period, Then the user receives an email alert and an in-app notification detailing the spike and the relevant metrics.

Notification of Revenue Drops

Given a user has activated revenue trend alerts, When there is a drop of more than 15% in their royalty earnings compared to the previous month, Then the user receives an immediate notification via both email and the app with insights on the decline.

Customizable Notification Thresholds

Given a user accesses their notification settings, When they adjust the thresholds for revenue fluctuations, Then the system updates the alert conditions and provides a confirmation message that the settings have been successfully saved.

Real-time Data Analysis

Given the revenue trend alerts feature is active, When the machine learning algorithm detects significant revenue pattern changes, Then the system analyzes the data within 5 minutes and sends out notifications accordingly.

User Engagement with Alerts

Given a user receives a revenue trend alert, When the user engages with the alert through the app, Then they are directed to a detailed report on earnings trends and suggested actions based on the alert.

Historical Data Comparison

Given the revenue trend notifications system is live, When a user requests to view historical earnings data, Then the system displays a comparative analysis of earnings trends over the past 12 months alongside significant alerts.

Alert Frequency Management

Given a user wants to manage the frequency of their notifications, When they set their preferred alert frequency to either immediate or daily summaries, Then the system adheres to this preference and confirms the update.

Customizable Alert Settings

User Story: As a publisher, I want to customize my alert settings for revenue trends so that I receive notifications that are relevant to my specific business needs and preferences.
Description: The Customizable Alert Settings requirement provides users with the ability to personalize the threshold levels for revenue trends that generate alerts. Users will be able to specify what constitutes a significant spike or drop in their earnings, thereby ensuring that alerts are tailored to their specific needs and preferences. This enhances user experience by preventing notification fatigue from minor fluctuations and allows users to focus on the most impactful revenue changes. The implementation of this feature will involve designing a user-friendly interface where users can easily set and modify their preferences for alert criteria, notification methods, and frequency of updates.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets up customized alert settings for royalty earnings based on personal thresholds for spikes and drops in a specific time period.

Given a user is on the Alert Settings page, when the user inputs specific threshold levels for revenue spikes and drops, then the system must save these settings and reflect them in the user's profile correctly.

User receives an alert notification when their earnings exceed the defined threshold for a spike.

Given a user has set a spike threshold of 20% increase in earnings, when the actual earnings spike exceeds this threshold within the chosen time frame, then the user must receive an instant notification via their preferred method (email or app notification).

User modifies existing alert settings to change the notification frequency from daily to weekly.

Given a user is on the Alert Settings page, when the user changes the notification frequency dropdown from 'Daily' to 'Weekly' and saves the changes, then the system must update the notification settings accordingly and confirm the update to the user.

User attempts to set an alert for a threshold that is too low to trigger alerts effectively.

Given a user is setting the threshold for a revenue drop, when the user inputs a drop threshold of less than 1%, then the system must display an error message indicating that the threshold is invalid and prompt the user to enter a higher value.

User wishes to receive alerts through multiple channels (email and in-app notifications).

Given a user has selected both email and in-app notification options for alerts, when a revenue trend occurs that meets the specified thresholds, then the user must receive notifications through both channels without any delay.

User wants to delete the customized alert settings they previously established.

Given a user is on the Alert Settings page, when the user selects the option to delete their current alert settings and confirms the action, then the system must remove all related alert configurations and notify the user of the successful deletion.

User monitors their history of revenue alerts triggered in the past month.

Given a user is on the Revenue Alerts History page, when the user views the past month’s alerts, then the system must display a comprehensive log of all alerts triggered, including type of alert and date/time, accurately reflecting the user’s settings.

Trend Analysis Dashboard

User Story: As an author, I want to access a visual dashboard that shows my revenue trends over time so that I can analyze my financial performance and make informed strategic choices.
Description: The Trend Analysis Dashboard requirement involves the creation of a visual analytics interface that displays detailed historical and current revenue trends for users. This dashboard will allow authors and publishers to monitor their earnings over time, identify patterns, and assess the effectiveness of their marketing initiatives. The functionality will include interactive graphs, comparative analytics, and export capabilities. By integrating data visualization tools, users can easily interpret complex data and derive actionable insights, facilitating strategic planning and data-driven decision-making. This feature will be essential for empowering users to fully understand their financial performance in relation to their marketing efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: Display of Revenue Overview

Given a user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Trend Analysis Dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of their total revenue trends over the past 12 months displayed as a line graph.

Interactive Graph Features

Given a user views the Trend Analysis Dashboard, when they hover over specific points on the revenue trend graph, then they should see detailed information about revenue figures, including date and amount earned.

Data Filtering Options

Given a user is on the Trend Analysis Dashboard, when they select specific filters for dates and types of earnings, then the dashboard should update to only display revenue data that meets the defined criteria.

Comparative Analytics View

Given a user accesses the Trend Analysis Dashboard, when they request a comparative analysis with a previous period, then they should see an overlay graph comparing current and past revenue trends.

Export Functionality

Given a user on the Trend Analysis Dashboard, when they click on the export button, then they should be able to download their revenue trend data in CSV format without errors.

Mobile Responsiveness

Given a user accesses the Trend Analysis Dashboard on a mobile device, when they view the dashboard, then all graphical elements and data should be clearly displayed and functional for touch interaction.

User Notifications for Revenue Changes

Given a user is monitoring their revenue trends on the dashboard, when a significant spike or drop occurs in earnings, then a notification should be sent to the user to alert them of this change.

Multi-channel Tracking Integration

User Story: As a publisher, I want to see my royalty earnings from all sales channels in one place so that I can easily understand my overall performance and revenue sources.
Description: The Multi-channel Tracking Integration requirement is focused on enabling the notification system to pull data from various sales channels, including e-commerce platforms, bookstores, and market places. This feature will ensure that authors and publishers have a comprehensive view of their royalty earnings across all channels, allowing them to track overall performance and identify which venues contribute most to their revenue. By aggregating data from multiple sources, this functionality will provide a more holistic approach to revenue analysis and trend notifications. Additionally, this integration will require establishing API connections with third-party platforms and ensuring data consistency and accuracy across channels.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of Multiple Sales Channel Data into Revenue Trend Alerts

Given that the user has connected multiple sales channels to BookShelfHub, when significant changes in royalty earnings occur, then an alert must be triggered indicating the fluctuation and source of revenue.

API Connection Establishment for Sales Channels

Given that the user has provided the necessary credentials for third-party platforms, when the API connections are established, then data should be consistently pulled from all connected channels with no discrepancies.

Real-Time Aggregation of Royalty Data from Various Sources

Given that data from multiple sales channels is available, when the user accesses the revenue dashboard, then they should see an aggregated view of their royalty earnings broken down by channel, updated in real time.

Notification Customization for Revenue Trends

Given that the user is in the settings page of the Revenue Trend Alerts, when they select their preferences for alert frequency and thresholds, then their choices should be saved and applied without error.

User Experience for Alert Notification Delivery

Given that an alert has been triggered due to a significant change, when the user logs into the platform or checks their connected email, then they should receive a timely notification about the alert with accurate details.

Validation of Data Accuracy in Revenue Trend Reports

Given the aggregated data from multiple sales channels, when the user compares reported earnings to actual sales records, then the discrepancies should not exceed 5% for the reports to be considered accurate.

User Access to Historical Revenue Data for Trends Analysis

Given that the user requests historical revenue data, when they navigate to the revenue trends section, then they should be able to access and analyze at least the past 12 months of sales data.

Custom Reporting Tool

This feature empowers users to generate tailored reports based on their unique criteria or questions about their earnings. Whether tracking royalties over specific time frames or analyzing sales by genre, this customizable reporting interface makes it easy to extract insights that can inform business decisions.

Requirements

Dynamic Filter Options

User Story: As a publisher, I want to apply different filters to my reports so that I can analyze earnings and sales based on specific criteria relevant to my business needs.
Description: The Dynamic Filter Options requirement enables users to customize their reporting criteria through interactive filter settings. Users will be able to select various parameters such as date ranges, book genres, author names, and sales locations. This functionality enhances the user experience by allowing them to generate highly relevant reports that reflect their specific interests and business goals. By integrating these filters seamlessly into the Custom Reporting Tool, users can easily drill down into the data that matters most to them, leading to more informed decision-making regarding marketing strategies and royalty tracking.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to generate a report on royalties earned from a specific book over the last quarter.

Given a user selects the date range for the last quarter and the specific book title, when the user clicks 'Generate Report', then the system should display a report of total royalties earned for that book within the selected date range.

A publisher wants to analyze sales data to compare the performance of fiction versus non-fiction books.

Given a user selects 'Fiction' and 'Non-Fiction' genres as filters, when the user clicks 'Compare', then the system should generate a side-by-side report of total sales for fiction and non-fiction books.

An author wants to track their sales performance by geographical locations over a six-month period.

Given a user selects a six-month date range and specifies geographical locations, when the user submits the filter criteria, then the system should generate a report summarizing sales figures for the specified locations and time frame.

A small publishing house is interested in understanding how their sales are impacted by seasonal promotions.

Given a user sets the date filter to include all seasons and selects a promotional campaign as a filter, when the user clicks 'Generate Seasonal Sales Report', then the system should provide insights on sales volume during the promotional periods.

An editor wants to see all sales transactions for a particular author during the last year.

Given a user selects the author name and a date range covering the last year, when the user clicks 'View Transactions', then the system should display detailed sales transactions relevant to that author for the selected timeframe.

A marketing manager needs a report on book performance metrics by author to plan upcoming campaigns.

Given a user selects multiple author names as a filter, when the user clicks 'Generate Performance Metrics', then the system should create a report displaying key metrics such as total sales, average rating, and number of reviews for the selected authors.

Export Options

User Story: As a user, I want to export my reports in different formats so that I can share my findings with my team more effectively.
Description: The Export Options requirement allows users to download their customized reports in various formats, such as PDF, Excel, or CSV. This functionality not only enhances usability but also allows users to share reports with their teams or stakeholders. By providing multiple export formats, users can pivot their data analysis and presentation based on their audience, enabling easier collaboration and reporting in different business contexts. This capability is vital for transparency and communication among team members.
Acceptance Criteria: User exports a customized report containing sales data segmented by genre for the last quarter.

Given that the user has customized the report with genre and time frame, when they select 'Export' and choose 'PDF' format, then the system should generate a downloadable PDF report containing accurate and formatted sales data for the selected genre and time period.

A user wishes to analyze their royalties over a specific time frame and chooses to export this information.

Given that the user has filtered the royalty report for a specific date range, when they click on 'Export' and select 'Excel' format, then the system should provide a downloadable Excel file with correctly formatted royalty data for the selected time frame.

An author wants to share their customized sales report with their marketing team in a format that is easily editable.

Given that the author has generated a sales report, when they choose 'Export' and select 'CSV' format, then the system should enable the download of a CSV file that is correctly structured for compatibility with common spreadsheet applications.

A publisher needs to create and export a detailed financial report for an upcoming board meeting.

Given that the user has accessed the financial reporting tool and selected various financial indicators, when they opt to export the report and select any available format, then the system should successfully generate the report in the selected format without any data loss or corruption.

A user is testing the export functionality to confirm the accuracy of the generated report.

Given that the user has exported a report in the 'PDF' format, when they open the document, then all data displayed in the report should match the data shown in the application before export, ensuring data integrity during the export process.

Scheduled Reporting

User Story: As an author, I want to schedule reports to be emailed to me regularly so that I can keep track of my sales and royalties without having to generate the report manually.
Description: The Scheduled Reporting requirement empowers users to automate the generation and delivery of reports at designated intervals, such as daily, weekly, or monthly. Users can set specific criteria for each scheduled report, ensuring they receive regular updates without needing to manually generate reports each time. This feature is critical for maintaining ongoing visibility into performance metrics and ensuring that users are consistently informed about their business status. Automation supports efficiency and helps users save time on routine tasks.
Acceptance Criteria: User schedules a weekly royalty report to be delivered every Monday at 9 AM.

Given the user has set criteria for the report, When the scheduled time arrives, Then the report should be generated and emailed to the designated recipients without errors.

User modifies an existing scheduled report to change its frequency from weekly to monthly.

Given the user has accessed the scheduled reports management section, When they select a report and change its frequency to monthly, Then the system should update the report schedule correctly, and it should be reflected in the user's reporting dashboard.

User views the status of scheduled reports to ensure they are being generated as intended.

Given the user is in the reporting dashboard, When they check the status of their scheduled reports, Then the status should show ‘Active’ for reports that are scheduled correctly and ‘Pending’ for those due to be generated soon.

User receives a notification if a scheduled report fails to generate due to a system error.

Given that a report has failed to generate due to an error, When the user checks the notifications section, Then they should see an alert that indicates which report failed and the reason for the failure.

User sets specific criteria for a scheduled marketing performance report that includes sales by genre and author.

Given the user specifies their report parameters, When they save these criteria as part of the scheduled report settings, Then the system should accurately reflect these criteria in the confirmation of the scheduled report.

User cancels a scheduled report and confirms the cancellation action.

Given the user selects a scheduled report to cancel, When they confirm the cancellation, Then the report should no longer appear in the scheduled reports list with a confirmation message indicated.

User sets up multiple scheduled reports with different time intervals and criteria.

Given the user has created three scheduled reports with varying criteria and intervals, When they view the scheduled reports dashboard, Then all reports should be listed with their respective next generation time displayed correctly.

Visual Data Representation

User Story: As a marketer, I want to see my earnings data visually represented so that I can easily identify trends and present them to clients.
Description: The Visual Data Representation requirement provides users with graphical illustrations of their reporting data, including charts, graphs, and infographics. This functionality enhances the interpretability of complex data, enabling users to quickly grasp trends and patterns in their sales and royalties. By integrating visuals into the reporting tool, users can present their findings in a more engaging manner, improving discussions during team meetings and allowing for better strategic planning based on clear visual insights.
Acceptance Criteria: As a user of the Custom Reporting Tool, I want to generate a monthly sales report with visual data representations so that I can effectively analyze my sales performance over the last month.

Given that I have selected the 'Monthly Sales Report' option and specified the time frame for the last month, When I click 'Generate Report', Then a graphical representation of my sales data should appear, including bar charts for each week and a line graph showing total sales trends throughout the month.

As an author using BookShelfHub, I need to visualize my royalties earned over the past year to identify seasonal trends in my income streams.

Given that I have chosen the 'Yearly Royalties Report' and selected the past year, When I view the report, Then it should display a pie chart illustrating the distribution of royalties by book title and a trend line chart showing monthly royalties over the year.

As a small publishing house manager, I want to review sales by genre visually to inform our next publishing decisions during a team meeting.

Given that I have selected the 'Sales by Genre Report', When I generate the report, Then it should produce a bar graph comparing sales figures for each genre and an accompanying table detailing the number of titles sold by genre.

As a marketing strategist, I need to present a visual analysis of audience engagement data over the last quarter to determine which marketing campaigns were most effective.

Given that I have accessed the 'Audience Engagement Report' for the last quarter, When I generate the report, Then I should see a combination of line graphs illustrating engagement trends and a heat map showing peak engagement times.

As an editor within BookShelfHub, I want to visualize authors' sales data to provide feedback and guidance on their marketing efforts.

Given that I have selected an author’s profile and accessed the 'Sales Dashboard', When I view the dashboard, Then it should display a comprehensive infograph summarizing the author's performance, including totals, progress, and comparisons to previous periods.

As a new member of the publishing team, I wish to learn how to read visual reports generated by the Custom Reporting Tool to better understand our sales metrics.

Given that I have opened the 'Help' section while viewing a visual report, When I select 'Understanding Visual Data', Then I should see a tutorial that provides clear explanations of each graph and chart present in the reporting interface.

User Access Control

User Story: As an administrator, I want to set user permissions for reporting tools so that I can protect sensitive data while allowing appropriate access to team members.
Description: The User Access Control requirement allows administrators to define permissions and access levels for different users within the Custom Reporting Tool. By implementing role-based access control, sensitive financial data will be secured while still allowing team members to access the information relevant to their roles. This feature is essential for maintaining confidentiality and ensuring that only authorized personnel can view or modify specific reports or reporting criteria, fostering a secure and compliant workflow.
Acceptance Criteria: As an administrator, I want to assign specific roles to users in the Custom Reporting Tool, so that they can only access reports relevant to their responsibilities without seeing sensitive information.

Given the administrator is logged into the BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the User Management section and assign roles to users, then the users should only be able to access the reporting areas that correspond to their assigned roles.

As a team member with a specific role, I want to run a report based on my access level, so that I can view data pertinent to my work without accessing sensitive financial information.

Given the team member has logged into the Custom Reporting Tool, when they attempt to access a report outside their permission level, then they should receive an access denied notification and not be able to view that report.

As an administrator, I want to audit user access to reports, so that I can ensure compliance with our security protocols and manage role assignments effectively.

Given the administrator has navigated to the Audit Logs section, when they review user access logs, then they should be able to see an accurate and detailed history of which users accessed which reports, including date and time stamps.

As an author or editor, I want to request access to additional reporting tools, so that I can analyze data that is currently restricted based on my role.

Given the author or editor submits an access request through the system, when the request is approved by an administrator, then their role should be updated accordingly to allow access to the requested reports.

As an administrator, I want to revoke user access quickly, so that I can maintain control over who has access to sensitive financial reports when roles change.

Given that the administrator is logged into the User Management section, when they revoke access for a user, then the user should be immediately unable to log in to the Custom Reporting Tool or access any reports related to their previous role.

As an administrator, I want to set default roles for new users, so that they can have the appropriate access without manual input each time a new user is created.

Given the administrator is configuring user roles, when they create a new user, then that user should automatically be assigned the default access level set by the administrator.

Cross-Platform Comparison

Authors and publishers can use this feature to compare royalty earnings across multiple sales platforms side-by-side. By understanding where their titles perform best, users can focus their efforts on the most profitable channels, maximizing their overall sales potential.

Requirements

Cross-Platform Royalty Insights

User Story: As an author, I want to compare my royalty earnings from different sales platforms so that I can understand where my titles perform best and optimize my marketing efforts accordingly.
Description: This requirement involves creating a robust analytics dashboard that allows users to visualize and compare royalty earnings from different platforms in real-time. Users will benefit from a side-by-side analysis that not only shows current earnings but also historical performance trends for each platform. This functionality will empower authors and publishers to make data-driven decisions about where to allocate their marketing efforts and identify opportunities for growth. By integrating this dashboard seamlessly with existing BookShelfHub project management and marketing tools, users can harmoniously manage their publishing strategies with grounded insights into platform performance. Overall, this requirement aims to enhance user experience by providing transparent and actionable financial analytics.
Acceptance Criteria: Viewing Real-Time Royalty Data from Multiple Platforms

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Cross-Platform Royalty Insights dashboard, then they should see an interactive chart displaying real-time royalty earnings from selected platforms side-by-side.

Historical Performance Analysis

Given the user selects specific date ranges for analysis, when they view the Cross-Platform Royalty Insights dashboard, then they should see historical performance trends for each selected platform clearly displayed over the chosen period.

Identifying Top-Performing Platforms

Given the user has reviewed the side-by-side earnings data, when they filter the results, then they should be able to identify the top-performing platforms based on royalty earnings within a specified timeframe.

Exporting Data for Reports

Given the user is satisfied with the insights from the dashboard, when they select the export option, then they should be able to download a report of the royalty earnings data in a user-friendly format (CSV or PDF).

User Notifications for Significant Changes in Earnings

Given the user has set up alerts for their selected platforms, when there is a significant change in earnings (increase or decrease of 20% or more), then the user should receive a notification through the platform alerts system within 24 hours of the change.

Integration with Marketing Tools

Given the user is planning marketing activities, when they access the insights from the Cross-Platform Royalty Insights dashboard, then they should see recommendations for marketing actions based on the platform performance data presented.

Customizable Reporting Features

User Story: As a publisher, I want to customize my sales reports based on specific metrics so that I can get accurate insights tailored to my business needs.
Description: This requirement focuses on giving users the ability to customize their reports based on specific metrics and timeframes. Users will be able to select different sales channels, time periods, and metrics (like total sales, average earnings per platform, etc.) to generate tailored reports that suit their individual needs. This flexibility will enable authors and publishers to extract the exact information they need for strategic planning and performance evaluations. The customizable reporting tool will integrate tightly with existing data repositories within BookShelfHub, ensuring that information is updated in real-time. Additionally, this feature will enhance usability as authors can set report templates for recurring analyses, saving valuable time and effort.
Acceptance Criteria: As a user, I want to generate a sales report for my book across different platforms for the last quarter, so I can evaluate the performance of each platform and make informed marketing decisions based on the data.

Given the user has selected the timeframe of the last quarter and included metrics for total sales and average earnings per platform, When the user generates the report, Then the report should display the total sales and average earnings for each selected platform accurately.

As a publisher, I need to create a template for my monthly sales report, so that I can automate data generation for ongoing performance review without needing to select metrics each time.

Given the user is in the report template creation interface, When the user saves the template with specific metrics and timeframes selected, Then the template should be retrievable and automatically apply the same selections when requested.

As an author, I want to compare my royalty earnings from different platforms side-by-side for the current year, to understand which platforms are most profitable for my book.

Given the user selects the current year and chooses multiple platforms, When the report is generated, Then the report should display side-by-side comparisons of royalty earnings for each selected platform for the current year.

As an independent author, I want to update the sales channels in my report to include only the platforms I am currently using, so that my reports reflect accurate data.

Given the user is viewing an existing report, When the user removes a sales channel from the report and saves it, Then the updated report should no longer display data from the removed sales channel.

As a small publishing house, I want to customize a report that shows the performance metrics of my authors over a custom timeframe, allowing for performance evaluations based on the chosen period.

Given the user selects a custom timeframe and multiple authors, When the report is generated, Then the report should accurately reflect the metrics for each author within the specified timeframe.

As a data analyst for a publishing company, I want the reporting feature to automatically pull data from our existing repositories to ensure that the report reflects real-time sales information.

Given the user opens the reporting tool, When a report is generated, Then the data should be pulled in real-time from the connected data repositories, ensuring accuracy and timeliness of the information displayed.

Comparative Performance Alerts

User Story: As an author, I want to receive alerts when my book's sales performance declines on any platform so that I can quickly react and implement corrective measures.
Description: Implementing this requirement will allow users to receive alerts based on comparative performance metrics. For example, if a particular title's sales on one platform drop significantly compared to others, users can set up alerts to inform them immediately. This proactive feature serves to keep users informed of changes in performance, enabling timely interventions or shifts in marketing strategies. By analyzing fluctuations across platforms, authors and publishers can identify potential issues early and adjust their approaches to maintain or enhance sales performance. Integrating alert functionalities with user settings allows for compliance with user preferences around control and notification frequency.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives alerts for significant sales drop on publishing platform.

Given a user has enabled comparative performance alerts for their titles, when the sales of a particular title on one platform drop by more than 30% compared to the previous week, then the user should receive an immediate alert via their chosen notification method (email/SMS/app notification).

User can customize alert frequency based on preference.

Given a user is in their settings to configure notification preferences, when they choose to set alert frequency to 'daily', then they should receive a performance alert summary once every day. When they choose 'weekly', then they should receive a performance alert summary once a week.

User reviews historical performance metrics before setting alerts.

Given a user is reviewing the performance metrics of their titles over the last three months, when they select a title, then they should be able to view a historical comparison graph showing sales performance across multiple platforms before opting to set alerts.

User can disable alerts for specific titles.

Given a user has set alerts for multiple titles, when they select a title and choose the 'disable alerts' option, then alerts for that specific title should be turned off, and no further notifications should be sent for performance changes related to that title.

Users can see alert history for past notifications.

Given a user has received performance alerts, when they navigate to the alert history tab within the app, then they should be able to view a chronological list of all past alerts with details on the titles and the specific sales performance changes that triggered each alert.

Users get recommended actions based on alert notifications.

Given a user receives an alert about a significant drop in sales, when they open the alert notification, then they should see recommended actions such as 'Increase marketing efforts on this platform' or 'Consider revising pricing' tailored to the specific performance issue.

User can manage alert settings from a mobile app.

Given a user is accessing BookShelfHub through the mobile app, when they navigate to the alerts settings section, then they should be able to modify their alert preferences, including enabling/disabling alerts and adjusting notification methods without any functionality issues.

Comprehensive Competitive Analysis

User Story: As a publisher, I want to analyze the sales performance of my books against similar titles in the market so that I can adjust my strategies to improve competitiveness.
Description: This requirement emphasizes the need to compare the user's title performance against similar titles in the market. By integrating a feature that collects and analyzes competitive data, BookShelfHub will provide insights into how the user’s works stack up against comparable offerings in terms of sales and royalties. This information is invaluable for authors and publishers seeking to understand market positioning and develop competitive marketing strategies. The comparative analysis tool will offer visualizations that encapsulate this data for enhanced understanding, feeding back into the user's marketing tactics as they learn where they stand in relation to competitors. Ensuring that this analysis is comprehensive will be critical in aiding users in making strategic decisions regarding pricing, promotional efforts, and market alignment.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors and publishers access the comparative analysis tool after uploading their title details to examine how their book performs against similar titles in the market.

Given the user has uploaded their title and selected comparable titles to analyze, when they access the comparative analysis tool, then they should see a side-by-side performance comparison in terms of sales and royalties with visualizations.

Users select different platforms to analyze royalty earnings and sales data for their titles through the comprehensive competitive analysis tool.

Given the user has selected multiple sales platforms to compare, when they initiate the comparative analysis, then the system must display a clear breakdown of royalty earnings and sales data, segmented by platform, in an easy-to-understand format.

Authors receive notifications on their title's performance relative to competitors to guide their marketing strategies based on the analysis results.

Given that the analysis is complete, when the user registers for notifications, then they should receive automated updates comparing their title's performance quarterly against similar titles, including actionable insights for improving market strategy.

Publishers utilize visual data from the comparative analysis to adjust pricing and promotional efforts effectively.

Given that the user has access to visualizations from the analysis, when they view the data presentation, then they should be able to interact with the visual elements to adjust pricing or promotional strategies based on the provided insights.

Users evaluate the accuracy of competitive data collected by the platform to ensure confidence in decision-making.

Given the competitive analysis has been conducted, when the user reviews the sources of the comparative data, then they must verify that all data stems from reputable platforms and is updated regularly for accuracy in performance insights.

The system provides an option for users to filter competitors by genres or categories relevant to their title for a more focused analysis.

Given that the user is analyzing title performance, when they apply filters for genres or categories in the comparison tool, then they should receive tailored insights that reflect the competitive landscape specifically within those selected genres or categories.

Users can export the analysis results for external sharing or deeper internal review for strategic planning.

Given the user has completed the comparative analysis, when they select the export function, then the system must successfully create a downloadable report in multiple formats (PDF, CSV) that encompasses all insights and visualizations from the analysis.

Multi-Currency Support for Earnings

User Story: As a publisher, I want to view my royalty earnings in different currencies so that I can better understand my global market performance.
Description: This requirement focuses on allowing users to view their royalty earnings in multiple currencies based on the sales platform’s currency. Given that many authors and publishers sell internationally, this feature will help users understand their revenues in the context of global markets. Users will be able to select their preferred currency for viewing earnings and will also have access to real-time conversion rates, fostering a clearer understanding of their actual earnings. This capability will integrate with BookShelfHub’s existing financial tracking system, ensuring consistency and reliability of data. Overall, this feature will enhance the user’s financial literacy in a global context and simplify the complexities involved in international sales.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors and publishers access their earnings report on BookShelfHub in a desired currency after reviewing their performance across various sales platforms.

Given the user has selected a preferred currency, When the earnings report is generated, Then all royalty earnings should be displayed in the selected currency with accurate real-time conversion rates applied.

After changing the preferred currency in the system settings, users look for the updated earnings view across all platforms.

Given the user has updated their preferred currency in the settings, When they navigate to the earnings report page, Then the displayed earnings should reflect the updated currency without discrepancies.

Users wish to compare their earnings on different platforms with crucial insights on currency differences.

Given that the user is analyzing earnings across multiple platforms, When they enable cross-platform comparison, Then the system shall display earnings from each platform side-by-side in the selected currency, along with the amount converted to the default currency for easy viewing.

A publisher wants to view real-time conversion rates to aid in understanding their earnings better.

Given the user selects the option to view conversion rates, When the user accesses the earnings report, Then real-time conversion rates for their preferred currency versus each sales platform's currency should be visible and regularly updated.

An author reviews historical earnings to analyze trends and make strategic decisions for upcoming releases.

Given the user accesses the historical earnings section, When they select a specific date range and currency, Then the earnings report should reflect the chosen currency and accurately depict earnings data for that range.

A user needs to switch back to their original currency while reviewing earnings reports.

Given the user is viewing their earnings in a chosen currency, When they select the option to revert to the default currency, Then the system must convert and display all earnings automatically in the original currency without loss of data accuracy.

Campaign Customization Wizard

This feature guides users through a step-by-step process to create tailor-made marketing campaigns that resonate with their unique brand voice and marketing goals. By leveraging user data and preferences, the Campaign Customization Wizard ensures that every campaign is personalized, increasing engagement rates and making campaigns feel more intentional and aligned with the audience.

Requirements

User Data Integration

User Story: As an independent publisher, I want to leverage user data to create personalized marketing campaigns so that I can engage my audience more effectively and improve my campaign performance.
Description: The User Data Integration requirement involves the seamless collection and utilization of user information such as preferences, past campaign performance, and demographic data to craft highly personalized marketing campaigns. By integrating analytics tools, the feature will analyze user interactions and feed insights into the Campaign Customization Wizard, allowing users to fine-tune their campaign strategies based on real-time feedback. This enriches user experience, enhances targeting accuracy, and ultimately leads to higher engagement rates, contributing to the platform's goal of providing tailored marketing solutions for publishers.
Acceptance Criteria: User Data Integration for Campaign Personalization

Given a user logs into BookShelfHub, when they access the Campaign Customization Wizard, then the system should display personalized campaign suggestions based on their saved preferences and past campaign performance.

Real-Time Data Analytics in Campaign Customization

Given that a user is creating a marketing campaign, when they make changes to the campaign details, then the system should provide real-time feedback and analytics to help refine their campaign strategy.

User Demographics Utilization for Tailored Campaign Options

Given a user has demographic data available, when they use the Campaign Customization Wizard, then the system should utilize that data to recommend campaign formats and content that resonate with the target audience.

Integration Testing of User Data Collection

Given the User Data Integration feature is implemented, when user data collection is initiated, then the system should successfully gather and display analytics on user preferences and interactions without errors.

Consent Management for Data Use in Campaigns

Given that user data will be utilized for campaign customization, when users access their settings, then they should be able to view and modify their consent preferences for data usage easily.

Analytics Dashboard for Campaign Performance Monitoring

Given a campaign has been launched using the Campaign Customization Wizard, when the user checks the analytics dashboard, then they should see clear metrics on engagement rates and performance relative to user preferences.

Step-by-Step Guidance

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to receive step-by-step guidance while creating campaigns so that I can feel more confident about using the tool and achieve better results.
Description: The Step-by-Step Guidance requirement provides a structured approach for users to navigate through the campaign creation process. This feature will include intuitive tutorials, tooltips, and recommended best practices that guide users from setting their campaign objectives to selecting marketing channels and designing visuals. This comprehensive support not only minimizes confusion but also empowers users to make informed decisions, ultimately enhancing the effectiveness of their campaigns and supporting the overarching aim of increasing user satisfaction with the platform.
Acceptance Criteria: User successfully navigates through the Campaign Customization Wizard to set their campaign objectives, including specifying targeted audience demographics and desired outcomes.

Given the user is on the Campaign Customization Wizard, when they select their campaign objectives, then the selected objectives should be displayed correctly and saved for review.

User receives tooltips and recommendations at each step of the campaign creation process to ensure clarity and understanding of each option available.

Given the user is creating a marketing campaign, when they hover over the provided options, then relevant tooltips and recommendations should appear, guiding the user effectively.

User integrates visual elements into their marketing campaign using the Campaign Customization Wizard, following step-by-step guidance.

Given the user is in the design step of the campaign, when they upload images or select templates, then the system should validate the options and provide immediate feedback if the criteria are not met (e.g., resolution or size).

User reviews and finalizes their marketing campaign before launching it to ensure all elements meet their expectations and requirements.

Given the user has completed all steps in the Campaign Customization Wizard, when they reach the review stage, then they should be able to see all selected options and make any necessary adjustments before proceeding to launch.

User accesses tutorials that provide comprehensive guidance throughout the campaign creation process for better understanding and increased satisfaction.

Given the user is navigating the Campaign Customization Wizard, when they click on the tutorial help icon, then a step-by-step guide should be displayed, offering insights from previous successful campaigns.

User is able to track the performance of the campaigns created through the Campaign Customization Wizard post-launch.

Given the user has launched a marketing campaign, when they check the campaign performance dashboard, then they should see metrics related to engagement, reach, and user feedback, with options to generate reports.

Templates and Visual Elements

User Story: As an author, I want to access customizable templates for my campaigns so that I can create visually appealing marketing materials without needing graphic design skills.
Description: The Templates and Visual Elements requirement focuses on providing a library of customizable templates that cater to different genres and marketing goals. Users can select from pre-designed layouts, color schemes, and fonts, which they can further personalize to fit their brand's voice. This functionality will streamline the campaign creation process, allowing users to save time while ensuring that their marketing materials are visually appealing and professional. By leveraging attractive design elements, the campaigns are likely to capture the attention of the target audience and increase conversion rates.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects a template from the library for a specific genre campaign.

Given the user is on the Campaign Customization Wizard, when they navigate to the Templates section, then they can view a range of genre-specific templates and select one to start a campaign.

User customizes selected template with their brand elements.

Given the user has selected a template, when they modify the color scheme, fonts, and add their logo, then the template updates in real time to reflect these changes.

User saves a customized template to their personal library for future use.

Given the user has customized a template, when they click the 'Save' button, then the customized template is stored in their personal library and can be accessed later.

User creates a marketing campaign using a template and publishes it.

Given the user has finished customizing a template, when they click the 'Publish' button, then the campaign is successfully scheduled and a confirmation message appears, along with the option to view the campaign details.

User previews the final campaign using the selected template before publishing.

Given the user has edited and customized a template, when they click the 'Preview' button, then the campaign is displayed in a full-resolution view, showing all design elements accurately.

User accesses analytics for campaigns created from templates.

Given the user has published several campaigns using templates, when they navigate to the analytics section, then they should view performance metrics (engagement, conversions, etc.) for each campaign.

Performance Tracking Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want to view the performance of my marketing campaigns in real-time so that I can quickly adjust my strategies and maximize the impact of my efforts.
Description: The Performance Tracking Dashboard requirement provides users with a dynamic interface to monitor the success of their marketing campaigns in real-time. This dashboard will display key metrics such as engagement rates, conversion rates, and audience reach, along with visual representations like graphs and charts for clearer insights. By having access to comprehensive analytics, users can evaluate their strategies, make necessary adjustments on-the-fly, and optimize their future campaigns, ensuring that their marketing efforts are as effective as possible.
Acceptance Criteria: User monitors campaign performance over a 30-day period through the Performance Tracking Dashboard and generates meaningful insights from the displayed data.

Given the user accesses the dashboard, when they view key metrics like engagement rates and conversion rates, then they should see real-time updates reflecting the data accurately over the last 30 days.

User customizes a marketing campaign and expects the performance metrics to change accordingly when tracked on the dashboard.

Given the user customizes a marketing campaign, when they apply changes and check the dashboard, then metrics such as audience reach and conversion rates should reflect the changes within 10 minutes.

User views graphical representations on the Performance Tracking Dashboard and relies on them to make strategic decisions for future campaigns.

Given the user views the dashboard, when they examine graphs and charts, then those visualizations should accurately represent the corresponding data without discrepancies and provide the ability to filter by date range.

User compares multiple campaigns side-by-side using the Performance Tracking Dashboard to evaluate their effectiveness directly.

Given the user selects multiple campaigns for comparison, when they check metrics side-by-side, then the dashboard should display comparable metrics clearly, including engagement, conversion rates, and audience reach for the selected campaigns.

User accesses the dashboard on different devices (desktop, tablet, mobile) and expects a consistent experience across all platforms.

Given the user accesses the dashboard from any device, when they log in, then the layout, functions, and data displayed should be consistent and fully functional across desktop, tablet, and mobile devices.

Feedback and Iteration Loop

User Story: As a campaign manager, I want to collect feedback from my audience to refine my marketing strategies so that my campaigns remain engaging and relevant over time.
Description: The Feedback and Iteration Loop requirement establishes a system for users to collect feedback on their campaigns through surveys or direct user interaction. This feature will allow users to refine their strategies based on audience responses, enabling them to make data-driven adjustments. Implementing this requirement fosters a continuous improvement approach to campaign development, encouraging collaboration and innovation while ensuring campaigns remain relevant and effective in a constantly changing market.
Acceptance Criteria: User submits feedback through a survey after completing a marketing campaign.

Given the user has completed a marketing campaign, when they access the Feedback section, then they should be able to create a survey, distribute it to their audience, and receive responses.

Users can view the collected feedback analytics on their campaign's performance.

Given the user has collected survey responses, when they navigate to the analytics dashboard, then they should see a summary of feedback, including satisfaction scores and key comments.

Users can iterate on their campaign strategy based on feedback received.

Given the user has access to their survey results, when they click on 'Refine Campaign,' then they should be able to adjust campaign elements such as messaging, targeting, and budget based on feedback insights.

Users are notified of significant trends in feedback over time.

Given that feedback has been collected over multiple campaigns, when the user opens the trends report, then they should see visual representations of recurring themes and suggestions from the audience.

A/B testing is available for users to compare campaign adjustments based on feedback responses.

Given the user has implemented campaign adjustments, when they enable A/B testing, then they should be able to run two versions of the campaign simultaneously and analyze performance differences.

Users can save and reference previous feedback for future campaigns.

Given that past feedback data is available, when a user creates a new campaign, then they should be able to access historical feedback metrics and insights for reference.

Users can provide direct feedback through multiple channels like chat or email.

Given that users have access to support channels, when they choose to provide feedback, then they should have the option to submit it directly via chat, email, or a dedicated feedback form.

Smart Content Generator

Utilizing advanced algorithms, this feature automatically generates compelling marketing copy, social media posts, and email newsletters based on current sales data and audience interests. By analyzing successful examples, the Smart Content Generator streamlines the content creation process, allowing users to maintain consistency while maximizing impact without the hassle of writer’s block.

Requirements

Dynamic Content Analysis

User Story: As a small publisher, I want the Smart Content Generator to analyze my audience's interests and sales data so that I can create targeted marketing materials that resonate with potential readers.
Description: The Dynamic Content Analysis requirement focuses on enabling the Smart Content Generator to evaluate real-time sales data and audience engagement metrics to tailor marketing materials. This functionality will highlight trends and insights that inform content creation, ensuring that all generated materials resonate with the target audience. This feature integrates seamlessly with existing analytics tools in BookShelfHub, providing users with actionable data to enhance marketing strategies and increase ROI. By leveraging advanced algorithms for content adaptability and relevance, users can generate compelling copy that directly addresses market demands and boosts audience connection, ultimately driving sales and brand loyalty.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Smart Content Generator after entering their sales data and audience insights from the BookShelfHub interface.

Given that the user has inputted real-time sales data and audience engagement metrics, when the user initiates the content generation process, then the system should produce marketing materials tailored specifically to the entered data.

User reviews the generated marketing materials for alignment with current market trends based on the analytics provided by BookShelfHub.

Given the output from the Smart Content Generator, when the user compares the content with the current market trends as shown in the analytics dashboard, then the user should find that at least 80% of the generated materials align with identified trends.

User wants to generate targeted social media posts specific to an upcoming book release while having access to relevant audience preferences.

Given that the user specifies an upcoming book release and relevant audience preferences, when the user utilizes the Smart Content Generator, then the posts created should include at least three key themes that resonate with the specified audience preferences.

User expects a user-friendly interface that provides feedback on generated content in real-time.

Given that the user has accessed the Smart Content Generator, when the user generates content, then the interface should provide real-time feedback on content effectiveness based on audience metrics, displaying a confidence score for each generated piece.

User wants to analyze the performance of previous marketing materials generated by the Smart Content Generator to improve future content.

Given that the user selects a previous campaign report, when the user reviews its performance, then they should see detailed metrics on engagement, conversion rates, and user feedback on the generated content—allowing for data-driven decisions for future campaigns.

User needs to ensure that the generated content adheres to brand guidelines and tone.

Given the user's established brand guidelines within the platform, when the Smart Content Generator creates marketing copy, then at least 90% of the generated content must conform to the provided guidelines and tone specifications according to an automated review system.

Multi-Format Content Generation

User Story: As an independent author, I want the Smart Content Generator to create marketing content for different platforms so that I can effectively engage my audience on social media, via email, and on my website.
Description: The Multi-Format Content Generation requirement ensures that the Smart Content Generator can create marketing materials across various formats, including social media posts, email newsletters, and web content. This is vital for a cohesive marketing strategy, as different platforms require tailored messaging and presentation. The feature integrates with user profiles to understand each channel's specifications and audience preferences, enabling a more personalized and effective communication approach. This flexibility will arm users with the capability to engage their audience through the right channels with appropriate messaging, maximizing outreach efforts and maintaining brand consistency across mediums.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to create a marketing email for a newly released book using the Smart Content Generator. They input details about the book, including title, author, genre, and release date, and select the 'Email Newsletter' format.

Given the user inputs the book details and selects Email Newsletter, When the Smart Content Generator processes the request, Then the system should generate a formatted email draft that includes a subject line, book description, author information, and a call to action.

A user needs to post promotional content on social media, specifically Instagram, for an upcoming book signing event. They provide event details such as date, time, location, and hashtags related to the event.

Given the user provides the event details and selects Instagram as the format, When the Smart Content Generator processes the request, Then it should generate an Instagram post with an eye-catching image suggestion, engaging caption, and appropriate hashtags ready for posting.

A marketing specialist is tasked with generating web content for a new book launch that targets specific audience demographics. They input audience data and other content preferences into the Smart Content Generator.

Given the user provides audience demographics and content preferences, When the Smart Content Generator processes this input, Then the system should generate a web content draft that aligns with the specified demographic's interests and characteristics, including SEO-optimized content.

An author is looking to create short social media posts for promoting their book on various platforms simultaneously. They input different formats and platforms and request consolidation of all generated content into a single document.

Given the user selects multiple social media platforms and formats for their book promotion, When the Smart Content Generator finalizes the content, Then it should create a document that includes tailored posts for each selected platform, formatted accordingly for each channel.

A publishing team wants to evaluate the generated marketing materials to ensure brand consistency before finalizing their campaigns.

Given the marketing materials are generated by the Smart Content Generator, When the team reviews the materials, Then they should find that all content aligns with the established brand guidelines, including tone, style, and visual elements.

A user has previously generated marketing content and wants to make edits to refine their audience targeting based on recent sales data.

Given the user selects an existing marketing content piece and identifies changes needed based on sales data, When they submit these edits in the Smart Content Generator, Then the system should update the content accordingly, optimizing it for the newly defined audience.

Content Scheduling and Management

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to schedule generated content to go live at optimal times so that I can increase engagement and effectiveness of our marketing efforts.
Description: The Content Scheduling and Management requirement allows users to manage the timing and deployment of generated marketing content. This feature provides an intuitive calendar interface, enabling users to schedule posts and emails to coincide with marketing campaigns, book launches, or seasonal promotions. Integration with existing publishing timelines and project management tools will streamline the process of content generation and distribution, ensuring that marketing efforts are timely and strategic. This capability will empower users to maintain a consistent marketing presence while removing the manual labor involved in content timing and posting procedures.
Acceptance Criteria: User schedules a marketing email to coincide with a book launch event using the Content Scheduling and Management feature.

Given the user is logged in and has access to the Content Scheduling and Management feature, when they select a date and time to send an email, then the email should be automatically scheduled and confirmed through a notification.

User sets up a social media post for a seasonal promotion using the Content Scheduling and Management feature.

Given the user has created a social media post, when they schedule it for a specific future date and time, then the post should appear in the calendar view as scheduled and send notifications 24 hours in advance of posting.

User integrates their publishing timeline with the Content Scheduling and Management feature to ensure all marketing content aligns with project deadlines.

Given the user has existing publishing timelines, when they view the calendar in the Content Scheduling and Management feature, then all scheduled content should reflect and align with the specified publishing timelines. Additionally, if a book launch date changes, the user can adjust all related content in one action.

User reviews analytics on scheduled content performance after a marketing campaign.

Given the user has completed a marketing campaign, when they access the performance analytics for the scheduled content, then they should see metrics such as open rates, clicks, and interactions clearly displayed for each piece of content scheduled during the campaign.

User wants to delete a scheduled post and verify the removal from the calendar interface.

Given the user has a scheduled post in their calendar, when they choose to delete that post, then the post should be removed from the calendar, and a confirmation message should be displayed to indicate the successful deletion.

User collaborates with team members to review scheduled content before deployment.

Given the user has invited team members to collaborate on scheduled content, when they access the scheduling interface, then all team member comments and feedback should be visible for each scheduled piece of content, with options to resolve or act on feedback.

User Customization Options

User Story: As an author, I want the Smart Content Generator to allow me to customize the tone and style of the marketing content so that it reflects my unique voice and brand identity.
Description: The User Customization Options requirement enables users to modify styles, tones, and messages within the Smart Content Generator to align with their specific branding and voice. This personalization feature allows users to input parameters that the generator can use, such as preferred word choices, lengths, and emotional tonality. This level of customization ensures that even AI-generated content reflects the authentic voice of the user, fostering brand identity and consistency. It integrates with user profiles, facilitating a tailored experience that meets the unique needs of diverse publishers and authors while maximizing creative expression.
Acceptance Criteria: User Customization of Marketing Messages

Given the user has accessed the Smart Content Generator, when they input their preferred tone, length, and key phrases, then the generated content should reflect these preferences accurately and retain their branding identity.

Integration with User Profiles

Given a user has set their preferences in their profile settings, when the Smart Content Generator is used, then it should automatically apply these settings to all generated content without requiring manual input.

Preview of Generated Content

Given the user generates content through the Smart Content Generator, when they request a preview, then the content should display in a format that mirrors how it will appear on social media and in email newsletters, ensuring consistency before final use.

Editing Generated Content

Given a user has obtained content from the Smart Content Generator, when they make edits to the generated text, then the modifications should be saved and allow for re-generation with the new parameters without losing the user's original input.

User Feedback on Generated Content

Given a user has utilized the Smart Content Generator, when they provide feedback on the generated output, then the feedback should be stored and utilized to refine future content suggestions and improve generation accuracy.

Customization of Emotional Tonality

Given a user specifies an emotional tone in their customization settings, when they generate content, then the output should embody the specified emotional tone, such as humorous, professional, or empathetic, aligning with the user's branding voice.

Saving Custom Settings for Future Use

Given a user has customized certain parameters for content generation, when they exit the Smart Content Generator, then these settings should be automatically saved to their profile and easily retrievable for future sessions.

Audience Targeting Insights

This tool provides insights into the specific demographics and behaviors of the audience that are most likely to engage with the campaigns. By analyzing historical data and current trends, the Audience Targeting Insights feature helps users refine their targeting strategy, ensuring that marketing efforts are focused on the segments of the audience that are poised to yield the highest engagement and conversions.

Requirements

Demographic Analysis Tools

User Story: As a publisher, I want to analyze demographic data of my audience so that I can tailor my marketing strategies to reach the most responsive segments effectively.
Description: The Demographic Analysis Tools requirement will facilitate in-depth segmentation of potential audience based on various demographics such as age, gender, location, and interests. This feature will allow users to analyze which segments are most responsive to their marketing efforts. The tools will leverage data analytics to provide actionable insights that can directly inform marketing strategies, enabling publishers and authors to maximize their outreach efficiently. By improving targeting accuracy, this requirement will enhance user satisfaction and increase the effectiveness of marketing campaigns, thereby driving higher engagement and conversion rates.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Demographic Analysis Tools feature to gain insights on their target audience demographics.

Given the user has logged into BookShelfHub and navigated to the Audience Targeting Insights section, when they select the 'Demographic Analysis Tools', then they should be presented with a dashboard displaying segmentation options for age, gender, location, and interests.

User analyzes the demographic data to create targeted marketing campaigns.

Given the user has accessed the Demographic Analysis Tools and selected a specific demographic segment, when they apply filters for age and location, then the system must display a detailed report of users within that segment and suggest possible marketing strategies.

User utilizes demographic insights to enhance their marketing campaigns.

Given the user has generated demographic insights from the analysis tools, when they implement a campaign targeting a specific audience segment, then they should see an increase in engagement metrics by at least 20% compared to previous campaigns.

User saves a demographic analysis for future reference.

Given the user has completed an analysis using the Demographic Analysis Tools, when they choose to save their report, then the system must allow them to name and store the report in their dashboard for easy access.

User shares demographic insights with team members.

Given the user has generated demographic insights, when they select the 'Share' option and enter team members' emails, then the selected team members should receive an email containing the report and a link to access it.

User receives notifications on audience behavior trends.

Given the user has set preferences for receiving insights on audience behavior, when there is a significant change in audience demographics or behavior trends, then the system must notify the user via email or dashboard alert.

Behavioral Insights Module

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to understand the historical behaviors of my audience so that I can predict future engagement and improve my campaign strategies based on these insights.
Description: The Behavioral Insights Module will provide users with the ability to review historical engagement data such as past campaign performances, reader engagement patterns, and conversion rates. This requirement will incorporate predictive analytics to forecast future behaviors based on current trends, thus enabling users to make data-driven decisions for upcoming campaigns. By understanding how different audience segments interact with their content over time, users can refine their marketing approaches to improve overall engagement and loyalty. This module is crucial for optimizing marketing initiatives and maximizing ROI.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Behavioral Insights Module to analyze past campaign performance data.

Given that the user is logged into BookShelfHub, When they navigate to the Behavioral Insights Module, Then they should see a dashboard displaying at least three key performance indicators (KPIs) including open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates for the last five campaigns.

User uses predictive analytics to forecast audience engagement for future campaigns.

Given that the user is viewing historical engagement data, When they initiate a predictive analytics forecast for the next campaign, Then the system should provide a report that includes predicted engagement levels based on historical data for at least three different audience segments.

User identifies trends in reader engagement patterns over time.

Given that the user is examining reader engagement trends, When they filter the data for a specific audience segment over the last 12 months, Then they should be able to visualize the engagement trend in a clear graphical representation, such as a line graph or bar chart.

User reviews conversion rates segmented by audience demographics.

Given that the user is in the Behavioral Insights Module, When they select a specific audience demographic, Then the system should display conversion rates tailored to that demographic, with historical comparisons over the last four campaigns.

User integrates insights from the Behavioral Insights Module into their marketing strategy.

Given that the user has reviewed the insights, When they create a new marketing campaign, Then they should have the option to apply tailored audience segments suggested by the Behavioral Insights Module directly into the campaign setup process.

User exports historical engagement data for further analysis.

Given that the user is on the Behavioral Insights dashboard, When they click on the export button, Then they should be able to download the engagement data in a CSV format that includes all selected KPIs and filters applied.

Targeting Strategy Recommendations

User Story: As a campaign planner, I want to receive recommendations on audience targeting strategies so that I can enhance the effectiveness and efficiency of my marketing campaigns.
Description: This requirement involves creating a system that automatically recommends audience targeting strategies based on insights derived from both demographic analysis and behavioral insights. By utilizing machine learning algorithms, the system will analyze the data, identify successful targeting patterns from previous campaigns, and suggest optimal audience segments for future efforts. The benefits of such a feature include increased efficiency in marketing strategy planning and execution, as well as improved likelihood of achieving higher engagement and conversion rates through tailored suggestions.
Acceptance Criteria: As a marketing manager, I want to utilize the Audience Targeting Insights tool to generate recommendations for specific audience segments for an upcoming book release campaign, so I can maximize engagement and conversion rates.

Given user inputs historical campaign data and current audience demographics, When the system processes this data, Then it should generate at least three distinct audience targeting strategy recommendations based on successful patterns.

As a user of BookShelfHub, I need to be able to view detailed analytics on the suggested audience segments so that I can understand the rationale behind each recommendation and ensure they align with my overall marketing goals.

Given the user selects a recommended audience strategy, When the user views the analytics dashboard, Then the system should display detailed demographic and behavioral insights justifying the audience recommendation.

As an author working on a new book, I want to leverage automated targeting strategies to reach a wider audience, ensuring that the marketing efforts are effective and data-driven.

Given the author sets parameters for their book (genre, themes, etc.), When the system analyzes data and generates targeting strategies, Then it should suggest strategies that incorporate at least two different demographic groups and one behavioral trend relevant to the book's content.

As a project manager, I need to ensure the machine learning models that drive the audience targeting insights are regularly updated, so the recommendations remain relevant to market trends.

Given that new campaign data becomes available, When the system updates the machine learning model, Then it should successfully complete an update cycle without errors and generate updated audience insights within 24 hours.

As a small publishing house owner, I want to evaluate the success of previous audience targeting strategies to apply learnings effectively in future campaigns.

Given the user reviews past campaign performance, When they access the performance evaluation report, Then the system should display clear metrics on past audience targeting effectiveness, including conversion rates and engagement levels.

As a marketing strategist, I want the system to integrate audience targeting recommendations with campaign setup workflows, reducing preparation time for campaigns.

Given that a user begins a new marketing campaign setup, When they access the audience targeting section, Then the system should automatically populate suggested audience segments into the campaign setup interface for easy selection.

Real-time Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a marketer, I want to view real-time analytics of my campaigns so that I can make immediate improvements based on current performance data.
Description: The Real-time Analytics Dashboard requirement will provide users with a dynamic interface that showcases current engagement metrics, audience demographics, and campaign performances in real-time. This dashboard will integrate various data sources to give a holistic view of ongoing campaigns, allowing users to make timely adjustments to their strategies as needed. The implementation of this dashboard will empower users with immediate access to crucial metrics, enabling them to assess the immediate impact of their marketing efforts and make quick pivots to optimize results.
Acceptance Criteria: User access to the Real-time Analytics Dashboard after logging into BookShelfHub.

Given that the user has valid credentials and accesses BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the 'Analytics' section, then they should see the Real-time Analytics Dashboard with a loading time of under 2 seconds.

Display of real-time engagement metrics on the dashboard.

Given that the user is viewing the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, when the data is refreshed, then the dashboard should show updated engagement metrics with real-time data without manual refresh within a 5-second interval.

Visibility of audience demographics in the dashboard.

Given that the user is on the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, when they select the 'Audience' tab, then the demographic breakdown (age, gender, location) should be displayed clearly and be exportable as a CSV.

Integration of campaign performance across various marketing channels.

Given that the user is utilizing the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, when campaigns from different marketing channels are analyzed, then performance metrics (impressions, clicks, conversion rate) from each channel should be integrated and shown in a unified format.

User notifications for significant changes in campaign performance metrics.

Given that the user is on the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, when there is a significant change (more than 20% increase or decrease) in any engagement metric, then the user should receive a visual alert on the dashboard.

Customization options for the analytics displayed in the dashboard.

Given that the user is on the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, when they click on 'Customize View,' then they should be able to select which metrics appear on the dashboard and save their preferences for future sessions.

Segmentation Testing Tool

User Story: As a data analyst, I want to test different marketing strategies on various audience segments so that I can discover which approaches yield the best results.
Description: The Segmentation Testing Tool will enable users to conduct A/B tests on different audience segments to evaluate the performance of various marketing strategies. This feature will allow for experimentation with messaging, offers, or content targeting and will provide comparison results on each segment’s response. The outcome will facilitate informed decision-making, as users can identify the most effective tactics for specific audience profiles, thus refining their overall marketing approach and enhancing engagement rates.
Acceptance Criteria: User conducts A/B testing on two different audience segments to measure engagement with varied marketing messages.

Given the user selects two audience segments A and B, when they run an A/B test with different messaging, then the system should display engagement metrics for both segments separately, including click-through rates and conversion rates.

User inputs various marketing strategies and selects multiple audience segments for testing.

Given the user inputs marketing strategies and selects multiple audience segments, when they execute the segmentation testing tool, then the tool should generate a report outlining which segment responded best to each strategy based on predefined metrics.

User views the comparison results of the segmentation tests to determine the most effective marketing approach.

Given the results of the segmentation tests are accessible, when the user reviews the comparison report, then they should be able to view visual representations (e.g., graphs) of performance metrics comparing each segment's engagement levels.

User wants to track historical performance of different audience segments over previous campaigns.

Given that the user has conducted multiple campaigns, when they select a specific audience segment, then the user should be able to retrieve and view historical performance data for that segment across different marketing campaigns.

Admin updates the audience segments based on analytical insights from past campaigns.

Given the admin has access to analytics data, when they modify the audience segments based on the insights, then the system should allow for seamless updates and notify affected users about the changes in segmentation parameters.

User collaborates with team members to review the results of an A/B test conducted on different audience segments.

Given the user has conducted an A/B test, when they share the results with team members, then all team members should have real-time access to the test results and be able to add comments or suggestions for further testing.

User wants to save and analyze results from previous A/B tests conducted using the segmentation testing tool.

Given the user completes their A/B tests, when they opt to save the test results, then the system should securely store these results in a designated archive and allow the user to retrieve them for future analysis.

Multichannel Campaign Scheduler

This feature allows users to easily schedule their marketing campaigns across various channels including social media, email, and blogs. Users can set predefined times for content releases, maximizing visibility and engagement. The Multichannel Campaign Scheduler simplifies the process of multichannel marketing, ensuring that campaigns are well-timed and efficiently executed.

Requirements

Campaign Channel Integration

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to integrate different marketing channels so that I can manage all my campaigns from one place and ensure consistent messaging across platforms.
Description: The Campaign Channel Integration requirement allows users to connect and synchronize various marketing channels such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, email platforms, and blogging sites. This integration ensures that all campaign data is collected and displayed in one centralized dashboard, allowing users to manage content more efficiently. By connecting these channels, users can streamline their marketing efforts, maintain consistency in messaging, and enhance cross-channel analytics. This feature enables real-time updates and reporting across platforms, facilitating better decision-making and optimizing marketing strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User connects a Facebook account to BookShelfHub for the first time in order to launch a marketing campaign.

Given the user has valid Facebook credentials, when the user enters their credentials in the integration setup, then the connection to Facebook should be successfully established and a confirmation message should be displayed.

A user schedules a marketing campaign on multiple channels including Facebook, Twitter, and email.

Given the user has access to all selected channels, when the user sets a campaign time and clicks schedule, then the campaign should be successfully scheduled on all selected channels and the user should see a summary of scheduled campaigns.

A user views the centralized dashboard after integrating all campaign channels.

Given the user has integrated their channels, when the user navigates to the dashboard, then all campaign data from integrated channels should be displayed accurately and updated in real-time.

The user updates the scheduled campaign timing for a previously scheduled campaign across all channels.

Given that the user has existing scheduled campaigns, when the user changes the timing of the campaign and saves it, then the updates should reflect accurately across all connected channels' dashboards without discrepancies.

The user generates an analytics report for a recently completed campaign that spanned multiple channels.

Given that the campaign has ended, when the user requests a comprehensive analytics report, then the system should provide a report summarizing performance metrics, engagement statistics, and ROI for all channels utilized in the campaign.

A user disconnects a marketing channel from their account in BookShelfHub.

Given that the user is connected to multiple marketing channels, when the user selects one channel to disconnect and confirms the action, then the selected channel should be removed from the account and the user should receive a confirmation message regarding the disconnection.

A user receives notifications for campaign performance across all channels.

Given that the user has enabled notifications, when there are significant changes in campaign performance metrics, then the user should receive instant notifications detailing the changes and suggesting possible actions.

Automated Scheduling System

User Story: As a content creator, I want to automate my campaign scheduling so that my content is published at optimal times without manual intervention, maximizing audience engagement.
Description: The Automated Scheduling System allows users to set specific dates and times for content releases across different marketing channels. Users can leverage smart algorithms to suggest the best times for posting based on engagement data and analytics. This feature aims to automate the scheduling process, reducing manual work while increasing the potential reach and visibility of marketing campaigns. By optimizing the timing of content releases, users can enhance user engagement and drive higher traffic to their posts.
Acceptance Criteria: User schedules a marketing campaign for a new book release, selecting specific dates and times across multiple channels including social media and email.

Given the user has access to the Multichannel Campaign Scheduler, when they select a date and time for a campaign, then the system should confirm that the campaign is scheduled correctly and provide a visual representation of the scheduled posts.

A user wants to optimize their content release time based on past engagement data to maximize visibility.

Given the user has input historical engagement data, when they request suggested posting times, then the system should analyze the data and recommend optimal posting times based on engagement patterns.

A user creates a marketing campaign that includes specific content for different channels and wants to confirm that all elements are scheduled successfully.

Given the user has added content for Facebook, Twitter, and Email, when they finalize the campaign scheduling, then the system should display a summary of all scheduled content with correct timings and channel specifications.

Users need to edit a scheduled campaign due to a change in the book release date.

Given a user has a scheduled campaign, when they update the date and time for the campaign, then the system should successfully reschedule all associated posts and notify the user of the changes.

A user wants to receive notifications about upcoming scheduled campaigns to ensure they are prepared for engagement.

Given the user opts into notifications, when a campaign is scheduled within the next 24 hours, then the system should send a reminder notification to the user via their preferred communication method (email or in-app).

Users want to track the performance of their scheduled campaigns in real-time after they are launched.

Given a user has launched a marketing campaign, when they check the campaign analytics, then the system should provide real-time data on engagement metrics for each scheduled post.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a marketing analyst, I want access to a centralized dashboard with performance metrics so that I can evaluate the success of my campaigns and make informed adjustments to boost effectiveness.
Description: The Performance Analytics Dashboard provides users with comprehensive insights and metrics on the effectiveness of their marketing campaigns across all channels. This requirement enables users to track engagement, conversion rates, and audience demographics in real-time. By analyzing this data, users can refine their marketing strategies, identify successful campaigns, and pinpoint areas that need improvement. This feature plays a critical role in enhancing decision-making and optimizing marketing efforts for better performance and ROI.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Performance Analytics Dashboard after running a multichannel marketing campaign to assess its effectiveness across various channels.

Given the user has access to the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when the user selects a completed marketing campaign, then the dashboard should display metrics for engagement rates, conversion rates, and audience demographics for the selected campaign.

User attempts to filter metrics displayed on the Performance Analytics Dashboard based on specific timeframes to measure campaign effectiveness over selected periods.

Given the user is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when the user applies a filter for a specified timeframe, then the dashboard should update to show only the metrics for campaigns run during that timeframe.

User shares insights gathered from the Performance Analytics Dashboard with team members to make informed marketing decisions.

Given the user has analyzed the Performance Analytics Dashboard data, when the user selects the share option, then the system should successfully send the selected report to designated team members via email with a summary of the findings.

User trains new team members on how to interpret data from the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user is presenting a training session, when the user demonstrates the Performance Analytics Dashboard, then the session must include explanations of key metrics and their implications on campaign strategies.

User exports the data from the Performance Analytics Dashboard for use in external reporting tools to create comprehensive performance reports.

Given the user has accessed the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when the user selects the export data option, then the system should provide the option to download the data in CSV format without any loss of critical information.

User compares performance metrics of two different marketing campaigns within the Performance Analytics Dashboard to determine which was more successful.

Given the user is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when the user selects two campaigns to compare, then the system should display a side-by-side comparison of key metrics such as engagement rates and conversion rates for both campaigns.

User receives alerts for specific campaign performance thresholds met or not met, as set in the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user sets performance thresholds for campaigns, when a campaign reaches or fails to meet these thresholds, then the user should receive an alert via email notifying them of the performance outcome.

Customizable Campaign Templates

User Story: As a marketer, I want to create and save customizable campaign templates so that I can quickly launch new campaigns without starting from scratch each time, improving efficiency and consistency.
Description: The Customizable Campaign Templates requirement allows users to create and save predefined campaign templates that can be easily modified and reused for future campaigns. This feature provides a library of templates tailored for different marketing channels and content types, enabling users to maintain branding consistency while saving time in preparation. By utilizing these templates, users can focus more on content creation and strategy rather than initial setup, enhancing operational efficiency and the creative process.
Acceptance Criteria: User creates a new campaign using a customizable template for a social media marketing push promoting a new book release.

Given that the user has selected a customizable campaign template, when they fill in the required details (like title, content, and images) and save the campaign, then the campaign should be successfully created and saved in the user's campaign library.

User modifies an existing campaign template to fit a new marketing strategy for an email campaign.

Given that the user is in the campaign template library, when they select a template and change key elements (like subject line, body text, and call to action), then the modified template should be saved without errors and reflect the changes when viewed later.

User schedules a marketing campaign using a saved customizable campaign template for the upcoming weekend.

Given that the user has a customizable campaign template selected, when they set the scheduled date and time for the campaign release, then the campaign should appear in the Multichannel Campaign Scheduler at the specified time with a notification for the user.

User views the library of customizable campaign templates for the first time.

Given that a user accesses the customizable campaign template library, when they load the page, then all available templates should be visible and organized by marketing channel, with a search function to filter templates.

User duplicates a campaign template for a different book release campaign.

Given that the user has selected a campaign template they want to duplicate, when they choose the duplicate option, then a new editable version of the template should be created and open for modification in the user's library.

User tries to delete a customizable campaign template that they no longer need.

Given that the user is viewing the list of their customizable campaign templates, when they select a template and choose the delete option, then the template should be removed from their library after confirmation, ensuring that the change reflects in real-time.

User accesses an analytics dashboard to review the performance of campaigns created using customizable templates.

Given that the user has navigated to the analytics dashboard, when they select a campaign created with a customizable template, then the performance data (such as engagement metrics, reach, and conversion rates) should be displayed accurately and up-to-date.

Collaborative Campaign Planning

User Story: As a project manager, I want my team to collaborate on campaign planning in real-time so that we can efficiently create high-quality campaigns and ensure everyone is aligned with our marketing goals.
Description: The Collaborative Campaign Planning requirement facilitates teamwork by enabling multiple users to collaborate and contribute to campaign creation and management in real-time. This feature supports communication tools such as comment threads and file sharing, ensuring that all team members can provide input and receive feedback efficiently. By promoting collaboration, users can harness diverse perspectives and skills, enhancing the quality of campaigns and ensuring alignment across teams involved in the marketing process.
Acceptance Criteria: Team members collaboratively creating a marketing campaign for a new book launch in BookShelfHub, utilizing the comment threads and file-sharing features to enhance the campaign's effectiveness.

Given users are in the campaign planning section, when they post a comment on a campaign strategy, then all team members should receive a notification and be able to respond to the comment within 5 minutes.

Authors and marketers working together in real-time to finalize marketing content, ensuring all amended files are shared and feedback is promptly considered before the campaign launch.

Given that multiple users are editing a campaign file simultaneously, when one user saves changes, then all other users should see the updated file immediately without needing to refresh their browsers.

A project manager reviewing a completed marketing campaign setup, ensuring that all contributors' input has been documented and all files are accessible for future reference.

Given the campaign has been completed, when the project manager accesses the campaign history, then they should see a thorough record of all comments, contributions, and file versions in chronological order.

A user setting up a new marketing campaign and inviting other team members to collaborate, ensuring that all invited users can access the campaign workspace upon acceptance of the invitation.

Given a user sends invitations to team members to join a new campaign, when team members accept the invitation, then they should have immediate access to the campaign workspace and all relevant files.

Users utilizing the collaborative tools to communicate changes to a marketing plan, ensuring that every stakeholder is updated and on the same page regarding the campaign's direction.

Given a user posts a significant update on the campaign's strategy, when any team member checks the comment thread, then they should see the full context of discussions including any attachments related to the update.

Users wanting feedback on the marketing campaign approach can use specific tools to tag other users for quick consultation without disrupting ongoing discussions.

Given a user wants feedback from a specific team member on the campaign thread, when they tag that team member, then the tagged user should receive a direct notification for immediate attention.

Advanced Segmentation Tools

User Story: As a marketer, I want to segment my audience into specific groups so that I can send targeted messages that align with their interests, leading to increased engagement and conversions.
Description: The Advanced Segmentation Tools requirement allows users to create segmented audiences based on demographics, engagement history, and preferences. This feature enables targeted marketing campaigns tailored to specific audience segments, increasing the relevance of content and improving engagement rates. By utilizing advanced segmentation, users can optimize their advertising spend and ensure that their messages resonate with the intended audience, leading to higher conversion rates and customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: As a marketing manager, I want to create a segmented audience for an upcoming book launch campaign, targeting readers aged 25-40 who have previously engaged with similar genres.

Given that I have access to the Advanced Segmentation Tools, when I input the age range (25-40) and select interest categories, then the system should generate a segmented audience list that matches these criteria with at least 70% accuracy.

As an author, I want to view the engagement history of my audience segments to tailor my email marketing campaigns effectively.

Given that I have created audience segments based on engagement history, when I access the engagement analytics, then I should be able to see detailed engagement metrics for each segment, including open rates, click-through rates, and time spent on content.

As a publisher, I want to ensure that my campaigns are sent to audience segments without duplicating recipients to optimize outreach.

Given that my audience segments are defined, when I execute a campaign, then the system must ensure that no recipient receives the campaign more than once, and the final recipient list should reflect this without duplicates.

As a marketing strategist, I need to analyze the performance of previous campaigns run with specific audience segments to make data-driven decisions for future campaigns.

Given that I have run previous campaigns using segmented audiences, when I access the campaign performance report, then the system should provide insights including conversion rates, engagement levels, and ROI specific to each segment.

As an editor, I want to easily adjust audience segments based on new data insights after a campaign has been executed.

Given that the campaign data is available post-execution, when I review the audience segmentation tool, then I should be able to update segments based on new behavior or demographic data with a simple interface that reflects changes in real-time.

As a marketer, I want to quickly create and save multiple audience segments for different campaigns to streamline my workflow.

Given that I am using the Advanced Segmentation Tools, when I create an audience segment, then I should have the option to save the segment with a unique name and access it easily for future campaigns.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

An integrated dashboard that provides real-time analytics on the performance of marketing campaigns. This feature tracks key metrics such as engagement rates, conversion rates, and ROI, giving users insights into what is working well and what needs adjustment. The Performance Analytics Dashboard empowers users to make data-driven decisions for future campaigns, continuously improving their marketing effectiveness.

Requirements

Real-time Data Visualization

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to see real-time visualizations of our campaign data so that I can quickly identify trends and make immediate adjustments to optimize performance.
Description: The Real-time Data Visualization requirement involves implementing dynamic graphical representations of marketing performance metrics on the dashboard. This will enable users to view real-time data trends through charts, graphs, and infographics, providing them with immediate insights into campaign performance. The integration of this feature will allow users to make informed decisions quickly by identifying patterns and anomalies as they occur, significantly enhancing their ability to optimize marketing strategies promptly and effectively. Users will benefit from visual clarity, ensuring they can easily comprehend complex data and apply that knowledge in their efforts to improve campaign success rates.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Performance Analytics Dashboard after launching a marketing campaign.

Given the user has initiated a marketing campaign, when they access the Performance Analytics Dashboard, then they should see real-time data visualizations of campaign performance metrics such as engagement rates and conversion rates within 5 seconds of loading the dashboard.

User analyzes the trends in campaign performance over the past week.

Given the user accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select the past week as the time frame, then they should be able to view graphical representations (charts, graphs) of metrics such as daily engagement rates and conversion rates for that week.

User identifies and reviews anomalies in campaign performance data.

Given the user is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when there are significant drops or spikes in engagement metrics, then the dashboard should highlight these anomalies in the data using color coding or alerts for immediate review.

User generates a report based on marketing campaign performance metrics.

Given the user wants to generate a report, when they click on the report generation feature, then the system should compile the selected performance metrics and allow the user to export them in PDF format without errors.

User accesses the dashboard from a mobile device.

Given the user accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard on a mobile device, when they log into their account, then the dashboard should be fully responsive and display all key metrics clearly and interactively without loss of functionality.

User compares the performance of different campaigns on the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select multiple marketing campaigns to compare, then they should receive a side-by-side visual representation of the selected metrics such as engagement and ROI over the chosen time frame.

User sets specific goals for future campaigns based on insights from the dashboard.

Given the user reviews the performance data displayed on the dashboard, when they identify trends and patterns, then they should be able to set quantifiable goals for future campaigns directly in the dashboard interface.

Customizable Reporting Metrics

User Story: As a publisher, I want to customize the metrics displayed in my analytics dashboard so that I can focus on the key performance indicators that matter most to my campaigns.
Description: The Customizable Reporting Metrics requirement allows users to personalize the set of metrics they wish to track and analyze in the Performance Analytics Dashboard. This feature will enable users to select and prioritize metrics such as engagement rates, demographics of the audience, lead generation, and other KPIs that are most relevant to their specific campaigns. By accommodating this level of customization, users can tailor the analytics they receive, ensuring that the data is directly aligned with their goals and objectives. This will enhance user satisfaction and effectiveness by providing them with precisely the information they need to assess and improve their marketing activities over time.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to create a customized report that includes specific metrics related to their recent marketing campaign to analyze performance and make adjustments accordingly.

Given the user is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select the 'Customize Report' option, then they should be able to view a list of available metrics and select the desired metrics for their report.

User has customized their report metrics and wants to save this setup for future use without needing to recreate it every time they access the dashboard.

Given the user has selected and configured their preferred metrics, when they choose the 'Save Preferences' option, then their customization should be saved and automatically applied during future logins to the dashboard.

User needs to filter the analytics data to view past marketing campaign results for specific time frames to compare performance metrics across different periods.

Given the user is viewing the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select a date range filter, then they should see the analytics update to reflect only the data for the selected time period.

User wants to view a graphical representation of their selected customizable metrics to better understand trends and performance over time.

Given the user has selected multiple metrics for their report, when they click on the 'Display Graphs' option, then the dashboard should display a visual graph representing the selected metrics over the specified time period.

User desires to export their customized report metrics to share with team members who might not have access to BookShelfHub.

Given the user has finalized their customized report, when they choose the 'Export' option, then they should be able to download the report in a widely used format such as PDF or CSV to share via email or other means.

User needs to easily navigate back to the default metrics view if they decide they no longer want to use their customized setup.

Given the user is viewing their customized metrics, when they select the 'Restore Default Metrics' option, then the dashboard should revert to the original default set of metrics as specified by BookShelfHub.

Automated Insights Generation

User Story: As a user, I want the dashboard to generate automated insights based on my campaign performance so that I can quickly understand what is working and what needs improvement.
Description: The Automated Insights Generation requirement focuses on developing a feature that analyzes performance data and automatically generates actionable insights for users. This AI-driven capability will examine user-specified parameters and highlight areas of strength and weakness in marketing efforts, providing users with suggestions for improvement based on the data collected. The integration of automated insights will reduce the time users need to spend analyzing data manually while informing them of critical adjustments needed to enhance future campaigns. Consequently, this feature will empower users to optimize their strategies based on data-driven recommendations without extensive analysis.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard and selects a specific marketing campaign for analysis.

Given a user chooses a marketing campaign, when the automated insights generation feature processes the campaign data, then it should display actionable insights and recommendations based on performance metrics within two minutes.

A user reviews the generated insights and decides to apply the recommended adjustments to their marketing strategy.

Given that the user has viewed the actionable insights, when they implement at least one suggested adjustment from the dashboard, then the system should record the changes and provide a confirmation message indicating the successful application of insights.

The automated insights feature analyzes several campaigns to identify trends and performance consistency.

Given multiple marketing campaigns have been run, when the user requests a comparative analysis, then the automated insights feature should generate a report highlighting significant trends or areas for improvement across all campaigns within five minutes.

User receives a notification about the automated insights generated for their marketing efforts after a campaign ends.

Given a marketing campaign has concluded, when the insights are generated, then the user should receive an email notification including a summary of the insights and a link to access the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

User interacts with the insights dashboard and filters results based on custom parameters (date range, marketing channels, etc.).

Given that the user applies filters to the performance dashboard, when the page refreshes, then it should only display insights relevant to the selected parameters within three seconds.

User is interested in how their adjustments from previously generated insights impacted performance.

Given a user accesses the historical insights report, when they select a previous campaign, then the system should display a comparison between pre- and post-adjustment metrics over time to show the impact of insights applied.

User wants to export the insights for further analysis or reporting.

Given the user is viewing the insights on the dashboard, when they choose to export the report, then the system should allow them to download a PDF version of the insights that includes both graphs and written recommendations within one minute.

Template Library

A curated library of customizable marketing templates designed for various platforms and purposes. Users can choose from professionally designed layouts for social media, newsletters, and advertisements, ensuring visually appealing content without the designer price tag. The Template Library not only speeds up the creation process but also allows users to maintain a polished and cohesive brand identity.

Requirements

Template Customization Options

User Story: As an independent author, I want to customize marketing templates so that I can create promotional materials that resonate with my brand and appeal to my audience.
Description: The Template Customization Options requirement focuses on allowing users to modify existing templates in terms of text, colors, images, and layout to align with their branding. This functionality enhances user experience by enabling greater flexibility in content creation, allowing users to maintain a cohesive brand identity while making marketing content appealing and relevant. By enabling customization, users can produce professional-quality marketing materials that reflect their unique style and voice, facilitating a more personal connection with their audience.
Acceptance Criteria: User needs to personalize a marketing template for their upcoming book release on social media.

Given a user accesses the Template Library, when the user selects a template, then they should be able to modify text, colors, images, and layout.

Users want to ensure their modified template maintains brand consistency.

Given a user customizes a template, when the user previews the template, then the preview should reflect all customization changes accurately without any display issues.

A user wishes to apply changes to a saved template and save these updates for future use.

Given a user customizes a template, when the user saves the template, then the updated template should be retrievable from the user’s account with all modifications intact.

Users require templates that are responsive and maintain quality on different devices.

Given a user customizes a template, when the user views the template on various devices (mobile, tablet, desktop), then the template should display correctly and maintain quality across all devices.

A user wants to access templates that conform to various marketing platform specifications.

Given a user searches the Template Library, when the user filters by platform (e.g., Instagram, Facebook, Newsletter), then the system should only present templates that fit the selected platform’s specifications.

Users must be able to revert to the original version of a template after customization.

Given a user customizes a template, when the user chooses to revert to the original template, then the original version should be restored without any custom modifications.

Users need quick access to tutorial guides for customizing templates effectively.

Given a user accesses the Template Library, when the user clicks on the help icon, then they should see a list of tutorials and resources related to template customization.

Template Preview Feature

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to preview templates in real-time before publishing so that I can ensure everything looks perfect and fits my brand style before sharing it with my audience.
Description: The Template Preview Feature allows users to see a live preview of their customized templates before finalizing their designs. This real-time feedback mechanism ensures that users can make adjustments to their layouts and content in a visually engaging way, enhancing usability and reducing errors. By seeing how their templates will look on different platforms, users can optimize their marketing materials effectively, leading to increased engagement and better outcomes for their campaigns.
Acceptance Criteria: User chooses a marketing template from the Template Library and customizes it for their social media campaign.

Given the user has selected a template, When they make visual changes, Then the preview should update in real-time to reflect those changes.

User switches between different templates in the Template Library while customizing a campaign.

Given the user is previewing a template, When they select a different template, Then the preview should immediately load the new template without lag or errors.

User checks how their customized marketing template appears on various platforms (e.g., Instagram, Facebook, and Email).

Given the user is in template preview mode, When they select a platform view, Then the preview should adjust to mimic the layout and specifications of that platform accurately.

User reviews the final appearance of their marketing template before downloading or publishing it.

Given the user is done customizing, When they click 'Preview Final', Then they should see the complete template as it would appear to the end users without any distortion or missing elements.

User with accessibility needs uses the Template Preview Feature to ensure their designs are compliant.

Given the template is being previewed, When the user checks accessibility options (e.g., color contrast), Then the system should notify them of compliance or areas for improvement in alignment with accessibility standards.

User creates a template from scratch using the Template Library guidelines and previews it live.

Given the user is creating a new template, When they add elements (text, images), Then the preview should reflect these additions instantly and accurately.

Template Ratings and Reviews

User Story: As a user, I want to read reviews and ratings of templates so that I can choose the best ones that align with my needs and have been positively reviewed by other users.
Description: The Template Ratings and Reviews requirement implements a feedback mechanism where users can rate and review templates based on their experiences. This feature builds a community-driven aspect within the Template Library, allowing users to share insights and recommendations, which can help other users make informed choices. By fostering user engagement through feedback collection, the platform can continually improve and evolve the Template Library, ensuring that it regularly meets user needs and expectations.
Acceptance Criteria: A user accesses the Template Library and selects a marketing template they have used for their campaign. They decide to rate the template and write a review based on their experience.

Given that the user has successfully used a template, when they provide a rating from 1 to 5 stars and submit a review, then the system should save their feedback and display it on the template's page.

A user wants to view ratings and reviews for a specific template before making a selection. They navigate to the template’s detail page.

Given that users have submitted ratings and reviews for the template, when the user opens the template’s detail page, then the system should display the average rating and a list of recent reviews in a clear and organized manner.

An admin of the platform wants to analyze the user feedback received for a template to spot trends or issues.

Given that there are multiple ratings and reviews for a particular template, when the admin accesses the feedback report for that template, then the system should provide insights including average rating, number of reviews, and any recurring themes in user comments.

A user wants to edit or delete their previously submitted review for a template.

Given that the user has previously submitted a review, when they choose to edit or delete it, then the system should allow them to make changes or remove the review completely, reflecting the updates immediately on the template’s page.

A user wishes to sort templates in the Template Library based on their ratings to find the best ones quickly.

Given that multiple templates have ratings, when the user selects the sort option for ratings, then the system should reorder the templates in descending order based on their average ratings.

A new user wants to understand how ratings and reviews can help them choose the right template.

Given that a user is viewing the Template Library, when they hover over the ratings section, then a tooltip should appear explaining how ratings and reviews can inform their decision-making process.

Multi-Platform Compatibility

User Story: As a small publisher, I want to use marketing templates compatible with different platforms so that I can easily promote my books across multiple channels without needing to adjust designs.
Description: Multi-Platform Compatibility ensures that all templates are optimized for various marketing platforms, including social media, newsletters, and websites. This requirement guarantees that users can utilize the templates effectively across different mediums without losing quality or design integrity. By supporting seamless transitions between platforms, users can save time and effort while expanding their reach and visibility across diverse channels.
Acceptance Criteria: Users should be able to select a marketing template from the Template Library for a social media campaign and customize it according to their content needs.

Given a user has accessed the Template Library, When they select a social media template, Then they should be able to modify text, images, and colors without losing the template's original design integrity.

Users should be able to export a customized newsletter template for integration with popular email marketing platforms.

Given a user has completed customizing a newsletter template, When they choose to export it, Then the file should be compatible with major email platforms such as Mailchimp and Constant Contact, ensuring correct formatting and design retention.

Templates must be tested across different devices to ensure they display accurately regardless of screen size.

Given a user customizes a marketing template, When they preview the template on various devices (desktop, tablet, mobile), Then the layout and design must be responsive, maintaining integrity across all screen sizes.

Users should receive a notification if a template is not compatible with a selected platform or device.

Given a user selects a template, When the template is incompatible with the chosen platform, Then the system should alert the user before proceeding with customization, explaining the limitations.

Users should be able to save their customized templates for future use across multiple platforms.

Given a user customizes a template, When they save it, Then the template should be stored in their account for access on any device and should retain all customizations previously made.

Analytics for template effectiveness need to be integrated, allowing users to track engagement metrics post-launch.

Given a user has launched a campaign using a template, When they view the analytics dashboard, Then they should see metrics such as engagement rate, shares, and click-through rate associated with that template.

Templates should be easy to access and navigate within the library, categorized by type and usage.

Given a user is browsing the Template Library, When they filter by category (e.g., social media, newsletters), Then they should see relevant templates displayed, allowing for quick selection and use.

Template Update Notifications

User Story: As a user, I want to receive notifications about new and updated templates so that I can keep my marketing efforts fresh and up-to-date.
Description: The Template Update Notifications requirement informs users whenever new templates are added to the library or when existing templates are updated. This ensures users stay current with the latest design trends and resources available, allowing them to leverage fresh content for their marketing efforts. By enabling timely notifications, the platform improves user engagement and encourages regular use, ensuring that users can take advantage of new features and designs as they become available.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives notification when a new marketing template is added to the library.

Given that the user is subscribed to template update notifications, when a new template is added to the library, then the user should receive an email notification within 15 minutes of the update.

User is informed about updates to existing templates in the library.

Given that the user has previously used a template, when that template is updated, then the user should receive a push notification on the BookShelfHub interface and an email within 24 hours of the update.

User can access a detailed list of recent template updates and additions.

Given that the user accesses the Template Library, when the user reviews the update log, then the user should see a list of all recent additions and updates along with timestamps and a link to view each updated template.

User can opt in or out of template update notifications.

Given that the user is logged into their account, when the user navigates to notification settings, then the user should be able to toggle template update notifications on or off, with the changes reflected immediately after saving the settings.

User's engagement metrics are improved through timely notifications.

Given that the user has received template update notifications, when the user checks their engagement metrics in the dashboard, then there should be a measurable increase in the number of templates created and shared within one month post-update notifications.

User can provide feedback on template updates.

Given that a user has received notification about a template update, when the user views the updated template, then there should be an option to leave feedback rated from 1 to 5 stars with an optional comment box, and this feedback is stored in the user's profile.

Automated A/B Testing

This feature allows users to set up A/B tests on different elements of their campaigns, such as headlines, images, and calls-to-action. The Automated A/B Testing tool will analyze performance metrics in real-time, providing insights into which variations yield the best results. This empowers users to continuously optimize their marketing efforts based on quantitative feedback, maximizing effectiveness with minimal manual effort.

Requirements

Real-time Performance Metrics Analysis

User Story: As a marketer, I want to see real-time performance metrics for my A/B tests so that I can quickly understand which variants are performing better and make necessary adjustments to optimize my campaigns.
Description: This requirement entails developing a robust analytics engine that tracks and processes performance metrics in real-time for the Automated A/B Testing feature. This will include user interaction data, conversion rates, and engagement statistics for different variations of campaign elements. The engine will allow users to view results dynamically through visually appealing dashboards. This will empower users with immediate insights into their tests, enabling faster decision-making to enhance campaign efficiency and effectiveness. Seamless integration with existing marketing tools and user interfaces is critical for ensuring ease of use and accessibility of insights.
Acceptance Criteria: User utilizes the A/B Testing tool to set up a test for different email subject lines to determine which one generates more opens.

Given the user is on the A/B Testing setup page, when the user selects two different email subject lines and initiates the test, then the system tracks and records user interaction metrics in real-time throughout the testing period.

User views the A/B Testing dashboard to analyze real-time results of their ongoing campaign experiments.

Given the user has initiated an A/B test and is on the dashboard, when they access the dashboard, then performance metrics such as conversion rates and engagement statistics for each campaign element variation are displayed dynamically and visually.

A user wishes to compare the results of two variations of a call-to-action button after a specified testing period.

Given the test period for the A/B test has completed, when the user views the results on the dashboard, then the system provides a clear comparison of key performance metrics for both variations side by side.

A user needs to receive alerts about significant performance differences between variations in their A/B tests.

Given the user has set up an A/B test and specified alert preferences, when one variation outperforms another by a defined threshold, then the system sends a notification alerting the user of the significant difference.

User attempts to integrate the Automated A/B Testing feature with existing email marketing tools to streamline data flow.

Given the user is on the integration settings page, when the user inputs the necessary API keys and settings for their email marketing tool, then the system should successfully sync data and allow for seamless testing of email campaigns.

During the A/B Testing setup, a user requires guidance on how to effectively configure their tests.

Given that the user is on the setup page, when they click on the help icon, then relevant tooltips and detailed guidance on setting up tests are displayed to assist the user in the process.

A user wants to generate a report summarizing the outcomes of completed A/B tests for stakeholders.

Given the user has completed several A/B tests, when they select the report generation option, then the system compiles all relevant performance data into a professional report format ready for sharing with stakeholders.

Automated Variant Selection

User Story: As a campaign manager, I want the system to automatically select the best-performing variant in my A/B tests so that I can save time and ensure my campaigns are always using the most effective content.
Description: This requirement involves creating a mechanism that automatically selects the best-performing variant of any A/B test based on predefined criteria, such as conversion rates or engagement levels. By automating this process, users will reduce the time spent manually analyzing results and implementing changes. The system will notify users when a winning variant is determined, and automatically apply this variant to their ongoing campaigns. This will streamline workflow and ensure that campaigns are continually optimized for performance without additional user intervention.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to run an A/B test on the effectiveness of two different headlines for their online marketing campaign.

Given the user has configured an A/B test for two headlines, when the test is initiated, then the system automatically records performance metrics including conversion rates and engagement levels for both variants over a specified period.

User has completed an A/B test comparing two images used in an email marketing campaign.

Given the A/B test has ended, when the system analyzes the data, then it should automatically select the winning variant based on the highest engagement level and notify the user via email with the results and the applied selection.

User wants to know if the Automated Variant Selection mechanism is functioning as intended during a marketing campaign.

Given a user initiates an A/B test with four different call-to-action buttons, when the performance analysis takes place, then the system must select the best performing button automatically and apply it to the ongoing campaign without manual intervention.

User is tracking the performance of their marketing campaign using the Automated A/B Testing feature.

Given the automated variant selection is in operation, when the best-performing variant is selected, then the system should provide a report summarizing the performance metrics of all variants tested, highlighting the selected variant's metrics.

User seeks to optimize their ongoing marketing campaign after setting up automated A/B testing.

Given the automated variant selection process has been running for a specified period, when a winning variant is identified, then the user should receive a push notification through the application and see the winning variant applied in their campaign settings.

User wants to ensure that the system is continuously selecting optimal variants without requiring manual checks.

Given multiple A/B tests are running simultaneously across different campaigns, when a winning variant is automatically selected for any test, then the system must successfully implement the winning variant across all relevant campaigns in real-time without user delay.

Customizable Testing Parameters

User Story: As a user, I want to customize the parameters of my A/B tests so that I can tailor the tests to my target audience and specific campaign objectives, maximizing the relevance and impact of the results.
Description: This requirement focuses on enabling users to define customizable parameters for their A/B tests, such as the duration of the test, target audience segmentation, and specific performance metrics to track. Providing users with the flexibility to tailor their testing conditions will allow for more relevant and focused insights. These parameters will be easy to configure through the user interface, ensuring that even less technical users can effectively set up tests that align with their specific goals.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets up a standard A/B test for two different headlines to determine which drives more engagement over a two-week period.

Given the user has access to the A/B testing tool, when they input variations for test parameters (headlines, duration, audience segmentation), then they should be able to save the test configuration successfully without errors.

The user wants to track specific performance metrics, such as click-through rates and conversion rates, during their A/B test.

Given the user has defined their A/B test parameters, when they select performance metrics to track, then the selected metrics should be displayed in the dashboard for monitoring.

An author sets up A/B testing for their marketing email campaign targeting different audience segments to evaluate engagement levels.

Given that the author has segmented their audience and defined test parameters, when the test is initiated, then the system should ensure that emails are sent to the correct segments as defined by the parameters.

The user adjusts the duration of their A/B test to see if extending it improves the reliability of results.

Given an active A/B test, when the user modifies the test duration in the settings, then the change should reflect immediately in the system and update the results tracking accordingly.

The marketing manager needs to gather insights from previously run A/B tests to inform future strategies.

Given that previous A/B tests have been completed, when the user accesses the test history reports, then they should be able to view detailed results, including performance metrics and comparison charts, for all past tests.

A user wishes to reset an A/B test due to an error in the initial configuration.

Given that the user identifies an error in their test setup, when they select the reset option for their A/B test, then the system should clear all existing parameters and allow the user to start fresh without retaining old data.

Users need to ensure that the A/B testing feature is accessible and usable by non-technical staff in their publishing house.

Given that a user without technical expertise accesses the A/B testing interface, when they attempt to set up a test using the provided guidelines, then they should be able to configure basic parameters with ease, demonstrating user-friendliness of the interface.

Integration with User Feedback

User Story: As an author, I want to gather user feedback on the different elements of my marketing campaigns during A/B tests so that I can better understand audience preferences and tailor my content accordingly.
Description: This requirement encompasses designing a system that integrates user feedback into the A/B testing process. Users will have the option to solicit feedback from their audience regarding the variants being tested, such as through surveys or ratings. This qualitative data will supplement the quantitative metrics achieved through A/B testing, providing a more holistic understanding of user preferences. This integration will enhance the depth of insights available to marketers, allowing for deeper analysis and improved decision-making.
Acceptance Criteria: User solicits feedback from campaign audience during an A/B test to analyze preferences for two different call-to-action buttons.

Given a user is conducting an A/B test on call-to-action buttons, when users provide feedback through a survey post-interaction, then the user's feedback is recorded and linked to the corresponding variant.

User views analytics that combines both quantitative A/B test results and qualitative user feedback on tested variants.

Given the A/B test has concluded, when the user accesses the analytics dashboard, then the dashboard displays combined metrics showing performance alongside user feedback ratings for each variant.

User re-runs an A/B test with a new variant based on previous feedback to optimize campaign effectiveness.

Given the user has received feedback indicating a preference for variant A, when the user creates a new A/B test including variant A and a new option, then the A/B testing system recognizes and sets up the test with the chosen variants successfully.

User needs to customize feedback surveys for different audience segments during an A/B testing phase.

Given the user is setting up an A/B test, when they select audience segments to target, then they have the ability to customize survey questions specific to each segment's preferences.

User reviews feedback effectiveness based on the completion rate of the feedback surveys during the A/B test.

Given the feedback survey was distributed during the A/B test, when the user analyzes survey completion rates, then the user can see a completion percentage displayed for each variant.

User wants to analyze trends in user feedback over multiple A/B test campaigns.

Given multiple A/B tests have been conducted, when the user accesses the feedback trends report, then the report shows a timeline of user feedback metrics across all campaigns, highlighting shifts in preferences and insights.

User needs to toggle between quantitative and qualitative data easily during A/B testing evaluations.

Given the user is reviewing A/B test results, when they switch the data view option, then the system displays either quantitative performance metrics or qualitative feedback, as per the user's choice.

Historical Data Comparison

User Story: As a data analyst, I want to compare my current A/B test results with historical performance data so that I can identify trends and make data-driven decisions for future campaigns.
Description: This requirement seeks to implement a functionality that allows users to compare results from current A/B tests with historical data from previous campaigns. Users will be able to analyze performance trends over time, identifying what elements consistently yield the best results across different campaigns. This capability will enable users to make informed decisions based on historical patterns, ultimately refining their marketing strategies and enhancing overall campaign effectiveness.
Acceptance Criteria: User compares the results of a current A/B test campaign with the historical data of their previous campaigns to analyze trends in engagement and conversion rates.

Given a user has access to both current A/B test results and historical data, when the user initiates a comparison, then the system should display a clear side-by-side comparison of key metrics like conversion rates, open rates, and click-through rates for both datasets.

A user wants to filter historical data to compare only specific campaigns or time frames relevant to their current A/B testing outcomes.

Given a user has selected specific parameters for filtering historical data, when the user applies these filters, then the system should accurately display the corresponding historical performance metrics that meet these criteria.

An author reviews the insights from the historical data comparison to determine which headlines performed best in their previous campaigns before launching a new A/B test.

Given the user has completed the data comparison, when the user views the insights report, then the report should highlight the best-performing headlines with corresponding performance metrics from past campaigns.

A marketing manager reviews the overall performance trends over multiple campaigns to identify consistent patterns before making strategic decisions.

Given a user accesses the historical comparison feature, when the user selects a time frame and campaign types, then the system should generate a detailed report showing trends in performance metrics over the selected period.

An independent publisher analyzes the effectiveness of various calls-to-action (CTAs) across multiple past campaigns to enhance their current marketing strategy.

Given a user is comparing historical A/B test results, when the user requests a comparison of specific CTAs, then the system should provide detailed insights showing the success rates of each CTA over time and against current campaigns.

Marketplace Connector

This feature seamlessly connects independent authors and small publishers to a vast network of international book retailers and online marketplaces. By automating the integration process, users can effortlessly distribute their titles globally, significantly expanding their reach without the hassle of manual logistics.

Requirements

Automated Retailer Sync

User Story: As an independent author, I want my book listings to automatically update across all retail platforms so that I can save time and ensure accurate information is displayed to potential readers.
Description: This requirement ensures that BookShelfHub integrates with various international book retailers and online marketplaces, enabling automatic synchronization of inventory, pricing, and sales data. By automating this process, users can minimize manual updates and errors, significantly reducing the time and effort spent on inventory management. The integration will allow authors and publishers to maintain accurate listings across multiple platforms, ensuring real-time availability of their titles to a broader audience. This capability is crucial for the Marketplace Connector feature, as it simplifies the distribution process and improves user satisfaction by streamlining logistics and increasing visibility in the market.
Acceptance Criteria: Automated Retailer Sync with Online Marketplace during Inventory Update

Given that a user has updated inventory levels in BookShelfHub, when the inventory update is saved, then the changes should automatically sync to all connected online marketplaces within 10 minutes.

Real-time Pricing Synchronization across Retailers

Given that an author wants to adjust the pricing of a title in BookShelfHub, when the pricing is changed, then the new price should reflect on all connected retailers immediately.

Sales Data Integration from Multiple Retailers

Given that sales data is available from various international retailers, when the user accesses the sales report, then sales statistics should be synchronized and displayed accurately in BookShelfHub without discrepancies.

Error Handling in Automated Sync Process

Given that there is an error during the sync process, when the error occurs, then the user should receive a notification detailing the issue and steps to resolve it within 5 minutes of the error happening.

Sync Confirmation and Logging Feature

Given that a sync process has been executed, when it completes successfully, then a confirmation log should be generated and accessible to the user, detailing timestamps and items synchronized.

User Permissions for Sync Settings

Given that the user is managing sync settings, when changes are made to user permissions for the sync feature, then those changes should take effect immediately for all authorized users.

Multi-Platform Integration Testing

Given that multiple online marketplaces are connected, when the sync process is tested, then the system should be able to sync inventory, pricing, and sales data across all platforms without fail.

Global Currency Support

User Story: As a small publisher, I want to offer my books in multiple currencies so that readers from different countries can easily purchase my titles without confusion or additional conversion costs.
Description: This requirement focuses on implementing multi-currency support within the Marketplace Connector, allowing independent authors and small publishers to set product prices according to various international currencies. This feature should automatically convert prices based on prevailing exchange rates and ensure any royalties or sales royalties reflect currency variations. This will empower users to reach international markets without the friction of currency conversion, ultimately fostering broader accessibility and an enhanced user experience for global buyers.
Acceptance Criteria: Currency Selection for Product Pricing

Given a product in the Marketplace Connector, When the user selects a currency from the available options, Then the product price should automatically update to reflect the selected currency based on current exchange rates.

Displaying Converted Prices

Given a product listed in multiple currencies, When a user views the product detail page, Then all prices should be displayed in the selected currency without manual input, and the currency symbol should match the selected currency.

Automatic Royalty Calculation

Given a sale is made in a currency different from the currency listed, When the sale occurs, Then royalties should be automatically calculated according to the exchange rate, and updated amounts displayed in the user's royalty report.

Price Synchronization Across Platforms

Given a product price has been set in multiple currencies, When the user updates the product price in one currency, Then all associated prices in other currencies should automatically update based on the current exchange rate.

User Notification of Currency Fluctuations

Given a currency exchange rate fluctuates significantly, When the user logs into their account, Then they should receive a prompt or notification about the change in rates and its potential impact on pricing and royalties.

Testing Multi-Currency Transactions

Given a user makes a purchase in a currency different from their account's default currency, When the transaction is completed, Then the transaction should be processed correctly and confirmation should include the converted amount and relevant exchange rate used.

Sales Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want a dashboard that shows my sales data from all platforms so that I can analyze trends and adjust my strategies accordingly to increase my revenue.
Description: This requirement outlines the development of an analytics dashboard that provides real-time insights into sales performance across all marketplaces. Users should be able to track sales volumes, revenue trends, and geographical performance to make informed decisions about marketing strategies and inventory management. Integration with existing analytics tools already present in BookShelfHub is essential, aiming to translate raw data into actionable insights, helping users maximize their market reach and optimize their publishing efforts effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: Sales data visualization for real-time performance tracking.

Given a user is logged into the BookShelfHub platform, when they access the Sales Analytics Dashboard, then they should see a real-time visualization of sales data including total sales volume, revenue, and geographical breakdowns.

Integration with existing analytics tools for consolidated insights.

Given the user has configured their existing analytics tools within BookShelfHub, when they view the Sales Analytics Dashboard, then the metrics displayed should reflect data from these integrated tools, accurately reflecting the current sales performance.

Historical sales performance comparison.

Given a user is on the Sales Analytics Dashboard, when they select a timeframe for comparison (e.g., last month vs. current month), then the dashboard should display comparative metrics for selected sales performance indicators such as total sales and revenue changes.

User customization of dashboard metrics.

Given a user has access to the analytics dashboard, when they choose to customize the displayed metrics, then they should be able to select from various options (e.g., sales by genre, author performance) and save their preferences for future access.

Downloadable sales reports for offline analysis.

Given a user is viewing their sales analytics, when they select the option to download a report, then the system should generate and allow download of a comprehensive report in a PDF or CSV format containing all visualized data.

Alerts for sales performance thresholds.

Given the user is monitoring their sales analytics, when sales performance reaches a predefined threshold (e.g., 20% decrease in sales), then the system should automatically notify the user via email or platform notification.

Mobile responsiveness of Sales Analytics Dashboard.

Given a user accesses the BookShelfHub Sales Analytics Dashboard on a mobile device, when the dashboard loads, then it should display all key metrics and visualizations in a mobile-responsive format without loss of functionality.

Customizable Metadata Fields

User Story: As an author, I want to customize my book's metadata so that it can be more easily found by readers in different marketplaces, increasing my book's visibility and potential sales.
Description: This requirement facilitates the addition and customization of metadata fields for each title in BookShelfHub, allowing authors and publishers to tailor their book descriptions, keywords, and categories to align with specific market needs. Providing customization capabilities ensures that titles are correctly categorized and discoverable in different marketplaces. This can involve guidelines for optimal SEO performance, ensuring that books reach potential readers effectively while also enhancing the platform's competitiveness in the book distribution network.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors and publishers are setting up their book metadata for the first time within the BookShelfHub platform to prepare for a major release.

Given an author is on the metadata setup page, when they select the option to add a new metadata field, then they should have the ability to choose from predefined field types and provide custom labels for each field created.

A publisher wants to optimize their book listing in multiple marketplaces to improve visibility and sales.

Given a publisher is editing their book's metadata, when they fill in the SEO guidelines recommendations, then the metadata fields should accurately reflect the guidelines to maximize discoverability in the marketplaces.

An author is reviewing the discoverability of their book after entering custom metadata into BookShelfHub.

Given the author has saved their custom metadata, when they check the preview of their book listing, then the metadata should be correctly displayed according to the specified fields, and all custom tags should be reflected.

A small publisher has multiple titles to enter into BookShelfHub and requires consistency across their metadata fields.

Given the publisher selects the option to copy metadata settings from one title to another, when they apply this function, then all specified metadata fields from the selected title should be successfully copied to the new title's metadata setup.

Authors need to ensure their books are categorized correctly before distribution through BookShelfHub.

Given an author has completed the metadata entry, when they choose categories from a dropdown list, then the categories must align with the selected keywords and descriptions provided in the custom metadata fields.

A publisher is testing how their newly customized metadata impacts their book’s visibility in partnered marketplaces.

Given the publisher has entered custom metadata and launched a test distribution, when they track the analytics of the book after 30 days, then they should see a measurable increase in visibility and engagement metrics compared to previous listings.

User-Friendly Onboarding Process

User Story: As a new user, I want a straightforward onboarding process so that I can quickly connect my books to international marketplaces without feeling overwhelmed or confused.
Description: This requirement describes the need for a streamlined onboarding process for new users of the Marketplace Connector feature. This process should guide users through the setup of their marketplace accounts, product listings, and inventory synchronization in an intuitive manner. The onboarding flow should include tooltips, tutorials, and pre-defined settings to assist authors and publishers without technical expertise, enabling faster activation of features and increased user adoption. A smooth onboarding experience is essential in sustaining user engagement and satisfaction, ultimately impacting retention rates positively.
Acceptance Criteria: User initiates the onboarding process for the Marketplace Connector feature for the first time.

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they select the 'Start Onboarding' button, then they should be directed to a step-by-step onboarding wizard that clearly outlines each phase of the setup process with tooltips and tutorial links.

User completes the marketplace account setup during the onboarding process.

Given the user is on the marketplace account setup step in the onboarding wizard, when they enter valid account details and click 'Save', then the account should be successfully created, and the user receives a confirmation message.

User synchronizes their product listings during onboarding.

Given the user has completed their marketplace account setup, when they access the product listing synchronization step, then they should see a list of their existing books and an option to sync them to their new marketplace account, with progress indicators shown during the synchronization.

User accesses tutorials and tooltips during onboarding.

Given the user is on any step of the onboarding process, when they hover over any tooltips or click on tutorial links, then they should see relevant help content that assists them in understanding the step they are currently on.

User completes the onboarding process and activates all features.

Given the user has finished all steps in the onboarding wizard, when they click 'Finish Onboarding', then they should be taken to their dashboard with a summary of features activated and options to explore further resources.

User receives support during the onboarding process if they encounter issues.

Given the user is experiencing difficulty at any step in the onboarding process, when they click on the 'Need Help?' button, then they should be presented with contact options for live support or additional resources like FAQs and chat help.

User feedback is collected after completing the onboarding process.

Given the user has completed the onboarding process, when they reach the end of the onboarding wizard, then they should be prompted to fill out a brief feedback form regarding their experience, which can influence future improvements.

Inventory Sync Tool

The Inventory Sync Tool automatically updates inventory levels across all connected sales platforms in real-time. This ensures that authors and publishers maintain accurate stock levels and avoid overselling, giving them peace of mind and improving the efficiency of their distribution process.

Requirements

Real-time Inventory Updates

User Story: As a publisher, I want my inventory levels to be updated in real-time across all sales platforms so that I can avoid overselling and ensure customer satisfaction with accurate stock information.
Description: The Real-time Inventory Updates requirement ensures that the Inventory Sync Tool automatically reflects stock levels across all sales platforms without any delay. This feature integrates seamlessly with various e-commerce platforms, allowing authors and publishers to have a holistic view of their inventory at all times. By maintaining accurate stock levels, users can minimize the risk of overselling and running into stockouts, which enhances customer satisfaction and brand reputation. This requirement is crucial for effective distribution and marketing efforts, supporting the overall goal of streamlining the publishing process.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors update their stock levels in the BookShelfHub platform, and the system reflects these updates across all connected e-commerce platforms instantly, ensuring no discrepancies in inventory.

Given an author updates their stock level in BookShelfHub, when the update is made, then all connected e-commerce platforms must reflect this change within 5 seconds.

Users check the inventory levels after a sale on connected platforms to verify that the stock reduction is accurately reflected within the BookShelfHub dashboard.

Given a sale occurs on an e-commerce platform, when the sale is processed, then the inventory level in BookShelfHub must reflect the reduction within 5 seconds.

Multiple authors are updating their inventory simultaneously in BookShelfHub, and the system efficiently processes all updates without lag or errors.

Given multiple authors submit stock updates at the same time, when the updates are processed, then all authors must see their inventory changes accurately reflected in real-time without any delays or errors.

An author checks their inventory levels before an anticipated sales event to ensure they are accurately displayed across all platforms.

Given an author views their inventory in BookShelfHub, when they check the inventory levels, then the inventory displayed must match the levels in all connected e-commerce platforms without discrepancies.

Users receive notifications for low stock levels that are updated in real-time to ensure they can react quickly to restock.

Given an inventory level falls below a predefined threshold, when this happens, then an alert notification must be sent to the author/publisher within 1 minute.

Automated Alert Notifications

User Story: As an author, I want to receive alerts when my inventory levels are low so that I can restock in time and avoid losing sales due to stockouts.
Description: The Automated Alert Notifications requirement provides proactive alerts to authors and publishers when inventory levels fall below a predefined threshold. This functionality allows users to set customizable low-stock alerts based on their needs, ensuring timely restocking actions. The integration with email and text notifications enhances user responsiveness and helps maintain optimal inventory levels, preventing potential loss of sales and interruptions in distribution. This feature directly enhances the efficiency of the inventory management process.
Acceptance Criteria: Setting up low-stock alert for a specific book title.

Given an author has accessed the Inventory Sync Tool, when they configure an alert for a book with a threshold of 10 units, then an alert should be generated when inventory levels drop to 9 or below.

Receiving alert notifications via email and text.

Given an author has set their low-stock alert for a book title and has provided valid email and phone number, when the inventory level falls below the threshold, then the author should receive an alert notification via both email and text message.

Customizing alert thresholds for different books.

Given a publisher wants to set varying thresholds for different book titles, when they successfully configure the alert system, then each book should maintain its unique threshold settings without interference from other titles.

Verifying alert notifications are sent correctly.

Given that the low-stock level is reached for any book, when the alert notification is triggered, then the notification should be logged in the system as sent along with timestamps for both email and text messages.

Ensuring no duplicate alerts are sent.

Given an author has received a low-stock alert for a specific book, when the inventory remains below the threshold, then no additional alerts should be sent until inventory is restocked above the threshold level.

Testing alert responsiveness under different conditions.

Given varying inventory levels across multiple connected platforms, when inventory levels drop on two or more platforms simultaneously, then alerts should be triggered for each platform without delay.

User interface for setting up alerts.

Given an author is on the alert configuration page, when they complete the form to set a low-stock alert, then they should see a confirmation message stating the alert has been successfully set up and be directed back to the dashboard.

Detailed Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want to access an analytics dashboard that provides insights on my inventory and sales trends so that I can make informed decisions about restocking and marketing strategies.
Description: The Detailed Analytics Dashboard requirement involves creating a user-friendly interface that presents comprehensive analytics related to inventory movement, sales trends, and forecasts. This dashboard will aggregate data from various platforms and present key metrics such as turnover rates, best-selling titles, and seasonal trends for informed decision-making. The insights drawn from this feature enable authors and publishers to formulate effective marketing strategies and manage inventory proactively, establishing a data-driven approach to inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Detailed Analytics Dashboard to review their inventory movement for the past quarter.

Given the user has logged into BookShelfHub and navigates to the Detailed Analytics Dashboard, when they select the 'Inventory Movement' report for the last quarter, then the dashboard displays a comprehensive chart of inventory in and out, segmented by month and title, with accurate figures reflecting actual movements from connected sales platforms.

User analyzes sales trends on the Detailed Analytics Dashboard to identify best-selling titles.

Given the user is on the Detailed Analytics Dashboard, when they select the 'Sales Trends' section, then the dashboard presents a list of titles sorted by sales volume, with the top five titles highlighted, along with percentage changes in sales over the last month.

User views seasonal trends data on the Detailed Analytics Dashboard to inform marketing strategies for the upcoming holidays.

Given the user accesses the Detailed Analytics Dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Seasonal Trends' section, then the dashboard displays historical sales data for the past three holiday seasons, including key insights about peak sales times and popular genres.

User checks turnover rates for their published titles using the Detailed Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user is on the Detailed Analytics Dashboard, when they click on the 'Turnover Rates' report, then the dashboard presents turnover rates for each title over the specified period, alongside industry benchmarks for comparison.

User forecasts future inventory needs using the Detailed Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user navigates to the 'Forecasting' section of the Detailed Analytics Dashboard, when they input projected sales growth for the next quarter, then the dashboard generates a report predicting inventory requirements based on past sales trends and current stock levels.

User receives alerts for low inventory levels through the Detailed Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user has set threshold levels for inventory, when inventory for any title dips below the set threshold, then the dashboard sends an alert notification to the user indicating the title and current stock level.

User customizes the view of the Detailed Analytics Dashboard to display specific metrics.

Given the user is on the Detailed Analytics Dashboard, when they select their preferred metrics from the customization menu, then the dashboard updates to display the selected metrics in a clear and organized layout.

Integration with Sales Platforms

User Story: As an independent author, I want my inventory data to automatically sync with my sales platforms so that I can save time and reduce errors in my inventory management.
Description: The Integration with Sales Platforms requirement focuses on developing robust connections with popular e-commerce platforms and sales channels that publishers frequently use. This ensures that the Inventory Sync Tool can effectively communicate and update inventory data across all relevant platforms in a consistent manner. This integration minimizes manual data entry and reduces the risk of discrepancies between platforms, ultimately leading to improved operational efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: Successful Inventory Update for Connected Sales Platform

Given an author has connected their e-commerce sales platform to BookShelfHub, when they update the inventory level in BookShelfHub, then the inventory level on the connected sales platform should reflect the updated value within 5 minutes.

Error Handling for Failed Inventory Sync

Given the Inventory Sync Tool is attempting to update inventory levels on a connected sales platform, when there is a connectivity issue or API failure, then the author should receive a notification explaining the error and suggesting steps to resolve it.

Multiple Platform Integration for Inventory Updates

Given an author has multiple sales platforms linked to BookShelfHub, when they update the inventory level for a specific title, then all connected platforms must reflect the inventory changes accurately within 5 minutes; and the system should log the time of the update for auditing purposes.

User Interface for Sync Status Monitoring

Given an author is on the Inventory Sync Tool dashboard, when they check the sync status, then they should see a summary of the last inventory update for each connected sales platform, including any errors or successful sync confirmations.

Real-time Inventory Level Check

Given a publisher wants to view real-time inventory levels, when they access the inventory report in BookShelfHub, then the report should display the most current stock levels pulled from all connected sales platforms, updated every minute.

Data Consistency Across Platforms

Given an author sells a book on multiple platforms, when they compare the inventory levels displayed on BookShelfHub and each connected platform, then the data must match exactly for accurate stock representation.

User Role Access Control

User Story: As a team manager, I want to control user access levels to the inventory tool so that I can ensure the right team members have access to the information and functionalities they need while protecting sensitive data.
Description: The User Role Access Control requirement ensures that different users, such as editors, authors, and administrators, have appropriate access levels to the Inventory Sync Tool. Each role will have distinct permissions governing what information they can view and modify, thus enhancing security and reducing the likelihood of errors or unauthorized changes. This requirement is crucial for collaboration among teams while maintaining control over sensitive inventory data.
Acceptance Criteria: User Role Access Control for Authors with Inventory Sync Tool

Given an author user role, when the author accesses the Inventory Sync Tool, then they should only have view permissions for inventory levels and not be able to modify them.

User Role Access Control for Editors with Inventory Sync Tool

Given an editor user role, when the editor accesses the Inventory Sync Tool, then they should have permissions to view and update inventory levels for projects they are assigned to.

User Role Access Control for Administrators with Inventory Sync Tool

Given an administrator user role, when the admin accesses the Inventory Sync Tool, then they should have full permissions to view, update, and modify inventory levels across all projects.

Permissions Enforcement for Incorrect Role Access

Given any user who is not assigned to a specific role in the Inventory Sync Tool, when they try to access restricted features, then they should receive an error message indicating insufficient permissions.

Audit Log Access for User Actions within Inventory Sync Tool

Given any user with admin access, when they check the audit log of the Inventory Sync Tool, then they should see a complete history of actions taken by all users specific to inventory management.

Real-Time Inventory Update Validation Across Roles

Given an inventory change made by an editor, when the change is saved, then all users with appropriate permissions should see the updated inventory levels in real-time without needing to refresh the page.

User Notification for Permission Changes in Inventory Sync Tool

Given a change in user permissions for the Inventory Sync Tool, when the change is saved, then all affected users should receive a notification of their updated access level.

Localized Marketing Insights

This feature provides tailored marketing insights based on regional trends and audience preferences. By analyzing local sales data and consumer behavior, users can optimize their marketing strategies for different markets, enhancing their promotional efforts and boosting sales in targeted regions.

Requirements

Regional Trend Analysis

User Story: As a small publisher, I want to access localized marketing insights so that I can tailor my promotional strategies to better align with regional preferences and potentially increase my sales.
Description: The Regional Trend Analysis requirement focuses on gathering and analyzing localized sales data and consumer behavior patterns for different geographical regions. This analysis will empower users to understand market dynamics and audience preferences unique to each area. By leveraging historical sales data and demographic insights, the feature will enable publishers to optimize their marketing strategies, ensuring that promotional efforts align with regional interests. This enhancement is critical for improving sales performance and targeting marketing efforts effectively, ultimately leading to increased customer engagement and sales in those local markets.
Acceptance Criteria: User analyzes regional sales data for targeted marketing strategies.

Given a user is logged into BookShelfHub and accesses the Localized Marketing Insights feature, When the user selects a specific region and requests the sales analysis report, Then the platform should generate a report that includes localized sales data, consumer behavior patterns, and relevant insights for that region.

User optimizes marketing campaigns based on regional trends.

Given the user has accessed the regional trend analysis report for a selected area, When the user applies suggested marketing strategies provided in the report, Then the marketing campaign should reflect those strategies within the system, and the user should be able to track engagement metrics post-implementation.

User reviews and compares regional trend data over different time periods.

Given the user navigates to the Regional Trend Analysis section, When the user selects multiple regions and specifies a custom date range, Then the system should display a comparative analysis of sales data and consumer behavior for the selected regions over the specified time periods.

User receives notifications about significant changes in regional trends.

Given the user has subscribed to notifications for regional trends, When a significant change is detected in sales data or consumer behavior in the subscribed region, Then the user should receive an email notification summarizing the trend changes and suggested actions to take.

User shares regional analysis reports with team members.

Given the user has generated a regional analysis report, When the user selects the option to share the report via email, Then the system should successfully send the report to the selected team members with the correct report details embedded.

User reviews feedback on past marketing strategies based on regional analysis.

Given a user is in the Regional Trend Analysis feature, When the user selects a previous marketing campaign and views its performance data related to regional trends, Then the platform should display the effectiveness of that campaign in terms of sales performance and audience engagement metrics.

Customizable Marketing Dashboard

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to customize my marketing dashboard with the metrics that are important to my campaigns so that I can have all relevant information in one place for better decision-making.
Description: The Customizable Marketing Dashboard requirement allows users to create a personalized dashboard that displays key marketing metrics and localized insights relevant to their specific publishing goals. By enabling customization, users can prioritize the information that matters most to them, such as regional sales trends, audience engagement statistics, and campaign performance data. This feature enhances user experience by providing meaningful data at a glance and allows for better decision-making based on real-time insights. It is essential for helping users track the effectiveness of their marketing efforts and adjust strategies accordingly.
Acceptance Criteria: User customizes their marketing dashboard to prioritize regional sales data for a specific campaign.

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the dashboard customization section and select 'Regional Sales' as a priority metric, then 'Regional Sales' should appear at the top of the marketing dashboard as the primary focus.

User adjusts the metrics displayed on their dashboard to show audience engagement statistics for a specific time period.

Given the user has accessed their customizable marketing dashboard, when they choose a specific date range for audience engagement statistics, then the dashboard should update to reflect only the data within that selected time period.

User adds a new metric for campaign performance data to their marketing dashboard.

Given the user is in the dashboard customization interface, when they select 'Add Metric' and choose 'Campaign Performance', then the new metric should be displayed on their dashboard alongside other selected metrics without any errors.

User saves their customized marketing dashboard and returns to it later.

Given the user has finished customizing their dashboard and clicks 'Save', when they log out and log back into BookShelfHub, then the dashboard should display the previously saved customizations accurately.

User receives a notification when localized marketing insights change due to new regional data.

Given the user has opted in for notifications on their marketing dashboard, when new regional sales data is available, then the user should receive a notification alerting them to review their dashboard for updated localized marketing insights.

Automated Insight Generation

User Story: As an author, I want to receive automated insights about my target audience's preferences so that I can create compelling marketing content that resonates with them and draws their attention to my books.
Description: The Automated Insight Generation requirement involves developing algorithms that analyze collected data to automatically generate actionable marketing insights tailored to different regions. This feature will save time for users by providing them with ready-to-use recommendations based on current market conditions and historical data. By automating this process, users can focus more on strategy execution rather than data analysis, leading to quicker adaptation to emerging trends and more effective marketing campaigns. This capability is vital for maintaining competitiveness in diverse markets and making data-driven decisions efficiently.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Localized Marketing Insights feature to receive automated insight generation for their specific region after inputting their book's genre and target audience.

Given a user selects their book genre and target audience, When the insights are generated, Then the system should return at least three tailored marketing insights within 10 seconds.

A marketing manager reviews the generated insights to determine the most effective strategies for a regional book launch.

Given insights are generated, When the marketing manager views the insights, Then they should be presented in a clear format with actionable items prioritized by potential impact.

An author checks the insights on their mobile device while preparing for a promotional event in their target region.

Given the author accesses the insights on a mobile device, When they view the insights, Then the interface should be optimized for mobile display with responsive elements.

A user uses the insights to adjust their marketing strategy for a specific region based on the latest consumer behavior trends.

Given the insights are based on recent local sales data, When the user implements the suggested strategies, Then they should see an increase in engagement metrics within one month.

A small publishing house analyzes the effectiveness of the automated insights over multiple marketing campaigns.

Given multiple campaigns have been run, When the publishing house reviews the campaign performance metrics, Then at least 70% of the campaigns should report an improvement in sales attributed to the insights.

A user seeks support to troubleshoot issues with receiving tailored insights.

Given a user requests help, When they describe their issue, Then customer support should respond with a solution or workaround within 24 hours.

Global Sales Dashboard

The Global Sales Dashboard offers a comprehensive view of book performance across multiple international markets. Users can track sales metrics, revenue, and royalty earnings from various platforms in one centralized location, empowering them to make informed decisions about their global strategies.

Requirements

Real-time Sales Tracking

User Story: As a publisher, I want to see real-time sales data from all my books so that I can quickly adjust my marketing strategies to increase sales.
Description: The Real-time Sales Tracking requirement enables users to see live updates of book sales across various international markets. This feature benefits users by providing immediate insights into sales performance, allowing them to promptly capitalize on emerging trends and make real-time adjustments to marketing strategies. Implementing this requirement involves integrating with third-party sales platforms to pull live data, ensuring accuracy and relevance. The expected outcome is a dynamic view of sales performance that empowers users to optimize their sales tactics effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Global Sales Dashboard to assess book sales performance across multiple international markets during a quarterly review meeting with stakeholders.

Given the user has accessed the Global Sales Dashboard, when they select the 'Real-time Sales Tracking' option, then they should see live updates of sales data for all active book titles from integrated platforms, including metrics such as total revenue, units sold, and royalty earnings within the last 24 hours.

An author analyzes their recent book sales trends using the Global Sales Dashboard to adjust their marketing strategies for an upcoming promotional campaign.

Given the author is on the Global Sales Dashboard, when they filter the data for the last month, then they should see sales performance metrics segmented by region, platform, and demographic, allowing them to identify high-performing markets and tailor their marketing efforts accordingly.

A publisher generates a report at the end of a fiscal year to present sales performance and trends to potential investors.

Given the publisher has accessed the Global Sales Dashboard for the year-end review, when they export the sales data, then the report should include a comprehensive overview of global sales performance, including graphs and charts representing sales trends across all international markets and platforms.

A marketing manager uses the real-time sales data to make live adjustments to an ongoing promotion based on sales performance.

Given the marketing manager is monitoring the real-time sales updates in the dashboard, when they observe a spike in sales from a specific platform, then they can initiate a targeted promotion on that platform immediately, submitting changes that are reflected in real-time within five minutes.

An editor reviews the sales data for a specific book to determine if it is underperforming compared to projections.

Given the editor has selected a specific book from the Global Sales Dashboard, when they compare the current sales metrics against the projected sales figures, then they should be able to identify variance trends, access commentary on potential issues, and create follow-up tasks within the platform based on those insights.

An author wants to assess the impact of their latest marketing campaign on book sales using the Global Sales Dashboard.

Given the author accesses the Global Sales Dashboard post-campaign, when they filter sales performance to the relevant time frame of the campaign, then the dashboard should display a clear comparison of sales metrics before, during, and after the campaign, highlighting any correlation or significant changes.

Customizable Sales Reports

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to create customizable sales reports so that I can analyze my books' performance according to specific criteria that matter to my strategy.
Description: The Customizable Sales Reports requirement allows users to generate tailored sales reports based on specific metrics, including time period, geographic region, and sales channels. This feature enhances the user experience by enabling detailed analysis that fits their unique needs, promoting informed decision-making. It requires developing a reporting engine within the dashboard that accommodates various filters and export options. The anticipated outcome is that users will have access to personalized insights that better support their strategic planning and operational decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: User generates a sales report for a specific time period, selecting the last quarter (Q4) for analysis.

Given the user selects 'Last Quarter' as the time period, when they click on 'Generate Report', then the dashboard should display a report showing total sales, revenue, and royalties for that quarter.

User customizes a sales report by selecting a geographic region, specifically focusing on 'Europe'.

Given the user selects 'Europe' as the geographic region, when they click on 'Generate Report', then the dashboard should show sales metrics only for the European market, including total sales, revenue, and royalties for the selected period.

User applies multiple filters to create a targeted sales report based on both channel and time period.

Given the user selects 'Online' as the sales channel and 'Last Month' as the time period, when they click on 'Generate Report', then the dashboard should provide a report detailing metrics only for online sales in the last month.

User wants to export the sales report in different formats (CSV, PDF).

Given the user generates a sales report, when they choose to export the report, then they should have the option to export it as either CSV or PDF successfully without errors.

User attempts to generate a sales report with no filters applied.

Given the user does not select any filters and clicks on 'Generate Report', then the system should generate a comprehensive report including all sales data for all regions and channels for the selected period without filtering out any data.

User interacts with the reporting dashboard to view sales metrics visually through charts and graphs.

Given the user selects a specific time period and region, when the report is generated, then the dashboard should visually display the sales data using appropriate charts and graphs for better analysis.

Visual Sales Analytics

User Story: As an author, I want to see my book sales represented visually so that I can quickly grasp how my work is performing in different markets.
Description: The Visual Sales Analytics requirement focuses on providing users with visually appealing and interactive charts and graphs to represent sales data. This feature improves user engagement by presenting complex data in an easily digestible format. It entails incorporating data visualization libraries within the dashboard and ensuring that the graphics update dynamically with real-time data. The goal is to make the sales performance data not only accessible but also understandable, facilitating quicker insights and discussions among team members.
Acceptance Criteria: Display of Real-time Sales Data for Users

Given a user accesses the Global Sales Dashboard, when they select a specific time frame for sales data, then the dashboard displays updated charts and graphs reflecting real-time sales performance for the chosen period.

Interactivity of Sales Visualizations

Given the user is viewing the sales analytics dashboard, when they hover over any data point on the charts, then detailed sales information for that point is displayed, including metrics such as units sold and revenue generated.

Accessibility of Sales Performance Insights

Given the user navigates to the Global Sales Dashboard, when they select different countries or regions, then the dashboard updates to show only the sales analytics relevant to those markets, ensuring personalized and localized insights.

Integration of Multiple Data Sources

Given the dashboard is set up, when data from various sales platforms is imported, then all data should be accurately reflected in the visual sales analytics without discrepancies and update automatically when new data is available.

User-Friendly Interface for Data Interpretation

Given a user explores the Visual Sales Analytics, when they select a graph or chart style, then they should have at least three options for viewing their data (e.g., bar graphs, pie charts, and line charts) to enhance engagement and comprehension.

Exporting Analytical Data for Reporting

Given a user wants to generate a report, when they select the export functionality, then they should be able to download the visual analytics in various formats (e.g., PDF, CSV) without loss of data integrity.

Customization of Dashboard Layout

Given a user has access to the Global Sales Dashboard, when they rearrange the position of the various charts and graphs within the dashboard, then the layout should save their preferences for future sessions.

Multi-platform Integration

User Story: As a small publisher, I want the dashboard to integrate with multiple sales platforms so that I can have all my sales data in one place and avoid manual data entry.
Description: The Multi-platform Integration requirement allows the Global Sales Dashboard to connect seamlessly with various online sales platforms, enabling automatic data retrieval and synchronization of sales metrics. This ensures comprehensive data coverage and accuracy, benefitting users by consolidating information from diverse sources into one interface. Implementing this feature requires API integrations with major book distribution platforms and a robust data processing mechanism to ensure compatibility. The outcome will be a unified dashboard experience where users can view all relevant sales data in one place.
Acceptance Criteria: Accessing Real-Time Sales Data from Multiple Platforms

Given that the user has access to the Global Sales Dashboard, when they connect to multiple online sales platforms, then the dashboard should display real-time sales data from all connected platforms accurately and simultaneously.

Automated Data Synchronization

Given that the user has set up connections to various sales platforms, when the sales data is updated on any platform, then the Global Sales Dashboard should automatically synchronize and reflect the latest data within 10 minutes.

Comprehensive Reporting on International Sales Performance

Given that the user is viewing the Global Sales Dashboard, when they request a sales report, then the report should include detailed metrics such as units sold, revenue generated, and royalty earnings by country and platform.

Error Handling for Failed Data Retrieval

Given that there is a connection issue with any sales platform, when the Global Sales Dashboard attempts to retrieve data, then the user should receive a clear error message indicating which connection failed and suggested actions to resolve the issue.

User Interface Responsiveness Across Devices

Given that the user accesses the Global Sales Dashboard from different devices, when they view the dashboard on mobile, tablet, or desktop, then the interface should remain fully functional and visually coherent across all devices.

Royalty Calculation Module

User Story: As an author, I want to see how my royalties are calculated based on sales so that I can understand my earnings and ensure transparency.
Description: The Royalty Calculation Module requirement enables users to automatically calculate royalties based on the sales data collected. This feature simplifies the complex calculations often involved in royalty distribution, enhancing transparency and accuracy for authors and publishers alike. It entails creating an algorithm that factors in sales figures, pricing structures, and agreements with authors. The expected outcome is a system that not only automates these calculations but also provides detailed reporting of how royalties are derived, thus building trust with authors.
Acceptance Criteria: Royalty calculations for a specific author's book are generated after sales data is input into the system.

Given the sales data for 'Book A' has been entered, when I request the royalty report, then I should receive a report detailing the calculated royalties based on the predefined pricing structure and sales agreements.

A user manually inputs sales figures that reflect a recent book launch to test the royalty calculation module.

Given that the input sales figures are accurate, when I submit the data for royalty calculation, then the system's output should match the expected royalty earnings based on the agreed percentages with the author.

The system generates a detailed report that explains how royalties were calculated, providing clarity for the authors.

Given a request for a royalty breakdown, when I generate the report, then it should include line items for sales, total revenue, calculated royalty percentages, and any deductions applied, ensuring transparency in the calculations.

An author wants to review their royalty calculations for the previous quarter to assess earnings and sales performance.

Given that the historical sales data is available, when I access the royalty calculation for the previous quarter, then I should see a report that accurately reflects the earnings and the breakdown of how royalties were derived.

Multiple authors have different royalty percentage agreements, and the module needs to calculate royalties accordingly.

Given the varying percentage agreements for multiple authors, when I input the sales data for books by different authors, then the system should accurately calculate and display individual royalty amounts based on the specific agreements for each author.

A user wants to ensure that the royalty calculation algorithm is compliant with their business rules and accounting standards.

Given the predefined business rules for royalty calculation, when I run a test case through the calculation module, then the output should conform to these rules and match the expected results in an audit report style.

An end-user requires real-time updates on the royalty calculations as sales data is entered.

Given that sales data is continuously being updated, when I input new sales data into the system, then the royalty calculations displayed should refresh automatically without needing to refresh the entire page.

Market Trend Analysis

User Story: As a publisher, I want to analyze market trends over time so that I can make informed decisions on future book releases and marketing approaches.
Description: The Market Trend Analysis requirement provides users with tools to assess sales data over time and identify patterns or trends in the book market. This feature enhances decision-making by supplying users with data-driven insights that can influence future publishing strategies. Implementing this involves developing algorithms to process historical sales data and present it in an intuitive format. The expected outcome is a deeper understanding of market dynamics, enabling publishers to adapt their offerings and strategies based on emerging trends.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Global Sales Dashboard to review historical sales data for insights on market trends over the past year.

Given the user is on the Global Sales Dashboard, When they select the Market Trend Analysis feature, Then they should see a visual representation of sales data over the past year, including key metrics such as units sold, revenue, and royalties.

User filters the sales data by specific genres and regions to identify which books are performing best in each market.

Given the user has selected a genre and a region on the Global Sales Dashboard, When they apply the filters, Then the sales metrics displayed should update to show only the filtered books and their respective performance data.

User compares sales trends of multiple titles to determine which are gaining traction and which are declining.

Given the user has selected multiple titles from the sales data, When they click on the 'Compare' button, Then the dashboard should display a comparative analysis of the selected titles, highlighting sales trends over time for each title.

User generates a report summarizing market trends for review and presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user is on the Market Trend Analysis page, When they click on the 'Generate Report' button, Then a downloadable report summarizing key insights, trends, and recommendations should be created and made available in PDF format.

User sets alerts for significant changes in sales metrics for specific titles.

Given a user has set a threshold for sales performance changes, When a significant change occurs (above or below the threshold), Then the user should receive an automated alert via email or in-app notification.

User accesses historical sales data to forecast future trends based on previous patterns.

Given the user has selected a time frame and a dataset for analysis, When they run the forecast analysis, Then the platform should provide predicted sales trends based on historical data with a confidence interval.

International Compliance Assistant

This feature guides users through the specific legal and logistical requirements for distributing books in different countries. By simplifying the process of international compliance, authors and publishers can confidently expand into new markets without fearing potential legal pitfalls.

Requirements

Compliance Documentation Library

User Story: As an author, I want access to a library of compliance documentation so that I can ensure my books meet the legal requirements for distribution in different countries without facing legal issues.
Description: This requirement entails the creation of a comprehensive digital library housing documentation related to international book distribution regulations and compliance standards from various countries. Users will have access to the latest legal guidelines, tariffs, and distribution protocols specific to each country. The library will be searchable and regularly updated to ensure that users are informed about any changes in laws or regulations that may impact their publishing efforts. This will empower publishers and authors to make informed decisions and minimize legal risks while expanding into new markets.
Acceptance Criteria: Accessing compliance documentation for book distribution in Germany.

Given the user is on the Compliance Documentation Library page, when they search for 'Germany', then they should see the latest legal guidelines, tariffs, and distribution protocols for Germany listed in the results.

Finding updates to compliance regulations for book distribution in Canada.

Given the user has accessed the Compliance Documentation Library, when they filter for updates from the past month, then they should see a list of any new or updated documents specific to Canada that were published in that timeframe.

Locating compliance documentation for multiple countries simultaneously.

Given the user wants to compare distribution protocols for the USA, UK, and Australia, when they use the multi-country search feature, then they should receive a side-by-side comparison of the compliance documentation for all three countries.

Ensuring the library is regularly updated with new compliance documents.

Given it is the start of a new month, when the compliance team reviews the library, then they must have at least 5 new or updated documents related to international book distribution regulations added to the library each month.

Validating the search functionality of the Compliance Documentation Library.

Given the user types in 'sales tax' in the search bar, when they press enter, then the results should display relevant documents related to sales tax across all listed countries.

Checking the usability of the Compliance Documentation Library interface.

Given the user is navigating the Compliance Documentation Library, when they attempt to access a document, then the loading time should be under 3 seconds, and the document should be accessible without errors.

Assessing the comprehensiveness of the Compliance Documentation Library.

Given an annual review of the library, when the compliance team evaluates the number of countries represented, then the library must cover compliance documentation for at least 25 countries to be considered comprehensive.

Country-Specific Compliance Checklist

User Story: As a publisher, I want a country-specific compliance checklist so that I can easily keep track of all necessary legal steps required for distributing my books abroad.
Description: Develop a feature that provides users with an easy-to-follow compliance checklist tailored to each target country. This checklist will outline essential steps for legal compliance, including ISBN registration, copyright considerations, distribution agreements, and taxation requirements. It will help users stay organized and ensure they do not overlook any critical regulatory components when publishing internationally. The checklist will be interactive, allowing users to mark completed tasks, thereby facilitating a smoother compliance process.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects a target country from a dropdown menu and accesses the compliance checklist specific to that country.

Given a user has logged into BookShelfHub and navigated to the International Compliance Assistant, When they select a target country from the dropdown, Then the compliance checklist relevant to that country should load correctly without errors.

User completes certain compliance tasks and saves their progress in the checklist.

Given a user has marked several tasks as complete in the compliance checklist, When they click on the 'Save Progress' button, Then their progress should be saved, and a confirmation message should be displayed.

User views the compliance checklist and needs to understand what each task entails.

Given a user is viewing the compliance checklist for a selected country, When they hover over any task in the checklist, Then a tooltip with a brief explanation of that task should be displayed.

User wants to print the compliance checklist for offline use.

Given a user has completed the compliance checklist, When they click on the 'Print Checklist' option, Then a printable version of the checklist should be generated that includes all completed and pending tasks.

User needs to be alerted if they attempt to access a checklist for a country that is not currently supported.

Given a user selects a country that is not on the supported list, When they try to access the compliance checklist, Then an alert should notify them that the compliance checklist for that country is not available.

User wishes to share their compliance checklist with team members for collaborative editing.

Given a user is viewing their compliance checklist, When they click on the 'Share Checklist' option and enter team members' email addresses, Then those team members should receive an email invitation to view and edit the checklist, and the checklist should show the current user's editing status.

Real-Time Compliance Alerts

User Story: As an independent publisher, I want to receive real-time alerts about compliance changes so that I can proactively manage my distribution strategy and avoid legal issues.
Description: Implement a real-time alert system that notifies users of any changes in international publishing laws or regulations that affect their distribution rights. This requirement will ensure that users are immediately updated on any compliance risks or new legal requirements that could impact their publishing strategies. This proactive communication will help users avoid potential legal pitfalls and adapt to changing regulations efficiently, thus safeguarding their publishing activities.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-Time Notification of Regulatory Changes for International Distribution

Given that a user has opted in for compliance alerts, when a change in international publishing law is detected, then the system should send an immediate notification to the user's registered email address and display an alert within the platform.

User Interface for Managing Compliance Alerts

Given that a user accesses the compliance dashboard, when they navigate to the alerts section, then they should be able to view a list of all recent compliance alerts, including timestamps and links to detailed information.

Alert Categorization by Severity Level

Given that a change in law occurs, when the compliance alert is generated, then the alert should categorize the change as 'High', 'Medium', or 'Low' severity based on the potential impact on distribution rights, enabling users to prioritize their response.

User Acknowledgment of Compliance Alerts

Given that a user receives a compliance alert, when they review the alert, then the system should allow them to acknowledge receipt, and record this acknowledgment in the compliance logs for accountability.

Integration with Third-Party Legal Updates

Given that the system has access to third-party legal sources, when a relevant update is published, then the system should automatically pull in this information and generate a compliance alert for the user.

Support for Multiple Legal Jurisdictions

Given that a user operates in multiple countries, when compliance alerts are generated, then the system should filter and display alerts relevant to the specific jurisdictions the user operates in based on their profile settings.

Tracking User Interaction with Alerts

Given that compliance alerts are sent, when a user interacts with an alert (e.g., views, acknowledges, or dismisses), then the system should log this interaction and update the user's engagement metrics within the platform.

Guided Compliance Workflow

User Story: As an author, I want a guided compliance workflow tool so that I can understand the steps I need to take to publish my book in different countries without confusion.
Description: This requirement involves creating an interactive workflow tool that guides users through the compliance process based on their specific publishing needs and target markets. The tool will allow users to input their book details and target countries, generating a customized workflow that outlines the necessary compliance steps along with timelines. This will enhance user experience and streamline the compliance process, making it less daunting for those unfamiliar with international regulations.
Acceptance Criteria: User inputs book details and selects target countries for compliance requirements.

Given the user is on the Guided Compliance Workflow page, when they input valid book details and select one or more target countries, then the system should generate a customized workflow that outlines all necessary compliance steps for each selected country within 10 seconds.

User navigates through the generated compliance workflow steps.

Given the user has received their customized compliance workflow, when they follow each step provided in the workflow, then they should see detailed information on required documents, timelines, and resources needed for successful compliance without any errors.

User attempts to input invalid book details in the compliance workflow.

Given the user is on the Guided Compliance Workflow page, when they input invalid or incomplete book details, then the system should display an error message indicating the specific issues with their input, and should not proceed to the compliance workflow generation until valid details are entered.

User completes all steps in the compliance workflow.

Given the user has followed the entire compliance workflow, when they reach the final step of the workflow, then the system should provide a summary of completed tasks and a downloadable checklist of compliance requirements that can be printed or saved.

User reviews an overview of compliance requirements for each selected target country.

Given the user has selected multiple target countries, when they click on the overview option in the workflow, then the system should display a comprehensive summary of compliance requirements including any differences between the selected countries in a user-friendly format.

User seeks help on compliance process.

Given the user is on the Guided Compliance Workflow page, when they click on the help icon, then the system should open a help section or FAQ that provides clear and concise information regarding commonly asked questions about the compliance process and how to use the tool effectively.

Integration with Publisher Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want compliance features integrated into my publisher dashboard so that I can manage all aspects of my publishing process from a single platform.
Description: Ensure that all compliance-related features are seamlessly integrated into the existing BookShelfHub publisher dashboard. This integration will allow users to manage compliance tasks alongside other publishing activities, providing a holistic view of their publishing projects. Users will be able to access compliance checklists, alerts, and documentation from the dashboard, streamlining their workflow and enhancing overall productivity in their publishing operations.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of Compliance Checklists into the Publisher Dashboard

Given that a user is logged into the BookShelfHub publisher dashboard, when they navigate to the compliance section, then they should see a fully accessible compliance checklist specific to their selected market.

Real-time Alerts for Compliance Updates

Given that a user has selected a country for distribution, when there are updates or changes to compliance regulations in that country, then the user should receive real-time alerts on their dashboard indicating the need for action.

Accessibility of Compliance Documentation

Given that a user is managing their publishing project, when they access the compliance section of the dashboard, then they should be able to download and view all relevant compliance documentation for their selected countries in a user-friendly format.

Integration of Compliance Tasks into Project Management Workflow

Given that the user has compliance tasks to complete, when they view their overall project management dashboard, then they should see compliance tasks listed alongside their regular publishing tasks, enabling seamless prioritization.

User Training and Support for Compliance Features

Given that new features related to international compliance have been implemented, when users access the help section of the dashboard, then they should find comprehensive guides and video tutorials available to assist in understanding these features.

User Feedback Collection on Compliance Features

Given that the integration of compliance features is complete, when users complete a compliance task, then they should be prompted to provide feedback on their experience to ensure continuous improvement of the feature.

Reporting Compliance Task Completion

Given that a user has completed all compliance-related tasks for a specific country, when they submit their completed checklist, then the system should generate a confirmation report that can be saved or printed.

Cross-Border Fee Calculator

The Cross-Border Fee Calculator provides an estimate of the costs associated with selling books in different markets, including shipping, taxes, and fees. This feature helps users understand their potential profit margins, allowing for more strategic pricing and improved financial planning.

Requirements

Dynamic Currency Conversion

User Story: As an independent author, I want to see my book prices in my local currency so that I can better understand my potential earnings and appeal to international buyers more effectively.
Description: The Dynamic Currency Conversion feature allows users to view book prices in their local currencies based on real-time exchange rates. This functionality enhances user experience by providing clarity on costs and helps authors and publishers understand international pricing strategies. By integrating this feature with the existing pricing system, users can make more informed decisions about potential sales in various markets. Furthermore, this promotes transparency and builds trust with potential buyers who may be hesitant to engage with unfamiliar currencies.
Acceptance Criteria: User wishes to view the price of a specific book in their local currency while exploring the BookShelfHub platform for potential purchases.

Given the user is on the book's detail page, when the user selects their local currency from the dropdown menu, then the book's price should update to reflect the selected local currency based on real-time exchange rates.

An author is setting prices for their book in various markets and wants to see how the prices change in local currencies to determine pricing strategies.

Given the author is on the pricing setup page, when they enter a base price in USD, then the system should calculate and display the equivalent price in at least five different local currencies with an option to refresh the rates.

User is in the checkout process and wants to confirm their purchase price in local currency, including taxes and fees, before completing the transaction.

Given the user is on the checkout page, when they proceed to payment, then the displayed total amount should include the book price converted to their local currency, with a breakdown of shipping, taxes, and fees disclosed.

A publisher wants to verify if the Dynamic Currency Conversion is updating correctly with the latest exchange rates during their promotional campaigns.

Given the publisher is viewing the promotional campaign results, when they refresh the page, then the displayed prices in local currencies should reflect the latest exchange rates without requiring a system restart.

Users from different countries want to see consistent pricing information across devices while checking out.

Given a user accesses BookShelfHub from different devices, when they view the same book details and prices, then the local currency price shown should remain consistent across all devices irrespective of the browsing method.

Shipping Cost Estimation

User Story: As a publisher, I want to estimate shipping costs for different markets so that I can set competitive prices and enhance my profit margins.
Description: The Shipping Cost Estimation feature provides users with an accurate calculation of shipping fees based on destination, weight, and service speed. By integrating with major shipping carriers, this feature allows authors and publishers to estimate shipping costs during the pricing strategy phase, leading to better financial planning and enhanced customer satisfaction. Users can optimize their shipping options to minimize costs while ensuring timely deliveries, ultimately improving profit margins.
Acceptance Criteria: Shipping cost estimation for a user preparing to sell their book in the UK market.

Given the user inputs the weight of the book as 1kg and selects the UK as the delivery destination, when the user requests a shipping cost estimate, then the system should return an accurate shipping cost from major carriers including FedEx, UPS, and DHL that reflects the current rates for the specified weight and destination.

User calculating shipping costs for different service speeds (standard, expedited, and overnight).

Given the user selects a delivery destination and inputs the weight of the book as 2kg, when the user requests shipping costs for standard, expedited, and overnight services, then the system should provide distinct shipping cost estimates for each service level, all reflecting accurate rates from integrated carriers.

Authors needing to evaluate the impact of shipping costs on profit margins.

Given the user has entered their book's price as $20, shipping weight as 1.5kg, and selected the USA as the delivery destination, when shipping costs are calculated, then the system should display the total estimated profit after shipping expenses and any applicable fees, allowing the user to see the impact of shipping costs on their profit margin.

Reviewing shipping cost comparisons across multiple delivery options for the same destination.

Given the user inputs a book weight of 3kg and selects Canada as the delivery destination, when they request a shipping cost estimate, then the system should present a comparative table showing shipping rates from at least three different carriers, enabling the user to quickly determine the most cost-effective option.

User testing the shipping cost estimation feature during a pricing strategy session.

Given the user is in the pricing strategy section of BookShelfHub, when they enter various weights (e.g., 0.5kg, 1kg, 5kg) and different destination countries, then the system should consistently provide accurate shipping estimates for each entry, allowing the user to finalize their pricing strategy based on accurate shipping costs.

Calculating taxes and fees including shipping costs for a specific market.

Given the user selects Australia as the destination market and inputs a book weight of 4kg, when the system estimates the shipping cost, it should also calculate and display any applicable taxes and fees based on Australian regulations, providing a comprehensive overview of the total costs involved.

Adjusting shipping options based on customer preferences (eco-friendly vs. standard).

Given the user selects 'eco-friendly shipping' for a book weighing 2kg and destined for Germany, when the user requests the shipping cost, then the system should provide an estimated shipping cost that reflects eco-friendly options, along with the standard options for comparison, facilitating a conscious choice for users.

Tax Compliance Guidance

User Story: As an independent publisher, I want to receive guidance on tax compliance so that I can avoid legal issues when selling my books internationally.
Description: The Tax Compliance Guidance feature offers insights and resources regarding applicable sales taxes and regulatory fees in various regions. This is essential for independent publishers as it ensures they adhere to international tax laws when selling across borders. The feature will centralize this information, offering alerts and updates based on legal changes, thereby reducing the risk of compliance violations and fostering confidence in the financial aspects of cross-border selling.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Tax Compliance Guidance feature to review sales tax obligations for book sales in a new international market they are entering.

Given the user selects a new market from the options, when they request the tax guidance, then the system displays the relevant sales tax information, including rates and compliance requirements for that market.

User receives alerts about changes in tax regulations relevant to their current markets through the Tax Compliance Guidance feature.

Given the user is subscribed to alerts, when a new tax regulation is announced, then the system sends an email notification to the user summarizing the changes and their implications.

User uses the Tax Compliance Guidance resource to calculate estimated tax costs for a specific book sale in different regions.

Given the user inputs their sale price and selects one or more regions, when they click 'Calculate', then the system provides an estimated total price including applicable taxes for each selected region.

User reviews the Tax Compliance Guidance insights and determines that their pricing strategy needs to change based on tax obligations.

Given the user accesses the guidance and identifies higher taxes in a new market, when they adjust their pricing strategy accordingly, then the new price reflects increased profit margin after tax calculations.

User seeks support for understanding tax compliance issues and accesses the help section of the Tax Compliance Guidance feature.

Given the user navigates to the help section, when they ask a question about tax compliance, then they receive accurate and relevant information or contact support capabilities.

User logs in to the system to review the Tax Compliance Guidance information after a regulation update was announced.

Given the user is logged into their account, when they navigate to the Tax Compliance Guidance feature, then the interface shows any relevant updates in tax compliance policies that have occurred since their last login.

Profit Margin Analyzer

User Story: As an author, I want to analyze different pricing scenarios for my books so that I can maximize my profit margins when selling internationally.
Description: The Profit Margin Analyzer feature allows users to simulate sales scenarios by adjusting variables such as book pricing, shipping costs, and taxes. It provides a visual representation of potential profits under different market conditions, enabling strategic decision-making. This tool is vital for users to assess their pricing strategies effectively and offers insights that can lead to better market performance and profitability.
Acceptance Criteria: User adjusts the book price in the Profit Margin Analyzer to evaluate potential profit across different markets.

Given a user inputs a book price, when they simulate sales, then the Profit Margin Analyzer displays the estimated profit for each selected market, adjusted for shipping and taxes.

A user sets various shipping costs to analyze their effect on overall profit margins.

Given a user inputs shipping costs, when they run a sales simulation, then the Profit Margin Analyzer reflects changes in estimated profits based on the input shipping costs.

User changes tax rates for different regions to compare profitability.

Given a user modifies tax rates, when running the Profit Margin Analysis, then the tool shows updated profit estimates that correspond with the new tax rates for each market.

A user tests multiple sales scenarios by varying both price and costs simultaneously.

Given a user adjusts multiple variables at once, when they execute a simulation, then the Profit Margin Analyzer provides a consolidated visual report showing potential profit under various conditions.

User requests a graphical representation of profit margins over several sales scenarios.

Given a user selects the graphical report option, when they generate the report, then the Profit Margin Analyzer displays a line graph reflecting profit margins against different variables like price and shipping costs.

A user assesses the impact of promotional discounts on profit margins.

Given a user inputs a promotional discount percentage for their book pricing, when they run the analysis, then the Profit Margin Analyzer updates the profit estimate reflecting the new discounted price.

Multi-Language Support

User Story: As an international author, I want to use BookShelfHub in my preferred language so that I can manage my publishing process more effectively and comfortably.
Description: The Multi-Language Support feature is designed to provide users with the capability to set language preferences for their dashboards and pricing interfaces. This ensures that authors and publishers from diverse linguistic backgrounds can navigate the platform easily and access essential features without language barriers. Supporting multiple languages promotes inclusivity and expands the user base, ultimately fostering a more global outreach for independent publishers.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets their preferred language to Spanish in the dashboard settings and verifies that all elements on the platform, including navigation menus and interface labels, are displayed in Spanish without discrepancies.

Given a user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they select 'Spanish' from the language preferences, then all dashboard components including titles, buttons, and tooltips must be accurately translated into Spanish.

An author publishes a book using the Multi-Language Support feature, choosing French as the language for their book's pricing interface, and ensures that pricing information is displayed correctly in French for potential buyers.

Given an author is setting up a new book, when they select 'French' as the language for the pricing interface, then all pricing details such as 'Price', 'Currency', and 'Discount' must appear in French without translation errors.

A user switches their preferred language to German and accesses the royalty tracking feature to ensure that all financial data and reports are displayed in German accurately.

Given a user has changed their language preference to 'German', when they navigate to the royalty tracking tab, then all financial metrics and terms must be translated into German and align with the original meanings.

A publisher from an English-speaking country sets the platform language to Japanese before accessing marketing tools and confirms all instructions and descriptions are correctly translated into Japanese.

Given a publisher has set their language preference to 'Japanese', when they access any marketing tools, then every instruction and description must be displayed in Japanese with no missing elements.

A user checks the dashboard interface in Italian and navigates to various sections like 'Inventory Management' and 'Sales Performance' to evaluate language consistency across different areas of the platform.

Given a user has selected 'Italian' as their language preference, when they navigate through 'Inventory Management' and 'Sales Performance', then all section headings, options, and alert messages should be consistently translated into Italian.

A non-English speaking editor collaborates with an author who uses the platform in Portuguese, ensuring all collaborative messages are transmitted and presented in Portuguese for effective communication.

Given the editor and author have set their language preferences to 'Portuguese', when they communicate within the collaboration tool, then all messages must appear in Portuguese without errors in translation or context.

Multi-Currency Pricing Tool

The Multi-Currency Pricing Tool allows users to set and manage book prices in various currencies based on the target market. This feature ensures competitive pricing and enhances the purchasing experience for international customers by providing them with local currency options.

Requirements

Dynamic Currency Conversion

User Story: As an international customer, I want to view book prices in my local currency, so that I can quickly understand the cost without worrying about currency conversion rates.
Description: The Dynamic Currency Conversion requirement allows users to display real-time conversions of book prices into their local currencies based on current exchange rates. This feature will enable authors and publishers to set competitive prices that automatically adjust according to market fluctuations, improving the purchasing experience for customers globally. This functionality enhances user engagement by providing transparent pricing in the user's preferred currency, thus facilitating faster purchasing decisions and potentially increasing sales.
Acceptance Criteria: Display Local Currency Pricing on Product Pages

Given a user is viewing a book on the website, When the user’s location is determined, Then the book price should be displayed in the user’s local currency based on real-time exchange rates.

Automatic Price Adjustment for Exchange Rate Changes

Given an author sets a book price in USD, When the exchange rate fluctuates, Then the displayed price in local currency should automatically update to reflect the current exchange rate.

User Selection of Preferred Currency

Given a user is on the website, When the user selects a preferred currency from the settings, Then all book prices should be displayed in the selected currency throughout the user’s session.

Real-Time Currency Conversion Accuracy

Given a user views a book price in local currency, When the user checks the current exchange rate from a reliable source, Then the displayed price should match the converted amount based on that exchange rate within a margin of error of 1%.

Performance Impact Assessment of Currency Conversion

Given the Multi-Currency Pricing Tool is implemented, When multiple users access the pricing tool simultaneously, Then the system response time should not exceed 2 seconds for displaying the prices.

Error Handling for Currency Conversion Failures

Given a user attempts to view book prices in local currency, When the currency conversion fails due to a system error, Then the user should see a fallback message indicating that pricing is currently unavailable but can be checked later.

User Feedback on Currency Pricing Feature

Given a user has completed a purchase in local currency, When the user is prompted for feedback, Then at least 85% of users should indicate satisfaction with the currency pricing feature in their responses.

Localized Pricing Strategies

User Story: As an author, I want to set different book prices based on the country my readers are in, so that I can attract a larger audience while considering local market conditions.
Description: The Localized Pricing Strategies requirement allows users to define distinct pricing models for different regions, enabling authors and publishers to set price tiers based on local economic conditions. This feature is essential for maximizing revenue across diverse markets and ensures competitive pricing tailored to each geographical area. By integrating localized marketing insights, users can optimize their book pricing strategies effectively, catering to varying customer purchasing powers and preferences.
Acceptance Criteria: Setting Regional Pricing for Multiple Currencies

Given a user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the pricing settings for their book, then they should be able to set a distinct price for each available currency based on the selected region.

Testing Price Visibility for International Users

Given an international customer visiting the BookShelfHub store, when they select their local currency, then the prices displayed should reflect the assigned localized pricing and should match the current exchange rates accurately.

Editing Existing Pricing Strategies

Given the user is on the pricing management page, when they attempt to edit an existing pricing model for a specific region, then the updates should be saved and reflected in the pricing preview immediately without errors.

Applying Promotional Discounts by Region

Given a user is creating a promotional campaign for their book, when they set a discount rate for a specific region, then the new prices should accurately reflect the discounted rates in the local currency for customers in that region.

Monitoring Sales Performance by Localized Pricing

Given the user navigates to the sales analytics section, when they generate a report on book sales by region, then it should display a breakdown of sales figures that correlate with the localized pricing strategies implemented.

User Feedback on Currency Selection Experience

Given a customer completes a purchase in their local currency, when they are prompted to provide feedback about their buying experience, then they should have the opportunity to rate the pricing visibility and selection process for multiple currencies.

Integrating Local Market Insights for Pricing Adjustments

Given the user accesses the market insights dashboard, when they review local economic conditions relevant to their target market, then they should be able to adjust their book pricing strategies accordingly within the platform.

Multi-Currency Reporting Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want to see my sales data in multiple currencies, so I can analyze performance across different markets and adjust my strategies accordingly.
Description: The Multi-Currency Reporting Dashboard requirement provides users with analytical tools to view sales reports and key performance indicators across multiple currencies. This feature will aggregate sales data, allowing publishers to analyze trends and performance metrics effectively in real-time. By offering insights into revenue generated in various currencies, users can make informed decisions about pricing, marketing strategies, and future investments in different regions.
Acceptance Criteria: As a publisher, I want to access the Multi-Currency Reporting Dashboard to view sales data in my preferred currency so that I can analyze performance for each market effectively.

Given that I am logged into BookShelfHub, when I navigate to the Multi-Currency Reporting Dashboard, then I should be able to select a currency from a dropdown menu and see all associated sales data displayed in that currency.

As a publisher, I need to compare sales trends over the last quarter using different currencies to make informed marketing decisions.

Given that I have selected a specific time frame on the Multi-Currency Reporting Dashboard, when I retrieve the sales report, then I should see a comparison chart that shows sales trends across multiple currencies for that period.

As an author, I want to review my royalty statements in different currencies to understand my earnings from various regions better.

Given that I am viewing my royalty reports on the Multi-Currency Reporting Dashboard, when I filter the report by specific currencies, then I should see the detailed earnings for each currency separately displayed along with total earnings.

As a user, I want to receive alerts for discrepancies in currency conversion rates affecting my sales data.

Given that there are significant changes in currency exchange rates, when I access the Multi-Currency Reporting Dashboard, then I should receive a notification alert indicating any discrepancies that might impact my report accuracy.

As a marketing manager, I want to generate custom reports based on regional sales performance to adjust our marketing strategy accordingly.

Given that I am using the Multi-Currency Reporting Dashboard, when I create a custom report based on region and currency, then the system should generate a report detailing sales performance in the selected parameters.

Currency Selection Menu

User Story: As a customer, I want to be able to select my currency during the checkout process, so that I can see exact amounts and make informed purchasing decisions.
Description: The Currency Selection Menu requirement allows customers to choose their preferred currency from a dropdown list before making a purchase. This menu will improve the user experience by providing a straightforward way for customers to see product prices in their desired currency, enhancing usability and satisfaction. By easing the purchasing process, this feature can potentially reduce cart abandonment rates and encourage more international sales.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects a preferred currency from the dropdown menu on the product page before adding an item to the cart.

Given the dropdown menu is visible, when the user selects a currency from the list, then the product prices displayed on the page should update to reflect the selected currency accurately.

Customers from different countries navigate to the site and interact with the Currency Selection Menu.

Given an international user accesses the page, when they click on the Currency Selection Menu, then the menu should display a list of currencies relevant to the user's locale.

A user tests the Currency Selection Menu functionality during the checkout process.

Given the user has selected a currency, when they proceed to checkout, then the total cost should reflect the selected currency and be consistent with the displayed prices on the product page.

A user reselects a different currency after selecting one previously.

Given the user has already selected a currency, when they choose a new currency from the dropdown, then all displayed prices should update immediately to the new currency without requiring a page refresh.

The Currency Selection Menu is displayed on all relevant product pages.

Given the user visits any product page, when they look for the Currency Selection Menu, then the menu should be visible and accessible at the top of the page.

Users with different default currencies complete a purchase transaction without issues.

Given a user has selected a currency, when they complete a transaction, then the payment should process correctly without errors related to currency conversion.

The Currency Selection Menu includes at least 5 different currencies to choose from.

Given the Currency Selection Menu is open, when the user views the list of available currencies, then the menu should display at least 5 distinct currencies for the user to select from.

Integration with Payment Gateways

User Story: As a buyer, I want to be able to pay for my books in my local currency using different payment methods, so that I have flexibility and security during my transaction.
Description: The Integration with Payment Gateways requirement ensures that the Multi-Currency Pricing Tool is compatible with various international payment processors, allowing seamless transactions in different currencies. This integration is vital for reducing payment errors, improving user trust, and ensuring successful transactions. By supporting multiple payment options, this feature can cater to a diverse global customer base and enhance overall customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: User successfully processes a payment using a credit card in their local currency during checkout.

Given the user is on the checkout page, when they select a currency from the Multi-Currency Pricing Tool and enter valid credit card details, then the transaction should be processed successfully without errors and the user should receive a confirmation notification in their chosen currency.

User attempts to complete a payment using a PayPal account in a different currency than the one set for the book pricing.

Given the user is logged into their PayPal account and has selected a different currency during checkout, when they click the pay button, then the system should prompt them to confirm the currency conversion fees before proceeding with the transaction.

An admin user changes the pricing of a book in multiple currencies after a currency conversion rate update.

Given the admin user is in the Multi-Currency Pricing Tool, when they update the pricing for a specific book in all supported currencies, then the system must reflect the updated prices in real-time on the public-facing site within 5 minutes.

User checks their order history and views transactions processed in their local currency.

Given the user has completed several transactions in their local currency, when they navigate to their order history page, then the displayed transactions should show the appropriate amounts in their local currency along with the corresponding conversion rates used at the time of purchase.

System compatibility check with multiple payment gateways.

Given the development team integrates a new payment gateway, when they run the automated testing suite, then the tests must verify successful transactions are processed for at least 95% of supported currencies without failures.

Author Journey Map

An interactive visual roadmap guiding authors through the onboarding process step-by-step. This feature helps users understand their current position, available resources, and the next steps, making their transition into using BookShelfHub seamless and intuitive.

Requirements

Interactive Milestones

User Story: As an author, I want to see visual milestones in my onboarding journey so that I can track my progress and understand what steps I need to complete next.
Description: The Interactive Milestones requirement involves creating visual checkpoints within the Author Journey Map that clearly delineate critical stages in the onboarding process for authors. This feature will provide authors with tangible goals to aim for, aiding in their navigation through the platform. The visual representation will enhance engagement and motivation, making it easier for authors to track their progress, access needed resources, and remain aligned with their publishing goals. Implementation will require integration with project management functionalities to capture real-time data and facilitate communication among authors and support staff.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors can view the Author Journey Map upon signing into BookShelfHub for the first time.

Given an author has signed into BookShelfHub for the first time, when they navigate to the Author Journey Map, then they should see a visual roadmap displaying all interactive milestones clearly labeled and accessible.

Authors can track their progress through the onboarding process via the Interactive Milestones feature.

Given an author is engaged with the Author Journey Map, when they complete a milestone, then the relevant milestone should visually update to reflect completion and offer them appropriate next steps.

Authors can access resources directly from the Interactive Milestones in the Author Journey Map.

Given an author is viewing a specific milestone, when they click on the associated resources link, then they should be redirected to the relevant resource or support documentation without errors.

The Author Journey Map integrates real-time data from the project management functionalities.

Given an author is using the Author Journey Map, when they refresh the page, then the milestones should reflect the latest progress data from the project management tool, ensuring accuracy.

All interactive elements within the Author Journey Map are user-friendly and intuitive.

Given an author is using the Author Journey Map, when they interact with any element (e.g., clicking on milestones, accessing resources), then they should experience no more than one mistake for every ten interactions recorded during user testing.

Authors receive timely notifications regarding milestone updates in the Author Journey Map.

Given an author has completed a milestone, when they check their notifications, then they should receive a notification detailing the completion and what next actions are required.

The visual design of the Author Journey Map is engaging and motivating for authors.

Given an author is viewing the Author Journey Map, when they provide feedback during user testing, then at least 80% of authors should indicate that the design is visually appealing and enhances their motivation to complete the onboarding process.

Resource Hub Integration

User Story: As an author, I want to access a resource hub during the onboarding process so that I can find helpful materials and guidance whenever I encounter difficulties.
Description: The Resource Hub Integration requirement mandates the establishment of a centralized repository of resources that authors can access throughout the onboarding journey. This hub will include links to tutorials, FAQs, and best practices tailored to various stages of the publishing process. By providing context-sensitive resources linked to each milestone, authors can obtain immediate assistance and insights that enhance their understanding and workflow. This requirement is crucial for minimizing confusion and maximizing the platform's usability for new authors.
Acceptance Criteria: Navigating the Resource Hub during Onboarding

Given an author is onboarding and accesses the Author Journey Map, When the author clicks on the Resource Hub link at each milestone, Then they should be redirected to the relevant resources for that stage, including tutorials, FAQs, and best practices.

Accessing Context-Sensitive Resources

Given an author is at the 'Submitting Manuscript' milestone, When they open the Resource Hub, Then they should see a curated list of resources specifically related to manuscript submission and formatting guidelines.

Searching for Specific Resources in the Hub

Given an author is looking for a specific tutorial on cover design, When they use the search function in the Resource Hub, Then they should receive relevant results that link directly to tutorials regarding cover design.

Evaluating Resource Hub Content Relevance

Given the Resource Hub contains various resources, When the authors utilize the resources across different milestones, Then there should be a feedback mechanism to assess the usefulness of each resource provided.

Ensuring Resource Hub Availability

Given the requirement for 24/7 access, When an author logs into the platform at any time, Then the Resource Hub should be accessible without downtime or technical errors.

Tracking Resource Utilization by Authors

Given the authors are engaging with the Resource Hub, When the feature is used over a month, Then there should be analytics generated that track which resources are accessed most frequently and at which stages.

Updating Resource Hub Content Regularly

Given the rapidly changing nature of publishing, When new resources are created or existing ones are updated, Then the Resource Hub should be revised within two weeks to keep the content current and relevant.

Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As an author, I want to give feedback on my onboarding experience so that my suggestions can help improve the platform for future users.
Description: The Feedback Mechanism requirement encompasses the creation of an interactive feedback feature that allows authors to share their experiences and suggestions regarding the onboarding process. This feature will enable authors to provide insights through surveys or quick feedback forms after completing each milestone. The collected data will be crucial for continuous improvement of the Author Journey Map and the overall user experience in BookShelfHub. Facilitating open communication channels ensures that the platform evolves to meet user needs effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: Author submits feedback after completing an onboarding milestone in BookShelfHub.

Given the author has completed a milestone in the Author Journey Map, when they are prompted to provide feedback, then they should be able to fill out a feedback form or survey that captures their experience and suggestions.

Review of feedback submissions by the BookShelfHub development team.

Given the feedback has been submitted by the author, when the feedback is collected and analyzed, then the development team should be able to categorize the feedback into actionable insights for improvement.

Author receives confirmation of feedback submission.

Given the author has successfully submitted feedback, when they finish the feedback process, then they should receive a confirmation message indicating their feedback was received successfully.

Availability of feedback forms after every milestone completion.

Given an author completes any onboarding milestone, when the milestone ends, then a feedback form should be automatically presented to the author for completion.

Feedback mechanism integrates into the existing Author Journey Map feature without issues.

Given the feedback mechanism has been developed, when it is integrated into the Author Journey Map, then it should not disrupt any existing functionality of the onboarding process.

Dashboard for tracking feedback trends is accessible to administrators.

Given that feedback has been collected for a period, when an administrator accesses the feedback dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of feedback trends and common themes.

Responsive design for feedback forms across different devices.

Given that authors may access BookShelfHub from various devices, when they open the feedback form, then it should display correctly and function properly on mobile, tablet, and desktop devices.

Onboarding Progress Tracker

User Story: As an author, I want a progress tracker that shows my onboarding completion percentage so that I can easily see how far along I am and what’s left to do.
Description: The Onboarding Progress Tracker requirement establishes a visual representation of an author's progress throughout the onboarding journey. This interactive tracker will display completed milestones, current tasks, and upcoming steps, enabling authors to have a comprehensive overview of their status. By providing a clear and continuous perspective on progress, authors will feel more in control of their journey, enhancing their user experience within BookShelfHub. This requirement is integral in supporting author engagement and satisfaction during the onboarding phase.
Acceptance Criteria: Author completes registration and accesses the Author Journey Map for the first time.

Given the author has registered, when they log in for the first time, then they should see the Author Journey Map with an overview of onboarding steps and progress indicators displayed.

Author reaches a milestone in the onboarding process after completing the necessary tasks.

Given the author has completed a task, when they revisit the Author Journey Map, then the completed milestone should visually update to indicate progress and provide feedback on the next steps.

Author requests additional resources from within the onboarding progress tracker.

Given the author is viewing the onboarding progress tracker, when they click on the resource request option, then a pop-up should appear allowing them to choose and submit their resource requests successfully.

Author checks their progress on the onboarding tracker after completing several tasks over a week.

Given that several tasks have been completed, when the author looks at the onboarding tracker, then the tracker should reflect accurate progress with clearly marked completed and upcoming tasks.

Author encounters an error while trying to navigate the onboarding progress tracker.

Given an author is using the onboarding progress tracker, when they attempt to access the next steps, then they should be able to report the error through a feedback option without losing their progress.

Author receives a summary of their onboarding progress via email after the first week.

Given the author has completed at least one task, when the week is over, then an email summary should be sent containing their progress, completed milestones, and tips for the next steps in onboarding.

Author interacts with the progress tracker for guidance on using BookShelfHub features.

Given the author is engaged with the onboarding progress tracker, when they click on any milestone, then a detailed explanation or tutorial should be displayed explaining how to use the related feature in BookShelfHub.

Personalized Guidance Notifications

User Story: As an author, I want to receive personalized notifications about my onboarding tasks so that I can stay on track without missing important steps.
Description: The Personalized Guidance Notifications requirement involves the development of an alert system that sends tailored prompts and reminders to authors about upcoming tasks, deadlines, and available resources throughout their onboarding experience. By leveraging authors' input and progress data, this feature will ensure that users remain informed and motivated, ultimately streamlining their journey. It will help reduce oversight and reinforce engagement without overwhelming users with unnecessary communications.
Acceptance Criteria: Author receives personalized guidance notifications based on their onboarding progress.

Given an author is at the beginning of the onboarding process, when they log into BookShelfHub, then they should receive a notification with a checklist of essential tasks to complete over the next week.

Timely reminders are sent for upcoming deadlines related to the onboarding process.

Given an author has an upcoming task due in two days, when the system checks for pending tasks, then it should send a reminder notification to the author 48 hours before the deadline.

Authors are informed about available resources that can assist them during onboarding.

Given an author has completed the initial setup, when they log into the platform, then they should receive a notification with links to relevant resources and tutorials to aid in their next steps.

The notification system adapts based on the author's previous engagement and feedback.

Given an author has interacted with specific types of resources previously, when the system generates a notification, then it should prioritize and recommend similar resources based on the author's past behavior.

Authors can provide feedback on the effectiveness of received notifications.

Given an author has received notifications for one week, when they access the feedback form, then they should be able to rate the usefulness of the notifications on a scale of 1-5.

The system tracks the engagement rates of the notifications sent to authors.

Given the notifications are sent, when the system analyzes the author engagement metrics, then it should report on the open and click-through rates of the notifications after one month.

Notifications can be personalized based on the author's genre or specific area of interest.

Given an author selects their preferred genres during onboarding, when the system sends notifications, then it should include resources and tasks relevant to the selected genres.

Collaborative Author Community

User Story: As an author, I want to connect with other authors during my onboarding so that I can share experiences and learn from each other’s journeys.
Description: The Collaborative Author Community requirement aims to foster a community space within the platform where authors can connect, share experiences, and seek advice from peers. This interactive forum or chat function will enhance the onboarding process by building a support network among authors, allowing for shared learning and increased satisfaction throughout the journey. Facilitating peer support encourages collaboration and can lead to better outcomes for independent authors navigating the publishing landscape.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors can access the Collaborative Author Community from their dashboard after completing the onboarding process.

Given the author is logged in, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see a visible 'Collaborative Author Community' link that redirects to the community page.

Authors can create a new discussion thread within the Collaborative Author Community.

Given the author is on the community page, when they click the 'Start a New Thread' button and submit a new topic, then the new thread should appear in the community forum with the author's name attached.

Authors can respond to existing discussion threads in the Collaborative Author Community.

Given the author is viewing a discussion thread, when they enter a response and submit it, then their response should immediately display below the original post in chronological order.

Authors can report inappropriate content within the Collaborative Author Community.

Given the author is viewing a discussion thread or comment, when they click the 'Report' button and submit a report, then a confirmation message should appear, and the report should be logged in the system.

Authors can search for specific topics or keywords within the Collaborative Author Community.

Given the author is on the community page, when they enter a keyword in the search bar and press 'Search', then the results should display all related discussions and posts containing the keyword.

Authors receive notifications for responses to their discussion threads.

Given the author has started a discussion thread, when another author replies to their thread, then the author should receive a notification in their account indicating a new response.

Personalized Tutorials

Customized video tutorials tailored to individual author types, providing relevant, focused instruction on how to use specific features of BookShelfHub. These tutorials address common pain points and questions, ensuring each user learns at their own pace and gain confidence in using the platform effectively.

Requirements

Tutorial Personalization Engine

User Story: As an author, I want personalized video tutorials that cater to my specific needs so that I can learn how to use BookShelfHub effectively without feeling overwhelmed by irrelevant information.
Description: The Tutorial Personalization Engine analyzes user profiles and preferences to create customized video tutorials for each author type. This feature leverages data on user interactions, common queries, and specific challenges faced by different authors to generate tailored instruction that addresses their unique needs. The engine will facilitate a user-friendly experience by allowing authors to select preferences such as tutorial topics, style of learning (visual/auditory), and pacing, ultimately reducing the learning curve and enhancing user satisfaction. This personalization plays a crucial role in increasing user engagement and success in using BookShelfHub's features effectively, leading to higher productivity and reduced support requests.
Acceptance Criteria: As an author, I want to receive personalized video tutorials that match my profile and preferences, so that I can learn how to use BookShelfHub more effectively.

Given a user profile with specified preferences, When the Tutorial Personalization Engine analyzes the profile, Then it generates a customized list of tutorial videos tailored to the user's author type.

As an author, I want the option to select my preferred tutorial format (visual or auditory), so that I can learn in a way that suits my learning style.

Given a preference setting in the user profile, When an author chooses a tutorial format, Then the Tutorial Personalization Engine provides tutorials in the selected format.

As a new user, I want to access introductory tutorials that cover the basics of using BookShelfHub, ensuring I build a strong foundation before diving into advanced features.

Given a new user profile, When the Tutorial Personalization Engine evaluates the profile, Then it suggests introductory tutorials first, followed by more advanced tutorials based on user engagement metrics.

As a returning user, I want to see tutorials that address my recently encountered challenges or questions, ensuring I improve on specific pain points.

Given a returning user profile with recorded questions, When the Tutorial Personalization Engine retrieves data on previous queries, Then it presents relevant tutorials that address those specific issues.

As an author interested in specific marketing strategies, I want personalized tutorials that focus on advanced marketing tools available in BookShelfHub.

Given an author profile indicating interest in marketing strategies, When the user selects marketing as a topic, Then the Tutorial Personalization Engine provides personalized tutorials related to marketing tools and strategies.

As an author, I want the ability to set the speed of the tutorial playback, so I can control how quickly I learn and revisit information as needed.

Given a playback speed option in the tutorial settings, When an author adjusts the speed, Then the tutorial playback reflects this setting accurately during viewing.

Interactive Tutorial Feedback Loop

User Story: As an author, I want to give feedback on the tutorials I watch so that I can help improve the quality of the learning material for myself and others.
Description: The Interactive Tutorial Feedback Loop allows users to provide real-time feedback on the tutorials they engage with. This feature will enable authors to rate tutorials, suggest improvements, and report issues directly within the tutorial interface. The collected feedback will be curated and analyzed to inform future tutorial developments, ensuring that the tutorials remain relevant and effective for all user types. Incorporating a feedback mechanism will facilitate continuous improvement of the tutorial content, empowering users and fostering a sense of community among authors who share their learning experiences and tips.
Acceptance Criteria: User Engagement with Interactive Tutorial Feedback Loop

Given an author is watching a personalized tutorial, when they click on the feedback button, then they should be able to rate the tutorial on a scale of 1 to 5 stars, with an option to leave comments and suggestions.

Submission and Acknowledgment of Feedback

Given an author has submitted feedback on a tutorial, when they submit their rating and comments, then they should receive a confirmation message indicating that their feedback has been successfully recorded and will be reviewed by the tutorial team.

Review of Collected Feedback

Given that multiple users have submitted feedback on tutorials, when the tutorial team accesses the feedback dashboard, then they should be able to view aggregated ratings, read individual comments, and categorize suggestions for improvements.

Real-Time Feedback Analysis for Future Tutorials

Given the tutorial team has analyzed the feedback data collected over a month, when they conduct a meeting to discuss potential tutorial improvements, then they should be able to present actionable insights derived from user feedback.

User Notification of Tutorial Updates

Given that changes have been made to a tutorial based on user feedback, when an author logs in, then they should receive a notification informing them of the updates and improvements made to the tutorials they have previously engaged with.

Feedback Feedback Rate Monitoring

Given the Interactive Tutorial Feedback Loop is live, when the tutorial team checks the feedback metrics, then they should see at least a 30% feedback submission rate within the first three months of launch.

Multi-Language Support for Tutorials

User Story: As a non-native English author, I want to access video tutorials in my preferred language so that I can better understand how to navigate BookShelfHub and its features without language barriers.
Description: Multi-Language Support for Tutorials will accommodate authors from diverse linguistic backgrounds by providing tutorials in multiple languages. This feature will include translating existing content as well as offering subtitles or voiceovers in selected languages, enabling a wider audience to access and benefit from the tutorials. This enhancement will empower non-native English speakers by making the platform more inclusive, thereby fostering a broader user base and enhancing global collaboration among authors. The ultimate goal is to promote diversity and inclusivity while maximizing user engagement across forums and tutorials.
Acceptance Criteria: Multi-Language Support Implementation for Tutorials

Given a user selects their preferred language from a dropdown menu, When they access the tutorial, Then the tutorial content is displayed in the selected language without any errors.

Translation Accuracy Check for Tutorials

Given the tutorial content has been translated, When a bilingual user reviews the tutorial, Then the translated content accurately reflects the original tutorial meaning within 95% accuracy.

Subtitles Availability for Users in Different Languages

Given a tutorial is being played, When the user selects subtitles in their preferred language, Then the subtitles match the spoken content in real-time with no lag.

Voiceover Quality for Multi-Language Tutorials

Given a tutorial has been recorded with voiceovers, When a user listens to the voiceover, Then the audio is clear, professional, and easy to understand in the selected language.

User Feedback Collection on Multi-Language Support

Given the tutorial is accessible in multiple languages, When users complete the tutorial, Then they are prompted to provide feedback on their experience specifically regarding language support and accessibility.

System Performance under Multi-Language Load

Given multiple users are accessing tutorials in different languages simultaneously, When the system is under load, Then the tutorial load times remain under two seconds for all languages offered.

User Testing for Language Preferences in Tutorials

Given a test group consists of users from diverse linguistic backgrounds, When they are asked to use the platform, Then at least 80% of users report satisfaction with the language options available for tutorials.

Progress Tracking within Tutorials

User Story: As an author, I want to track my progress through the tutorials so that I can stay organized and motivated while learning about BookShelfHub.
Description: The Progress Tracking within Tutorials feature will allow users to monitor their learning journey through the personalized tutorials. This entails implementing a system where users can check off completed tutorials, view their learning milestones, and receive recommendations for follow-up content based on their progress. This feature will enable authors to stay organized in their learning path and motivate them to continue engaging with the platform. By gamifying the tutorial experience, it encourages consistent use and fosters a rewarding atmosphere for authors as they achieve their educational goals.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Personalized Tutorials feature for the first time and is presented with a dashboard that displays their current progress and completed tutorials.

Given a new user, when they open the Personalized Tutorials, then they should see a progress dashboard that includes completed tutorials, unfinished tutorials, and overall completion percentage.

An author completes a tutorial and checks it off in their progress tracker.

Given an author has completed a tutorial, when they click the 'Complete' button, then the tutorial should be marked as completed in the progress tracker and the completion date should be recorded.

Users return to the platform after a break and want to see their last completed tutorial and next recommended content.

Given a user who has not interacted with the tutorials for two weeks, when they log back in, then they should see a notification highlighting their last completed tutorial and a recommendation for the next tutorial based on their progress.

Author reviews their milestones and learns how many tutorials are left to complete their personalized learning path.

Given an author is viewing their progress dashboard, when they check their milestones, then they should see a summary of milestones achieved and how many tutorials remain.

An author wants to receive reminders based on their tutorial progress and engagement.

Given an author opts in for progress notifications, when they complete five tutorials, then they should receive a congratulatory email with additional recommended tutorials to keep their learning momentum.

An author is actively using the tutorial system and completes multiple tutorials in one session.

Given an author completes multiple tutorials in a single session, then the system should allow them to see a cumulative progress update reflecting all completed sessions and adjust their recommendations accordingly.

Users want accountability and encouragement to keep their learning on track.

Given a user finishes a tutorial, when they check it off, then they should receive a motivational message and badge for completing that tutorial, enhancing their engagement with the platform.

Video Download Option for Offline Learning

User Story: As an author, I want to download tutorial videos so that I can learn at my own pace, even when I don't have internet access.
Description: The Video Download Option for Offline Learning will enable users to download tutorial videos for offline access, allowing authors to learn on-the-go without relying on an internet connection. This feature is particularly beneficial for users in regions with limited connectivity or for those who prefer to learn in environments without internet access. By offering this option, BookShelfHub will enhance the platform's usability and convenience, promoting a flexible learning experience tailored to individual author schedules and lifestyles.
Acceptance Criteria: User downloads a tutorial video for offline access while traveling in a remote area with limited internet connectivity.

Given the user has selected a tutorial video, when they click on the 'Download' button, then the video should start downloading and be available for offline viewing in the user's library.

User views downloaded tutorial videos while offline in an environment without internet access.

Given the user is offline, when they navigate to their library and select a downloaded video, then the video should play without any buffering or connection errors.

User attempts to download a tutorial video but faces low storage on their device.

Given the user has insufficient storage available, when they click the 'Download' button, then an alert message should inform them of the low storage and prevent the download from initiating.

User wants to manage downloaded videos to free up space.

Given the user is in their library, when they select a downloaded video and choose the 'Delete' option, then the video should be removed from their offline library and storage should be freed.

User accesses a tutorial video from a different device after downloading it on another device.

Given the user has downloaded a video on one device, when they log into BookShelfHub on a different device, then the downloaded videos should be accessible and marked for offline use, provided the user is signed in with the same account.

Best Practices Library

A comprehensive repository of articles, case studies, and tips highlighting successful strategies used by other authors within the platform. This library serves as a valuable resource for new users looking to enhance their publishing process, offering proven techniques and insights to improve their chances of success.

Requirements

Content Categorization

User Story: As a new author, I want to easily find articles and tips related to my genre so that I can apply relevant best practices to my publishing strategy.
Description: This requirement focuses on developing an organized structure for categorizing articles, case studies, and tips in the Best Practices Library. The categorization scheme will include genre, target audience, and publishing strategies, enabling users to easily navigate and find relevant content. This organized approach enhances user experience by saving time and increasing the effectiveness of the library as a resource for users looking to enhance their publishing abilities. The implementation will involve tagging content and creating a user-friendly interface that allows for quick filtering and search capabilities.
Acceptance Criteria: Content is categorized appropriately based on genre, target audience, and publishing strategies.

Given a user in the Best Practices Library, when they filter by genre, then they should see articles relevant to the selected genre.

Users are able to easily navigate through the categorized content.

Given a user browsing the Best Practices Library, when they access the categorization options, then they should be able to navigate to at least 3 different categories without confusion.

The tagging system is implemented for all entries in the Best Practices Library.

Given an article in the Best Practices Library, when viewed, then it must show at least three tags related to genre, target audience, and strategies.

Search functionality is available and returns relevant results based on keywords.

Given a user searching with a keyword in the Best Practices Library, when they submit their search, then they should get results that are directly related to the keyword used.

User feedback on article efficiency is collected and analyzed.

Given a user who views an article, when they submit feedback, then the system should log their response and summarize it in a report for analysis.

An update mechanism for the categorization structure is in place.

Given the need for new categories, when a new category is proposed, then it should be able to be added to the system within 24 hours by an admin.

Users are educated on how to use the categorization and navigation features.

Given a new user accessing the Best Practices Library, when they view the instructional guide, then they should have a clear understanding of how to filter and navigate through categories easily.

Search Functionality

User Story: As an author, I want to search for specific best practices so that I can find targeted advice that applies to my current project.
Description: Implementing a robust search functionality within the Best Practices Library allows users to search for specific topics, authors, and keywords. This capability will enable users to quickly locate relevant content, significantly improving the usability of the feature. Users can filter search results based on categories and relevance, leading to a more effective research process. The search functionality will be integrated with the existing library framework, ensuring seamless user interaction and enhancing the overall experience for users seeking actionable insights.
Acceptance Criteria: User conducts a search in the Best Practices Library using specific keywords related to their publishing concerns.

Given a user is on the Best Practices Library page, When the user enters a keyword in the search bar and clicks the search button, Then relevant articles and resources related to that keyword should be displayed in the search results, sorted by relevance.

User applies filters to narrow down search results in the Best Practices Library.

Given a user has performed a search in the Best Practices Library, When the user selects categories and applies filters, Then the displayed search results should update accordingly to reflect the selected filters.

User searches for articles by a specific author in the Best Practices Library.

Given a user is on the Best Practices Library page, When the user enters an author's name in the search bar and initiates a search, Then only articles written by that author should be displayed in the search results.

User uses advanced search options to locate resources on a specific topic in the Best Practices Library.

Given a user is on the Best Practices Library page, When the user selects advanced search options and inputs a specific topic, Then the system returns a list of articles and case studies that match the specified topic.

User verifies the performance and speed of the search functionality in the Best Practices Library.

Given a user conducts a search in the Best Practices Library, When the search is executed, Then the search results should be returned within 3 seconds, indicating efficient performance.

User encounters no results for a search in the Best Practices Library and receives appropriate feedback.

Given a user performs a search in the Best Practices Library that yields no results, When the user submits the search, Then a user-friendly message should be displayed indicating that no results were found and suggesting alternative keywords.

User accesses the Best Practices Library on a mobile device and uses the search functionality effectively.

Given a user is accessing the Best Practices Library from a mobile device, When the user performs a search using the mobile interface, Then the search results should be displayed responsively and maintain usability across different screen sizes.

User Submission Feature

User Story: As an experienced author, I want to share my successful publishing strategies so that I can help other authors learn from my experiences.
Description: This requirement involves the creation of a feature that allows users to submit their own articles, case studies, or tips to the Best Practices Library. User-generated content will diversify the knowledge base and foster a community of sharing among authors and publishers. This system should include a review mechanism to ensure quality and relevance of the submissions. The inclusion of user-generated content will enhance collaboration and provide fresh insights that can benefit the entire user community.
Acceptance Criteria: User Submission of Articles to the Best Practices Library

Given a registered user is logged into the BookShelfHub platform, when they navigate to the Best Practices Library and select 'Submit an Article', then they must be able to upload their article, fill out the required fields (title, content, category), and submit the article for review.

Review Process for Submitted Articles

Given an article has been submitted for review by a user, when a reviewer accesses the 'Submissions' section of the Best Practices Library, then they must be able to view the article, provide feedback, and approve or reject the submission within 48 hours.

User Notification of Submission Status

Given a user has submitted an article for the Best Practices Library, when the review process is complete, then the user must receive an email notification detailing whether their submission has been accepted or rejected, along with any feedback provided by the reviewer.

Search Functionality in the Best Practices Library

Given the user is on the Best Practices Library page, when they enter a keyword or filter criteria in the search bar, then the system must return relevant articles that match the search parameters within 5 seconds.

User Engagement Metrics for Articles

Given an article in the Best Practices Library, when users interact with the article (views, shares, likes), then these interactions must be tracked and displayed on the article page in real-time.

Accessibility of User-Submitted Articles

Given user-generated articles exist in the Best Practices Library, when users access the library, then all articles must be accessible and viewable on both desktop and mobile devices without any layout issues.

User Feedback System for Articles

Given a user is reading an article in the Best Practices Library, when they click on the 'Provide Feedback' button, then they must be able to submit feedback, which will be collected and displayed anonymously to the community.

Rating and Feedback System

User Story: As a user, I want to rate the content I read so that I can help other users find the most helpful resources.
Description: Introducing a rating and feedback system for articles, case studies, and tips within the Best Practices Library enables users to evaluate the usefulness and quality of the content. This system will help identify the most valuable resources and allow users to contribute their opinions, creating an engaged community. High-rated content can be highlighted for easier accessibility, guiding new users toward the most effective practices. This feedback loop will drive continuous improvements in content quality and relevance.
Acceptance Criteria: User rates an article from the Best Practices Library.

Given a user is viewing an article in the Best Practices Library, when they select a rating (1 to 5 stars) and submit it, then the rating should be recorded successfully and reflect in the average rating displayed for that article.

User provides written feedback on a case study.

Given a user is on the feedback form for a case study, when they enter comments and submit the feedback, then the feedback should be saved and made visible to other users as a part of the case study's comments.

Display top-rated articles in the Best Practices Library.

Given the rating system is functional, when a user accesses the Best Practices Library, then the system should highlight the top 10% of rated articles prominently at the top of the list.

User sees aggregate ratings for all articles in the Best Practices Library.

Given the user is on the Best Practices Library page, when they view any article summary, then they should see the average rating and the number of ratings next to each article.

Admin reviews and moderates feedback submitted by users.

Given an admin is in the moderation section of the platform, when they view user feedback, then they should have options to approve or reject each feedback entry, ensuring only appropriate content is published.

User filters articles based on ratings.

Given a user is in the Best Practices Library, when they use the rating filter to select only articles with a rating of 4 stars and above, then the displayed articles should reflect this rating preference.

User receives notifications for new articles with high ratings added to the library.

Given a user has opted in for notifications, when new articles rated 4 stars or higher are added to the Best Practices Library, then the user should receive an email notification about the new additions.

Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a product owner, I want to see analytics on the usage of the Best Practices Library so that I can make informed decisions regarding content updates and improvements.
Description: Creating an analytics dashboard that tracks user engagement with the Best Practices Library will help identify which articles and tips are most popular and useful. This data will provide insights into user preferences and behavior patterns, allowing the team to curate content more effectively and guide future resource creation. The dashboard will be designed to be intuitive and offer visual representations of data for easy assessment and decision-making.
Acceptance Criteria: As a new user of BookShelfHub, I want to access the Analytics Dashboard to review engagement metrics for the Best Practices Library, so that I can understand which resources are most impactful for my publishing efforts.

Given I am logged into BookShelfHub, When I navigate to the Analytics Dashboard, Then I should see a visual representation of engagement metrics for articles in the Best Practices Library, including views, shares, and average reading time.

As a content curator, I need to filter the engagement data by date range on the Analytics Dashboard, allowing me to analyze trends over specific periods for the Best Practices Library.

Given I am on the Analytics Dashboard, When I apply a date range filter, Then the displayed engagement metrics should update accordingly to reflect only the data within the selected range.

As a marketer, I want to receive weekly summaries of user engagement data from the Analytics Dashboard to track the effectiveness of our content marketing strategies related to the Best Practices Library.

Given I have opted in for summaries, When a week has passed, Then I should receive an email report containing a summary of user engagement metrics from the Analytics Dashboard.

As a user interested in community feedback, I want to see ratings and comments for specific articles in the Best Practices Library on the Analytics Dashboard, so that I can gauge the overall reception of the content.

Given I am viewing article engagement data on the Analytics Dashboard, When I click on a specific article, Then I should see user ratings and comments associated with that article.

As an admin, I want to track the most popular articles in the Best Practices Library through the Analytics Dashboard, so I can identify content that may need to be promoted or updated.

Given I am on the Analytics Dashboard, When I view the popular articles section, Then I should see a ranked list of articles based on engagement metrics like view count and sharing frequency.

As a project manager, I need to ensure the Analytics Dashboard is accessible and usable across different devices, so that all team members can monitor insights while on the go.

Given I access the Analytics Dashboard from a mobile device, When I view the layout, Then the dashboard should be responsive, displaying all engagement data accurately without significant distortion or loss of functionality.

As a data analyst, I want the ability to export engagement data from the Analytics Dashboard for external analysis and reporting purposes.

Given I am on the Analytics Dashboard, When I click on the export data button, Then I should be able to download the engagement metrics in a CSV format.

Interactive Q&A Forum

A dedicated space for new authors to ask questions and receive answers from experienced users, editors, and marketing specialists. This feature fosters a sense of community and support, enabling users to share experiences, troubleshoot issues, and learn from each other’s insights promptly.

Requirements

User Registration and Authentication

User Story: As a new user, I want to register an account and verify my email so that I can securely access the platform and participate in discussions in the Q&A forum.
Description: Implement a robust user registration and authentication system that allows authors, editors, and marketing specialists to create and manage their accounts securely. This feature will include options for email verification, password recovery, and the ability to set user roles. By ensuring a secure onboarding process, the product can foster a safe community environment where users can engage freely. Effective user management will enhance the overall user experience and security while facilitating tailored access to the interactive Q&A forum based on user roles.
Acceptance Criteria: User Registration with Email Verification

Given a new user provides valid registration information and clicks 'Register', when the user receives a verification email and confirms their email address, then their account status should be activated and they can log in to the platform.

User Account Password Recovery

Given a registered user requests to recover their password by entering their email, when the user receives a password reset link and follows the instructions to reset their password, then the user should be able to log in with the new password.

Role-Based Access Control in Q&A Forum

Given a user with the role of 'Author', when they access the Interactive Q&A Forum, then they should have access to post questions and view responses, but not be able to moderate or delete other users' questions and answers.

Secure User Login Process

Given a registered user enters their email and password on the login page, when they provide valid credentials, then they should be successfully logged in and redirected to their dashboard.

Account Lockout After Multiple Failed Login Attempts

Given a user attempts to log in and fails due to incorrect credentials five times in a row, when they try to log in again, then they should be temporarily locked out and instructed to reset their password.

Successful Role Assignment During Registration

Given an admin user registers a new user and assigns a specific role (e.g. Editor), when the registration is completed, then the new user should receive a welcome email and their account should reflect the correct role without needing additional verification.

User Management and Profile Update

Given a logged-in user navigates to their profile settings to update their personal information, when they submit the changes, then their updated information should be reflected on their profile and saved in the system without errors.

Q&A Posting and Response Functionality

User Story: As a new author, I want to post my questions in the forum and receive responses from experienced users, so that I can quickly learn from their insights and avoid common pitfalls.
Description: Develop an interactive Q&A posting and response system that enables users to ask questions, provide answers, and comment on discussions within the forum. This feature will organize questions by categories or tags for easier navigation and allow users to upvote valuable answers, highlighting popular or helpful contributions. This encourages community interaction and knowledge sharing, ultimately enhancing the support system for new authors and enriching their experience on BookShelfHub.
Acceptance Criteria: New author submits a question in the Q&A forum about publishing-related processes and receives responses from other users and experts in a timely manner.

Given a registered user in the Q&A forum, when they submit a question, then their question should be posted in the relevant category and visible to all users, and an acknowledgment message should be displayed confirming submission.

An experienced user replies to a question posted in the Q&A forum, providing a helpful answer.

Given an existing question in the Q&A forum, when an experienced user submits their response, then their answer should appear directly beneath the question with a timestamp and user identification.

Users can upvote helpful answers to enhance visibility in the Q&A forum.

Given a response to a question, when a user clicks the upvote button, then the upvote count for that response should increase by one and reflect the updated total immediately to all users.

Users can categorize their questions using tags to improve searchability within the Q&A forum.

Given a new question submission, when the user adds relevant tags, then the question should be searchable by those tags in the forum's filtering system.

Users can comment on responses to foster further discussion within the Q&A forum.

Given a response to a question, when a user submits a comment, then the comment should appear below the response with a timestamp, enabling additional dialogue around the answer.

Users are notified when someone responds to their question in the Q&A forum.

Given a user who has posted a question, when a response is made to their question, then an email notification should be sent to the user informing them of the response.

Search and Filter Options for Q&A

User Story: As a user, I want to search for specific topics or questions in the forum, so that I can find the most relevant information quickly without sifting through unrelated content.
Description: Integrate advanced search and filter options to allow users to find relevant questions and answers in the forum efficiently. Users should be able to search by keywords, categories, or date ranges to quickly access information valuable to their specific needs. This feature is critical for usability, ensuring that users do not become overwhelmed by information and can navigate the forum easily, increasing engagement and satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: User searches for previously asked questions about marketing strategies in the Interactive Q&A Forum.

Given that the user is on the Interactive Q&A Forum page, when they enter 'marketing strategies' in the search bar and hit 'search', then the results should display all relevant questions and answers concerning marketing strategies without unrelated content.

User filters questions by category in the Interactive Q&A Forum.

Given that the user wants to find questions related to 'Formatting', when they select the 'Formatting' category filter and apply it, then the displayed questions should only include those categorized under 'Formatting'.

User searches for questions posted within the last month in the Interactive Q&A Forum.

Given that the user needs access to the most recent content, when they set the date filter to 'Last Month' and initiate the search, then all questions posted within that timeframe should be presented in the results with no older questions included.

User utilizes multiple filters to narrow down the questions in the Interactive Q&A Forum.

Given that the user wants to refine their search, when they apply a keyword 'editing' and select the 'Technical' category simultaneously, then the results should only show questions that contain the keyword 'editing' within the 'Technical' category.

User looks for questions based on a specific keyword that returns no results.

Given that the user searches for a keyword 'xyzabc' that has not been used in any questions, when they click 'search', then a message should display stating 'No results found' with suggestions to adjust the search criteria.

User interacts with the filter options to sort questions by the most recent.

Given that the user wants to see the latest activity, when they click the 'Sort by Date' option, then the questions should reorder to display the most recently answered questions at the top of the list.

User Notification System

User Story: As a user, I want to receive notifications when someone responds to my question in the forum, so that I can stay engaged and continue the conversation.
Description: Create a user notification system that alerts users of responses to their questions, comments on their posts, and new activity in the forum that may interest them. This feature promotes user engagement by encouraging continuous interaction and keeping users informed about ongoing discussions. Notifications can be sent via in-app alerts and email, ensuring users remain connected to the community.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives notification of a response to their question in the forum.

Given a user posts a question in the forum, when another user responds to the question, then the original poster receives an in-app notification and an email alerting them of the response.

User receives notification for comments on their posts.

Given a user creates a post in the forum, when a user comments on that post, then the original poster receives an in-app notification and an email notification about the new comment.

User is alerted to new activities in the forum that match their interests.

Given a user has set preferences for topics of interest, when a new post is created in those topics, then the user receives an in-app notification and an email alert regarding the new post.

User is notified when they are tagged in a forum discussion.

Given a user is tagged in a forum thread by another user, when the tagging occurs, then the tagged user receives an in-app notification and an email notification of the mention.

User can manage their notification preferences.

Given a user accesses their account settings, when they update their notification preferences, then the system reflects those changes immediately, and notifications are sent based on the updated preferences.

User receives a summary of forum activities weekly.

Given a user prefers to receive weekly summaries, when the week ends, then the user receives an email containing a summary of the week's activities in the forum related to their interests.

User can opt-out of email notifications.

Given a user wishes to stop receiving email notifications, when they opt-out in their notification settings, then they should no longer receive email notifications while still being able to receive in-app alerts.

Moderation and Reporting Tools

User Story: As an editor, I want to have the tools to moderate posts in the forum, so that I can maintain a professional and welcoming environment for all users.
Description: Introduce moderation tools that allow editors and community managers to monitor Q&A interactions, manage user-generated content, and deal with inappropriate or spammy posts. This feature includes user reporting options and guidelines for acceptable use, promoting a safe and respectful environment within the forum. Effective moderation ensures high-quality content and supports a healthy community culture.
Acceptance Criteria: Moderators will be able to view all user interactions within the Q&A forum to ensure compliance with community guidelines and identify potential issues before they escalate.

Given a logged-in moderator, When they access the Q&A moderation dashboard, Then they should see a list of all posts and comments, including user details and timestamps, with filters for flagged content.

Editors can easily remove any inappropriate content from the forum and provide feedback to the user who posted it.

Given a logged-in editor, When they choose to delete a post, Then the post should be removed from the forum and an optional message should be sent to the user explaining the removal reason.

Users should have the ability to report inappropriate behavior or content in the forum, allowing the community to self-regulate effectively.

Given a logged-in user, When they click the 'Report' button on a post or comment, Then a confirmation message should appear, and the report should be logged in the moderation queue for review.

The platform must allow community managers to set clear guidelines for acceptable use, which users can readily access while participating in the forum.

Given a community manager, When they update the acceptable use policy, Then the updated guidelines should automatically reflect on the user interface and be easily accessible from the Q&A section.

Regular training sessions for moderators and editors will be conducted to ensure they are aware of all moderation tools and best practices.

Given a schedule for training sessions, When a session occurs, Then at least 80% of designated moderators and editors should attend to be trained on new features and guidelines.

Feedback mechanisms should be integrated to allow users to provide input on moderation actions taken in the forum, fostering transparency and trust within the community.

Given a logged-in user, When they receive feedback on a reported post, Then they should be able to rate the response as helpful or unhelpful, contributing to a continuous feedback loop.

Onboarding Checklist

A step-by-step checklist that guides authors through the essential tasks they need to complete to set up their accounts and start publishing. This checklist ensures that all necessary actions are taken, reducing confusion and enhancing the overall onboarding experience.

Requirements

Interactive Onboarding Checklist

User Story: As an independent author, I want an interactive checklist to guide me through account setup so that I can get started with publishing quickly and without confusion.
Description: The Interactive Onboarding Checklist is a user-friendly guide designed to take authors through each essential task required for setting up their accounts. It integrates seamlessly with BookShelfHub, allowing authors to track their progress visually as they complete each step. This feature not only simplifies the onboarding process but also enhances user engagement and satisfaction by providing real-time feedback and support. By ensuring that all necessary actions are completed, the checklist reduces confusion and accelerates the authors' journey to publishing, ultimately resulting in higher user retention and satisfaction rates.
Acceptance Criteria: Author navigates to the Interactive Onboarding Checklist after creating their BookShelfHub account.

Given an author has logged into their BookShelfHub account, when they click on the 'Onboarding Checklist' button, then they should be directed to the Interactive Onboarding Checklist page displaying all essential tasks and their statuses.

Author completes the first step of the Interactive Onboarding Checklist.

Given an author is on the Interactive Onboarding Checklist page, when they complete the first step, then the completed step should visually update with a checkmark and the overall progress bar should increase accordingly.

Author receives real-time feedback upon completing a task in the checklist.

Given an author completes a task in the Interactive Onboarding Checklist, when they mark the task as complete, then a confirmation message should appear stating 'Task completed successfully!' to provide real-time feedback to the user.

Author can revisit and redo tasks from the Interactive Onboarding Checklist at any time.

Given an author has completed tasks in the Interactive Onboarding Checklist, when they click on a completed task, then they should have the option to reset the task and redo it, which should return the task to the 'incomplete' state.

Last task in the checklist indicates successful onboarding for the author.

Given an author has completed all tasks in the Interactive Onboarding Checklist, when they view the checklist, then the last task should display a message 'Congratulations! You have completed the onboarding process!' and an option to start publishing should be visible.

Interactive Onboarding Checklist is integrated with user analytics to track author engagement.

Given the Interactive Onboarding Checklist is being used, when an author engages with the checklist, then the system should record the time taken to complete each task and provide analytics on user engagement for admin review.

Checklist UI adjusts for accessibility options after user settings are configured.

Given the user has configured accessibility options in their profile settings, when they navigate to the Interactive Onboarding Checklist, then the checklist should display text in larger font and high contrast colors to meet accessibility standards.

Progress Tracking Feature

User Story: As an author, I want to see my progress on the onboarding checklist so that I can stay motivated and know what tasks I have left to complete.
Description: The Progress Tracking Feature enables authors to monitor their completion status on the onboarding checklist. By visually displaying their progress, this feature provides authors with clarity on what tasks are completed and what still needs to be done. Integrating this functionality within BookShelfHub promotes a sense of accomplishment, encourages authors to finish the onboarding process, and helps reduce any friction that may occur during the initial setup. The feature also allows authors to identify areas where they may need additional support or resources, ultimately enhancing the onboarding experience.
Acceptance Criteria: Author accesses the onboarding checklist for the first time after creating an account.

Given the author is on the onboarding checklist page, When they view the checklist, Then the progress tracker should display 0% completion for all tasks initially.

Author completes a task on the onboarding checklist.

Given the author has completed a task, When they mark it as done, Then the progress tracker should update to reflect the task as completed and the overall progress percentage should increase accordingly.

Author revisits the onboarding checklist after completing some tasks.

Given the author returns to the onboarding checklist, When they view their progress, Then the progress tracker should accurately show the number of completed tasks and the percentage of overall checklist completion.

Author seeks assistance for an incomplete onboarding task.

Given the author identifies a task they are struggling with, When they click on 'Need Help' next to the task, Then an assistance dialog should appear offering relevant resources and support links.

Author shares their progress with an editor or collaborator during the onboarding process.

Given the author wants to share their progress, When they click 'Share Progress', Then a sharing option should be presented that allows them to generate a link to share their progress with others.

System tracks and logs changes made to the onboarding checklist by the author.

Given the author modifies the checklist by completing or unchecking a task, When the modification occurs, Then the system should log the changes in a history section for the author to review later.

Task-specific Resource Links

User Story: As an author, I want direct links to resources for each checklist task so that I can easily find help and complete my setup without frustration.
Description: Task-specific Resource Links provide authors with easy access to relevant materials, tutorials, and support documentation for each step of the onboarding checklist. This feature is crucial for enhancing the onboarding experience, as it directly addresses authors' questions and facilitates their understanding of the required tasks. By integrating contextual support within the checklist, BookShelfHub empowers authors to complete setup tasks more efficiently and confidently, leading to a smoother transition to using the platform.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Onboarding Checklist for the first time after creating an account.

Given that the user is on the Onboarding Checklist page, when they view each task, then they should see task-specific resource links directly below each checklist item that are relevant to the task.

User clicks on a task-specific resource link in the Onboarding Checklist.

Given that the user is on a task with an associated resource link, when they click the link, then they should be redirected to the relevant tutorial or support documentation without any errors.

User completes a task in the Onboarding Checklist and accesses associated resource links.

Given that the user has completed a task in the checklist, when they return to the checklist, then the task-specific resource link should indicate that it has been viewed or accessed.

User encounters an error while trying to access a task-specific resource link.

Given that the user clicks on a task-specific resource link and encounters an error, when they report the issue, then there should be a clear support mechanism or contact option available immediately after the error is displayed.

User completes the entire Onboarding Checklist and reviews task-specific resource links.

Given that the user has completed all tasks in the checklist, when they review task-specific resource links, then they should see a summary of resources utilized and additional recommended resources based on the tasks completed.

User Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As a user, I want to provide feedback on my onboarding experience so that my insights can help improve the process for future users.
Description: The User Feedback Mechanism gathers insights from authors about their onboarding experience, directly through the checklist interface. This feature allows users to submit feedback on the clarity of each task and the overall onboarding experience, which can inform future enhancements to the checklist. By incorporating user feedback, BookShelfHub can continually refine the onboarding process and ensure that it meets the evolving needs of authors, fostering a sense of community and involvement.
Acceptance Criteria: User submits feedback on the clarity of tasks in the onboarding checklist after completing the first five tasks.

Given the user has completed five tasks in the onboarding checklist, when the user submits feedback, then the feedback should be collected and stored in the system with a timestamp.

User navigates to the feedback section within the onboarding checklist interface.

Given the user is on the onboarding checklist page, when the user clicks on the feedback button, then the feedback form should open, allowing the user to enter comments and ratings.

User rates their overall onboarding experience using a star rating system after completing the checklist.

Given the user has completed the onboarding checklist, when the user selects a star rating and submits the feedback, then the rating should be saved and reflected in the user account feedback history.

Admin reviews the collected feedback to identify common issues with the onboarding checklist.

Given the admin accesses the feedback review dashboard, when the admin filters feedback by date range, then the system should display all submitted feedback for that period, sorted by task clarity ratings.

User wants to edit their submitted feedback on the onboarding checklist.

Given the user has previously submitted feedback, when the user clicks the edit button next to their feedback, then the user should be able to modify the existing comments and resubmit them.

User receives a confirmation message after submitting feedback on the onboarding checklist.

Given the user has submitted feedback, when the submission is successful, then the user should see a confirmation message indicating that their feedback has been received.

Mobile-Friendly Design

User Story: As an author, I want the onboarding checklist to be mobile-friendly so that I can complete my setup tasks anytime and anywhere, without being tied to my computer.
Description: The Mobile-Friendly Design ensures that the onboarding checklist is fully responsive and accessible on various devices, including smartphones and tablets. This requirement addresses the need for flexibility, allowing authors to complete their onboarding tasks at their convenience, regardless of their location. A mobile-friendly interface enhances user experience, accommodates a wider range of users, and aligns with contemporary digital usage trends, supporting authors in their publishing journey effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the onboarding checklist on a smartphone while sitting in a cafe to complete their account setup tasks.

Given the user is on the onboarding checklist page on a smartphone, when they scroll down the checklist, then all items should be visible without horizontal scrolling and display correctly without overlapping.

An author updates their account information using a tablet while traveling.

Given the user is using a tablet to access their account settings, when they input and save changes, then the updates should reflect immediately across all devices without requiring a page refresh.

A new author attempts to navigate the onboarding checklist on a variety of mobile devices during their onboarding process.

Given the onboarding checklist is opened on different screen sizes (mobile phones and tablets), when the checklist is displayed, then it must maintain a consistent layout and functionality across all devices and orientations.

An author wants to check off completed tasks on the onboarding checklist while using their mobile device.

Given an author is using a mobile device, when they check off a completed task, then the checklist should visually indicate the task as completed and save the state without delay or errors.

An author is receiving a notification prompt on their mobile device during the onboarding process.

Given an author is using the onboarding checklist on a mobile device, when they have completed the checklist, then a prompt should appear encouraging them to proceed to the next step in the setup process.

A user engages with the onboarding checklist link shared via email on their mobile.

Given the user receives an email with a link to the onboarding checklist, when they click on the link using a mobile device, then they should be redirected to the onboarding checklist without any errors or loading issues.

An author reviews the onboarding checklist after completing a few tasks on different devices.

Given the author has completed tasks on a mobile device, when they log in on a different device, then the previously completed tasks should be reflected accurately in the onboarding checklist, maintaining the user's progress.

Personalized Onboarding Experience

User Story: As an experienced author, I want a personalized onboarding checklist that reflects my background so that I can skip over irrelevant tasks and focus on what’s important for my publishing goals.
Description: The Personalized Onboarding Experience tailors the onboarding checklist based on the specific needs and preferences of different authors. By allowing authors to customize their checklist according to their genre, experience level, or specific goals, this feature enhances user satisfaction and relevance. It ensures that authors are not overwhelmed with unnecessary tasks and can focus only on what matters to them in their publishing journey, ultimately improving their engagement with the platform.
Acceptance Criteria: New author registers on BookShelfHub and is presented with the onboarding checklist tailored to their selected genre and experience level.

Given an author selects their genre and experience level during registration, when they access their onboarding checklist, then the checklist must only include tasks relevant to the selected genre and experience level.

An author revisits their onboarding checklist to update their preferences after initially completing their profile.

Given an author has completed the onboarding checklist, when they update their genre or experience level in their profile settings, then the onboarding checklist must dynamically reflect these updates by updating the task list accordingly.

Authors with different experience levels (beginner, intermediate, advanced) interact with their onboarding checklist after signing up.

Given an author with a beginner experience level accesses their onboarding checklist, when they view their checklist, then it must show foundational tasks suitable for beginners, while an advanced author sees more complex tasks tailored to their expertise.

An author wants to skip tasks in the onboarding checklist that they feel are unnecessary.

Given an author is presented with their onboarding checklist, when they choose to skip a task, then that task must no longer appear in their checklist, and they should be able to revert this action if needed.

An author who completed their onboarding checklist checks for additional resources and guidance provided by BookShelfHub.

Given an author has completed all items in their onboarding checklist, when they navigate to the resources section, then they must see tailored resources related to their selected genre and experience level to aid their publishing journey.

The onboarding checklist must function seamlessly across different devices (desktop, tablet, and mobile).

Given an author accesses their onboarding checklist from different devices, when they view the checklist on any device, then it must maintain its structure, tasks, and usability without loss of functionality.

An author receives feedback on the onboarding process to improve the checklist's effectiveness over time.

Given an author completes the onboarding checklist, when they provide feedback through a survey, then the feedback must be recorded and analyzed for potential updates to improve the onboarding experience.

Feedback Loop System

A built-in mechanism that allows new authors to provide feedback on their onboarding experience. This feature helps identify pain points and areas for improvement, allowing BookShelfHub to continuously adapt the onboarding process to better meet user needs.

Requirements

Anonymous Feedback Submission

User Story: As a new author, I want to provide feedback anonymously about my onboarding experience so that I can share my honest opinions without the fear of being identified or judged.
Description: The Feedback Loop System should allow new authors to submit their onboarding experience feedback anonymously. This functionality is vital as it encourages authors to share their honest opinions and experiences without the fear of identification. By integrating an anonymous feedback submission feature, BookShelfHub can gather more candid insights on the onboarding process, enabling continuous improvement in user experience and increased acceptance among new authors. This will ultimately lead to a more effective onboarding process by identifying genuine pain points, thereby enhancing overall user satisfaction and retention.
Acceptance Criteria: New author logs into BookShelfHub for the first time and navigates to the onboarding feedback section to provide their anonymous feedback.

Given the new author has completed the onboarding process, When they access the feedback section, Then they should see an option to submit feedback anonymously without providing any personal information.

A new author submits their feedback through the anonymous submission form within the Feedback Loop System.

Given the feedback form is filled out by the new author, When they click the submit button, Then their feedback should be recorded in the system without revealing their identity or any personal details.

The system captures feedback from multiple new authors anonymously to analyze trends and common issues in the onboarding process.

Given multiple new authors have submitted feedback anonymously, When the administrator views the feedback analytics dashboard, Then it should display a summary of feedback themes, trends, and identified pain points.

An author attempts to submit feedback without completing all necessary fields in the feedback form.

Given the author has not filled in all mandatory fields, When they try to submit the feedback, Then they should receive an error message indicating which fields need to be completed before submission.

A new author re-visits the feedback section after submitting their feedback to check if it was successfully recorded.

Given the author previously submitted feedback, When they access the feedback section again, Then there should be an indication that their feedback has been successfully submitted and recorded.

An administrator reviews the overall effectiveness of the Feedback Loop System based on the submitted anonymous feedback over a specific period.

Given a defined time frame has passed since the establishment of the Feedback Loop System, When the administrator generates a report on feedback trends, Then the report should highlight actionable insights and improvements made to the onboarding process based on the feedback received.

Real-Time Feedback Dashboard

User Story: As a team member, I want to access a real-time feedback dashboard so that I can monitor new authors' feedback and quickly identify areas needing attention or improvement.
Description: Develop a real-time feedback dashboard that collates and visualizes feedback provided by new authors. This dashboard should display key metrics such as common pain points, frequently mentioned suggestions, and author satisfaction scores. By having a centralized location for analyzing feedback, the BookShelfHub team can prioritize issues requiring immediate attention and track the effectiveness of implemented changes over time. This feature will bolster the decision-making process through data-driven insights, ultimately leading to a more responsive and adaptive onboarding experience.
Acceptance Criteria: As a new author onboarding to BookShelfHub, I want to be able to view a real-time feedback dashboard that aggregates my feedback about the onboarding experience so that I can understand if my issues are being recognized and addressed by the team.

Given I have provided feedback during the onboarding process, when I access the real-time feedback dashboard, then I should see my feedback reflected accurately in the dashboard metrics within 5 minutes of submission.

As a project manager for BookShelfHub, I want to analyze the feedback collected from new authors so that I can identify common pain points and frequently mentioned suggestions in order to improve the onboarding experience.

Given a collection of feedback has been submitted, when I access the feedback analysis section of the dashboard, then I should be able to view at least 3 common pain points and 3 frequently mentioned suggestions displayed visually in a chart format.

As a usability tester for BookShelfHub, I want to ensure that the author satisfaction scores are updated in real-time as new feedback is submitted so that we can track trends in author satisfaction.

Given new feedback has been submitted, when I check the author satisfaction score on the dashboard, then the score should automatically update to reflect the latest feedback within 1 minute.

As a product owner for BookShelfHub, I want to be able to prioritize the issues highlighted in the feedback loop so that the development team can address urgent concerns promptly.

Given the feedback dashboard contains multiple entries, when I filter the dashboard by urgency levels, then I should see a list of issues prioritized by severity as categorized by the number of mentions and author key identifiers.

As a marketing lead for BookShelfHub, I want to receive automated notifications for critical feedback trends detected in the dashboard so that I can react promptly to author concerns and marketing strategies.

Given a significant negative trend is detected in the feedback dashboard, when the trend appears, then an automated alert should be sent to my email within 30 minutes of detection with details of the trend.

As a software engineer working on BookShelfHub, I want to ensure that the dashboard is accessible to authors with disabilities so that they can provide feedback without hindrance.

Given a user with disabilities is using a screen reader, when they navigate to the feedback dashboard, then all elements should be properly labeled and readable by the screen reader according to WCAG standards.

Feedback Categorization System

User Story: As a product manager, I want feedback to be categorized automatically so that I can quickly analyze areas of improvement and allocate resources effectively to address authors' pain points.
Description: Implement a feedback categorization system that automatically sorts incoming feedback into predefined categories such as 'Usability', 'Content', 'Technical Issues', etc. This will streamline the process of analyzing feedback by grouping similar responses together, making it easier to identify trends and recurring issues. With precise categorization, BookShelfHub can ensure that all feedback is systematically reviewed and addressed, fostering a culture of continuous improvement. This feature will ultimately help to improve onboarding and enhance the overall author experience by clearly understanding the challenges authors face.
Acceptance Criteria: New authors submit feedback during the onboarding process, and the system categorizes it for analysis.

Given a new author submits feedback, when the feedback is received, then it should be automatically categorized into one of the predefined categories: 'Usability', 'Content', 'Technical Issues', etc.

Authors can view the categories in which their feedback has been sorted after submission.

Given an author has submitted feedback, when they access their submission status, then they should see the category into which their feedback has been sorted along with any suggested actions taken based on their feedback.

Administrators need to view aggregated feedback for reporting purposes.

Given the feedback categorization system has processed feedback, when an administrator requests a report, then they should receive an overview of feedback categorized by type, including the number of submissions in each category.

The system correctly routes feedback to the appropriate team based on category.

Given feedback has been categorized, when feedback is sent to the relevant team for review, then it should only include feedback items from that team’s assigned categories (e.g., Technical Issues to technical support team).

System handles multiple feedback submissions simultaneously from different authors.

Given multiple authors submit feedback at the same time, when the feedback is processed, then all submissions should be categorized correctly without loss of any submission or data integrity.

Feedback categorization system is tested for accuracy in categorization.

Given a set of test feedback submissions with known categories, when processed through the feedback categorization system, then each submission should be categorized correctly with 95% accuracy or higher.

Feedback Acknowledgment Notifications

User Story: As a new author, I want to receive acknowledgment notifications when I provide feedback, so that I know my opinions are valued and considered for improvements.
Description: Create a notification system that informs authors when their feedback has been received and acknowledged by the BookShelfHub team. This not only helps to build trust and transparency but also encourages authors to continue participating in the feedback process, knowing that their voices are heard and valued. This requirement will enhance user engagement, maintain author morale, and create an ecosystem where continuous improvement is celebrated, ultimately leading to a better onboarding experience for all users.
Acceptance Criteria: Notification for Positive Feedback Submission

Given an author submits positive feedback through the platform, when the feedback is received, then the author should receive a notification acknowledging receipt and thanking them for their input.

Notification for Negative Feedback Submission

Given an author submits negative feedback through the platform, when the feedback is received, then the author should receive a notification acknowledging receipt and informing them that their feedback is being reviewed.

Notification Timing

Given an author has submitted feedback, when the feedback is acknowledged, then a notification should be sent within 24 hours of feedback submission.

Feedback Acknowledgment Details

Given an author has received a notification for their feedback, when they view the notification, then it should contain details confirming their feedback type and a comment inviting future feedback.

Multiple Feedback Submissions

Given that an author has submitted multiple feedback items, when each submission is acknowledged, then the author should receive a separate notification for each feedback item to track acknowledgment.

System Error Handling

Given that an author submits feedback and there is a system error, when the feedback cannot be processed, then the author should receive an error notification with instructions to retry later.

User Statistics on Feedback Received

Given the feedback acknowledgment notifications are implemented, when an administrator reviews the feedback reports, then they should see statistics on the number of acknowledgments sent and response rate from authors.

Post-Onboarding Feedback Survey

User Story: As a new author, I want to complete a post-onboarding feedback survey so that I can provide my thoughts on the onboarding process and suggest improvements based on my experience.
Description: Introduce a post-onboarding feedback survey that new authors can complete after they have gone through the onboarding process. This survey should assess their overall experience, highlight impactful features, and identify suggestions for further enhancements. Understanding the author's viewpoint after the onboarding experience is crucial for iterative improvements. Implementing this survey will allow BookShelfHub to gather actionable insights, enabling the development team to refine the onboarding process continually.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors complete the post-onboarding feedback survey immediately after finishing the onboarding process.

Given that an author has completed their onboarding, when they access the feedback survey, then they can fill out and submit their feedback successfully.

Authors receive an email notification prompting them to complete the post-onboarding feedback survey within 24 hours of onboarding completion.

Given that onboarding is completed, when the email notification is sent, then the author should receive the email within 24 hours and the email should contain a link to the survey.

New authors report their satisfaction with the onboarding process through the feedback survey.

Given that the survey is completed by new authors, when analyzing the results, then at least 80% of authors should rate their onboarding experience as satisfactory or higher.

Authors provide specific feedback on which features were most impactful during their onboarding experience.

Given that authors complete the survey, when analyzing the responses, then at least 70% of authors should identify at least one feature they found impactful in the onboarding process.

The feedback survey includes open-ended questions to capture detailed suggestions for enhancements.

Given that the survey is being designed, when reviewing the survey structure, then it should include at least three open-ended questions for authors to provide suggestions.

The collected feedback data is stored securely for future analysis and reporting.

Given that authors submit their feedback, when checking the database, then all survey responses should be saved securely without data loss.

Authors can choose to opt-out of the survey without any penalty or impact on their account functionality.

Given that the survey is presented to the author, when they choose to opt-out, then their account functionality should remain unaffected and they should not receive further prompts related to the survey.

Feedback Response Action Plan

User Story: As a project lead, I want to create a feedback response action plan so that I can inform authors about how we will address their suggestions and concerns effectively.
Description: Design an action plan protocol based on the feedback received from authors. This plan should outline how the BookShelfHub team intends to address the feedback received, including timeline and expected outcomes. This transparency reassures authors that their feedback is not only heard but acted upon. Establishing a clear action plan will help in setting realistic expectations for new users, fostering a sense of community engagement and trust, ultimately leading to a more robust onboarding process that meets user needs.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors submit feedback on their onboarding experience through the Feedback Loop System within BookShelfHub.

Given an author has completed the onboarding process, when they access the Feedback Loop System, then they must be able to submit feedback regarding their experience within 5 minutes.

The BookShelfHub team receives feedback and creates a transparent action plan based on the feedback provided by authors.

Given the feedback is submitted, when the BookShelfHub team reviews the feedback within 48 hours, then an action plan must be created and communicated to the author within 1 week, detailing how the feedback will be addressed.

Authors are informed about the status of the action plan regarding their feedback in a timely manner.

Given an action plan has been established, when an author checks the feedback status in their dashboard, then they must see updates on the action plan’s progress and expected completion timelines within 2 days of submission.

The impact of the action plan is assessed after implementation based on subsequent author feedback.

Given the action plan has been executed, when new authors provide feedback again after the changes, then at least 70% of new feedback must indicate a positive improvement in their onboarding experience.

Authors can track the changes made as a result of their feedback through BookShelfHub.

Given an action plan is implemented, when authors view the change log section, then they must see detailed descriptions of changes and improvements made corresponding with their feedback within 2 weeks of implementation.

A follow-up survey is conducted to evaluate the effectiveness of the improvements made to the onboarding process.

Given the improvements have been made, when authors receive a follow-up survey, then at least 80% of respondents must report satisfaction with the new onboarding experience within 30 days post-implementation.

Goal Setting Framework

An interactive framework that helps authors define their immediate and long-term publishing goals. By establishing clear objectives early in the onboarding process, authors can stay focused and motivated, leading to a more engaged and successful publishing experience.

Requirements

Interactive Goal Tracker

User Story: As an author, I want to set clear publishing goals so that I can stay focused and motivated throughout the publishing process.
Description: The Interactive Goal Tracker allows authors to set, modify, and track their immediate and long-term publishing goals within the BookShelfHub platform. This requirement will include features for goal visualization, progress tracking, and periodic reminders. The goal tracker will integrate seamlessly into the onboarding process, encouraging authors to define their objectives right from the start. By providing a structured way to manage goals, this feature enhances user engagement and increases the likelihood of successful publishing outcomes, aligning the authors’ aspirations with measurable metrics throughout their journey.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors set their short-term and long-term publishing goals during the initial setup of the BookShelfHub platform.

Given the author is on the goal-setting page, when they input their goals and click 'Save', then the goals should be stored and displayed correctly in their dashboard.

Authors modify their previously set goals in the Interactive Goal Tracker at any time during their publishing journey.

Given the author has existing goals, when they access the goal modification feature, then any changes made should update the goals in the database and reflect immediately on the dashboard.

Authors view their progress towards their goals using visual tools and metrics provided in the BookShelfHub platform.

Given an author has set goals, when they navigate to the progress dashboard, then they should see visual representations (progress bars, percentages) of each goal's completion status accurately.

Authors receive periodic reminders via email about their set goals to keep them accountable and engaged in their publishing journey.

Given an author has set goals, when the reminder schedule is reached (e.g., weekly), then a reminder email should be sent to the author's registered email address containing their goals and progress updates.

Authors track the milestones associated with their publishing goals in the Interactive Goal Tracker.

Given an author has set milestones within their goals, when they log into their dashboard, then they should be able to see a list of milestones with due dates and completion statuses clearly displayed.

Authors collaborate with editors and marketers by sharing their goals within the BookShelfHub platform.

Given the author has set collaborative goals, when they share these goals with team members, then those members should receive notifications and have access to edit and comment on the shared goals.

Goals Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As an author, I want to see my progress towards my publishing goals so that I can make data-driven adjustments to my strategy.
Description: The Goals Analytics Dashboard will provide authors with an overview of their progress towards their publishing goals in a visually engaging manner. This feature will aggregate data from the goal setting framework and present it using various analytics tools such as charts and graphs. Authors will be able to view their goal accomplishment rates, identify areas needing improvement, and receive personalized insights based on their publishing activities. By visualizing their progress, authors can better understand their journey and adjust their strategies as necessary, fostering a more engaging publishing experience.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors accessing the Goals Analytics Dashboard to view their progress towards established publishing goals during their weekly review sessions.

Given the author has set their publishing goals within the Goal Setting Framework, when they access the Goals Analytics Dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of their progress with graphs and charts that accurately reflect their goal accomplishment rates and areas for improvement.

Authors receiving personalized insights based on their publishing activities through the Goals Analytics Dashboard.

Given that the author has completed certain publishing activities, when they check the Goals Analytics Dashboard, then they should receive contextual insights recommending specific actions or adjustments to improve their progress towards their goals.

Authors comparing their progress with historical data to understand their growth trajectory over time.

Given the author has historical publishing data stored in the system, when they view the Goals Analytics Dashboard, then they should have the ability to compare their current progress against previous periods displayed through comparative analytics tools.

Authors exporting their goals progress data for external sharing or reporting purposes.

Given the author is on the Goals Analytics Dashboard, when they select the export option, then the system should generate a report in a user-friendly format (e.g., PDF, CSV) that includes all relevant analytics data displayed on the dashboard.

Authors receiving notifications for any potential delays or issues identified through their goal tracking.

Given the author has ongoing publishing activities, when a potential delay or issue is detected related to their publishing goals, then the system should send a timely notification to the author outlining the issue and suggested next steps.

Goal Setting Webinar Integration

User Story: As an author, I want to join webinars about goal setting so that I can learn from experts and enhance my goal-setting skills.
Description: The Goal Setting Webinar Integration requirement involves creating a system for authors to participate in live or recorded webinars focused on effective goal setting in publishing. This will include scheduling tools, notifications, and links to webinars within the platform. Authors will gain access to expert advice and tips on how to set realistic and measurable goals, enhancing their understanding of the framework. By participating in these webinars, authors can feel more empowered to engage with the goal setting process and learn best practices that can lead to successful outcomes.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors can access a calendar tool within the platform to view scheduled webinars on goal setting.

Given an author is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the webinar section, then they should see a calendar view with all upcoming goal setting webinars clearly displayed.

Authors receive notifications for upcoming webinars they are registered for, including reminders as the webinar date approaches.

Given an author has registered for a goal setting webinar, when the registration is confirmed, then they should receive an email and in-platform notification 24 hours and 1 hour before the webinar starts.

Authors can easily access recorded webinars if they are unable to attend live sessions.

Given an author missed a live goal setting webinar, when they navigate to the recorded webinars section, then they should find the recording available to watch with a summary and timestamped key topics.

Users can provide feedback on webinars to improve future sessions and guide content decisions.

Given an author has attended a goal setting webinar, when the session concludes, then they should be prompted to complete a feedback form which will be saved and analyzed for improvements.

Authors can share their goal setting progress with mentors or peers through the platform.

Given an author has set their personal goals, when they choose to share their progress, then they should be able to send an invitation to mentors or peers to view their goals and achievements in a secure manner.

Authors have access to expert resources related to goal setting through the platform.

Given an author has enrolled in the goal setting framework, when they click on the resources section, then they should see curated materials such as articles, videos, and templates that relate to goal setting strategies in publishing.

Customized Goal Templates

User Story: As an author, I want access to customizable goal templates so that I can easily define my publishing goals in a relevant context.
Description: Customized Goal Templates will provide authors with pre-defined goal frameworks based on different publishing genres and personal experiences. This requirement will facilitate authors in starting their goal-setting process with relevant and practical templates. Authors can choose from a variety of templates that match their specific objectives or create their own from scratch. The templates will enhance efficiency in defining goals, allow for personalization, and increase the likelihood that authors will engage with the goal-setting process as they find relatable starting points.
Acceptance Criteria: Author selects a specific genre during onboarding and accesses the corresponding Customized Goal Templates for that genre.

Given an author is on the goal-setting page, when they select their publishing genre, then a list of relevant goal templates should be displayed.

Users are able to create their own customized goal template from scratch after reviewing the pre-defined templates.

Given an author is reviewing templates, when they click on 'Create New Template', then they should be redirected to a screen to input their goals and save the template.

Authors can modify an existing goal template to better suit their needs before saving it as a new template.

Given an author has opened a pre-defined template, when they modify the goals and click 'Save As New Template', then the modified template should be saved without altering the original template.

Users can filter Customized Goal Templates by specific criteria such as popularity, type, and genre relevance.

Given an author is on the goal template selection page, when they apply filters for genre or popularity, then only the templates that meet the selected criteria should be displayed.

Authors receive a confirmation message upon successfully saving their customized template.

Given an author has completed a new customized template, when they click 'Save', then a success message should appear indicating that the template has been saved.

Authors can view a preview of their customized goal template before finalizing it.

Given an author is editing a template, when they click on 'Preview', then a modal should display the final version of the template they are creating for review.

Authors can share their Customized Goal Templates with their team members or collaborators.

Given an author has completed a customized goal template, when they click on 'Share', then they should be able to input email addresses and send the template to specified recipients.

Goal Progress Notifications

User Story: As an author, I want to receive notifications about my goal progress so that I can stay on track and make timely adjustments when needed.
Description: Goal Progress Notifications will alert authors about their progress on set goals through system notifications and emails. Authors will receive reminders about upcoming deadlines, achieved milestones, and any necessary adjustments they may need to make. This proactive approach keeps authors informed and engaged, ensuring they remain focused on their goals. Furthermore, customizable notification settings will allow authors to choose how frequently they want to receive updates, promoting a more personalized experience that corresponds to their working styles and preferences.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors receive an email notification highlighting their progress towards their set goals as each milestone is reached.

Given an author has set goals with at least one milestone, When the author reaches a milestone, Then an email notification is sent to the author's registered email summarizing the progress and celebrating the achievement.

Authors will receive system notifications for reminders about critical upcoming deadlines related to their goals.

Given an author has set deadlines for their goals, When the deadline is approaching (within 3 days), Then a system notification is generated and displayed on the author's dashboard informing them of the upcoming deadline.

An author is able to customize their notification preferences regarding the frequency and type of goal progress updates they receive.

Given an author accesses their notification settings, When the author adjusts their preferences for notification frequency, Then the system saves these preferences and applies them to future notifications according to the selected frequency.

Authors receive a summary email at the end of each month outlining their overall goal progress, including achievements and areas needing improvement.

Given an author has set goals within the month, When the end of the month occurs, Then an email is sent to the author summarizing their overall goal progress including achieved milestones and suggestions for improvement.

Authors can view a history of their past notifications relating to their goal progress for reference.

Given an author clicks on the notification history link, When the author accesses their history, Then they should see a chronological list of all past notifications including dates and details of each notification.

An author is alerted through a system notification when they need to adjust their goals based on current progress or changes in priorities.

Given an author has set goals and is actively working on them, When the system detects that an author’s progress is stalling or deadlines are missed, Then a notification is sent suggesting a review and adjustment of their existing goals.

Engagement Metrics Visualization

This feature provides users with clear, visually appealing graphs and charts that represent various audience engagement metrics, including reads, shares, and reviews. By simplifying complex data into easy-to-understand visuals, authors and publishers can quickly assess their impact on their audience and make informed decisions about their marketing strategies.

Requirements

Engagement Metrics Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want to access a comprehensive dashboard of engagement metrics so that I can easily analyze how well my publications are resonating with readers and adjust my marketing strategies accordingly.
Description: The Engagement Metrics Dashboard will serve as a central hub for users to view all metrics related to audience engagement in one cohesive interface. This requirement entails developing an interactive dashboard that showcases various visual representations of engagement data including trends in reads, shares, reviews, and demographic information. The dashboard will utilize graphs, pie charts, and bar charts to make complex data digestible, empowering authors and publishers to evaluate successes and areas for improvement quickly. Integration with existing project management and marketing tools will ensure a seamless experience, enabling informed decision-making that enhances marketing strategies and audience engagement efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Engagement Metrics Dashboard to analyze their audience engagement data after a marketing campaign has been executed over the past month.

Given the user has logged in to BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, then they can see a summary view of engagement metrics including total reads, shares, and reviews for the past month, represented visually through graphs and charts.

User customizes the date range for viewing engagement metrics on the Dashboard.

Given the user is on the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when they select a custom date range from the filter options, then the graphs and charts update to reflect the audience engagement data only for the selected dates.

User accesses detailed demographic breakdowns of their audience engagement through the Dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when they click on the demographic section, then they should see a pie chart displaying the percentage of engagement by age group, gender, and location, updated in real-time.

User integrates the Engagement Metrics Dashboard with the project management tool to ensure seamless data flow.

Given the user has connected the Engagement Metrics Dashboard with their project management tool, when they refresh the dashboard, then the engagement metrics must reflect any recent changes in project settings, campaigns, or timelines.

User shares the engagement metrics report with team members directly from the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when they click on the 'Share Report' button, then a prompt should appear allowing them to enter email addresses and a message, and upon sending, the report must be emailed successfully to the specified recipients.

User views historical engagement metrics to compare performance over multiple months.

Given the user is on the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when they select a historical view option, then they should be able to see a bar chart comparing audience engagement metrics across the last six months, with clear labeling and annotations for key performance indicators.

User receives alerts for significant changes in engagement metrics through the Dashboard interface.

Given the user is on the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when there is a notable increase or decrease in reads, shares, or reviews by a defined percentage within a week, then an alert notification must be displayed prominently on the dashboard to prompt user action.

Real-Time Data Updates

User Story: As an author, I want to see real-time updates on engagement metrics so that I can react quickly to audience interactions and adjust my promotion tactics if necessary.
Description: This requirement focuses on providing real-time updates to engagement metrics displayed on the dashboard. Users will receive instantaneous feedback on how their publications are performing, ensuring that they do not have to wait for periodic updates to make strategic decisions. The integration of APIs and web sockets will enable data to be fetched continuously, reflecting the latest user interactions and engagement levels. This improvement in data responsiveness will allow publishers to adapt their marketing efforts more dynamically, optimizing their strategies based on current trends and user behaviors.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives real-time updates on audience engagement metrics when they log into the BookShelfHub dashboard.

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they view the engagement metrics dashboard, then the graphs and charts should display the latest audience engagement metrics without requiring a manual refresh.

Authors receive immediate notifications for increases in reads, shares, or reviews post-publication.

Given an author has published a new book, when a user interacts with the publication by reading, sharing, or reviewing, then the author should receive real-time notifications reflecting these interactions within 5 seconds.

Users are able to visualize engagement metrics in graphical format in a user-friendly manner.

Given an author accesses the engagement metrics feature, when the data loads, then the user should see at least three types of visualizations (bar chart, line graph, and pie chart) representing different engagement metrics.

Change in user engagement levels is reflected in the dashboard analytics on continuous interaction.

Given the engagement metrics are set to real-time updates, when a user shares a book on social media, then the updated metrics should be displayed within 10 seconds of the interaction occurring.

Users can filter engagement metrics based on time intervals (e.g., daily, weekly, monthly).

Given the user selects a specific time range, when they apply the filter on the engagement metrics dashboard, then the visualizations should update to reflect the selected time period's data accurately.

Users can export real-time engagement metrics data into CSV or Excel format.

Given the user is viewing the engagement metrics dashboard, when they choose the export option, then they should be able to download the current engagement metrics in CSV or Excel format within 5 seconds.

Customizable Metrics Reports

User Story: As a marketer, I want to create customizable reports on engagement metrics so that I can present tailored insights to my team and stakeholders, showing our progress and areas needing attention.
Description: The Customizable Metrics Reports feature will allow users to generate bespoke reports based on specific engagement metrics that matter most to them. Users will be able to select different metrics, time frames, and visualization styles to produce reports that fit their specific needs. This functionality enhances the overall value of the Engagement Metrics Visualization feature by catering to the varied analytic needs of users, enabling them to extract insights that align with their unique goals and strategies. Custom reports can be exported in multiple formats, fostering better communication with stakeholders.
Acceptance Criteria: Selecting metrics and generating a report for the first time.

Given a user is on the Customizable Metrics Reports page, when they select engagement metrics and visualization styles, then they should be able to generate a report that accurately reflects the chosen settings.

Exporting a customized metrics report.

Given a user has generated a metrics report, when they choose to export the report, then the report should be available in at least three export formats (PDF, Excel, CSV).

Viewing a generated report with different time frames.

Given a user has generated a metrics report, when they modify the time frame of the report, then the visualizations and metrics displayed should automatically update to reflect the new time frame selected.

Accessing and interpreting various visual styles.

Given a user is viewing a metrics report, when they switch between different visualization styles (e.g., bar chart, line graph), then the report should visually change to the selected style without losing any underlying data accuracy.

Selecting multiple metrics for comparison.

Given a user is on the Customizable Metrics Reports page, when they choose to select multiple metrics for comparison, then the generated report should display all selected metrics side by side in a comparative format.

Understanding metric definitions and relevance.

Given a user is viewing a metrics report, when they hover over any metric displayed, then a tooltip should provide a clear definition and context for that metric, aiding user understanding.

Saving and retrieving customized reports.

Given a user has created and customized a metrics report, when they choose to save that report, then they should be able to retrieve and edit that report in the future without losing any customizations.

Interactive Engagement Tools

User Story: As a data analyst, I want to interact with the engagement metrics through filters and sort options so that I can analyze the data at different levels and reveal deeper insights into my audience's behavior.
Description: This requirement seeks to enhance user interaction with the engagement metrics by incorporating tools that allow users to filter, sort, and drill down into the data. Users will be able to click on elements of the graphs and charts for deeper insights, exploring factors such as geographic performance, demographic breakdowns, and historical trends. This interactivity provides a more granular view of data, allowing users to identify specific audience segments that are thriving or struggling. With these tools, users can make more precise marketing decisions based on detailed insights derived from their audience engagement metrics.
Acceptance Criteria: User filters engagement metrics based on geographic location.

Given that the user is on the Engagement Metrics Visualization page, when they select a specific geographic region from the filter options, then the displayed graphs and charts should update to reflect only the engagement metrics relevant to that region.

User drills down into specific demographic metrics.

Given that the user is viewing the engagement metrics, when they click on the demographic breakdown section of a chart, then a detailed report should be generated showing engagement metrics for each demographic group.

User sorts engagement metrics by date.

Given that the user is on the Engagement Metrics Visualization page, when they select a date range from the sorting options, then the graph should update to show engagement metrics specifically for that selected date range.

User accesses historical trends for audience engagement.

Given that the user clicks on the historical trends chart, when they select a year from the timeline, then the system should display the engagement metrics for the selected year in an easily digestible format.

User reviews engagement metrics after a marketing campaign.

Given that a marketing campaign has concluded, when the user accesses the engagement metrics tool, then they should be able to compare metrics before and after the campaign to evaluate its effectiveness.

User exports engagement metrics data for external analysis.

Given that the user has customized their engagement metrics view, when they click on the export button, then the data must be downloaded in CSV format for external analysis.

User shares engagement metrics visuals on social media.

Given that the user is viewing a specific engagement metric chart, when they select the share option, then a prompt should appear allowing the user to share the visual on their connected social media accounts.

Validation of Engagement Data Sources

User Story: As a project manager, I want to ensure the accuracy and reliability of the engagement metrics data so that I can trust the insights I use to guide our marketing strategies and resource allocations.
Description: To ensure the integrity of engagement metrics, this requirement covers the validation of the various data sources feeding into the engagement metrics visualization. This includes verifying API connections, ensuring data reliability, and maintaining consistency across reporting metrics. By implementing checks and balances for data accuracy, users can trust the information presented on the dashboard, allowing for more effective decision-making in their marketing strategies. Regular audits and monitoring will be integrated to uphold data quality as a critical aspect of the Engagement Metrics Visualization feature.
Acceptance Criteria: Validation of API connections for audience engagement metrics.

Given that the user connects to the engagement metrics API, when the user sends a test request, then the API should return a successful response with the expected data structure and content within 2 seconds.

Verification of data reliability from external sources.

Given that the user requests engagement metrics from external data sources, when the data is retrieved, then at least 95% of the data fields should have valid and non-null values, ensuring credibility.

Assessment of data consistency across multiple reporting metrics.

Given that the user compares engagement metrics across different visualizations, when the metrics are displayed, then the values should match or be within 5% variance across all visual representations.

Conducting regular audits for data quality in engagement metrics.

Given that the system performs a scheduled audit, when the audit runs, then all data sources should be evaluated for accuracy, and any discrepancies over a threshold of 10% should trigger an alert to the user.

Monitoring real-time data feeds for engagement metrics.

Given that the user is viewing live engagement metrics, when there is a change in data from the sources, then the dashboard should update in real time without exceeding a 3-second delay.

Ensuring proper error handling for data retrieval failures.

Given that there is a failure in retrieving engagement metrics from a data source, when the error occurs, then the user should receive a clear and actionable error message indicating the nature of the issue and steps to resolve it.

Validation of user permissions for accessing engagement data.

Given that a user attempts to access engagement metrics, when the permission settings are checked, then the user should only be allowed to view metrics for projects they are authorized to access.

Real-Time Feedback Alerts

Users receive instant notifications whenever engagement metrics change significantly, such as a spike in reads or a surge in shares. This allows authors and publishers to respond promptly to increases in interest or discussions about their work, enabling them to capitalize on momentum and maximize impact.

Requirements

Engagement Metrics Tracking

User Story: As an author, I want to track my book's engagement metrics so that I can adjust my marketing strategies based on audience interest and interaction patterns.
Description: This requirement involves implementing a robust system for tracking and analyzing engagement metrics in real-time. The system must capture data on reads, shares, comments, and other relevant interactions with published content. By providing an intuitive dashboard for authors and publishers, this feature enhances their ability to understand audience engagement, informing their marketing strategies. The integration with existing analytics tools in BookShelfHub will ensure that users can contextualize these metrics within their broader publishing objectives. This feature aims to empower users to develop targeted actions based on audience behavior, thus maximizing their content's visibility and impact.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time notification for an author when their book receives a significant increase in reads after a new marketing campaign has gone live.

Given the author has published content and a marketing campaign has started, when there is a 30% increase in reads within the first 24 hours, then the author should receive a real-time notification regarding the spike in engagement.

Publisher views the engagement dashboard and observes a sudden surge in shares for one of their titles.

Given the publisher is logged into the engagement metrics dashboard, when there is an increase of at least 50 shares within an hour, then the dashboard should display an alert indicating the surge and provide the total number of shares.

Authors need to understand engagement trends for their books over the past month to adjust their marketing strategy.

Given the author accesses the engagement analytics dashboard, when they select the past month's engagement data, then the system should display a monthly report summarizing reads, shares, and comments along with percentage changes from the previous month.

A small publishing house wants to monitor comments on a recently released book for any significant feedback trends.

Given the publishing house is tracking comments on their book, when the number of comments increases by 20% within a week of the book's release, then they should receive a notification detailing the increase and a breakdown of positive vs negative comments.

An author wishes to take timely marketing actions based on the real-time metrics of their book's performance.

Given the author has opted in for alerts, when engagement metrics (reads, shares) report a change of 40% or more within an hour, then the author should receive an immediate alert via email or app notification detailing the specific engagement metrics.

Authors and publishers must ensure that their engagement metrics are accurately reflected in regional performance reports.

Given the author is viewing regional engagement analytics, when the data is filtered by region, then the dashboard should accurately display engagement metrics for reads, shares, and comments specific to that region without errors.

An editor reviews the impact of their strategies on audience engagement by accessing historical engagement metrics.

Given the editor has access to historical engagement data, when they select a specific date range, then the system should generate a report showing detailed engagement metrics including reads, shares, and comments with a clear timeline of events.

Customizable Alert Settings

User Story: As a publisher, I want to customize my alert settings so that I only receive notifications for the engagement metrics that matter most to me.
Description: This requirement involves creating customizable settings that allow users to define parameters for engagement alerts. Users should be able to specify what types of engagement metrics they want to receive alerts for (e.g., reads, shares, comments) and the thresholds that will trigger notifications. This flexibility ensures that users receive relevant and timely information without being overwhelmed by notifications. Integration with user preferences will ensure that the experience is tailored to individual needs, improving the overall usability and effectiveness of the alert system.
Acceptance Criteria: Setting Up Custom Alerts for Engagement Metrics

Given a user is on the customizable alert settings page, when they select engagement metrics (reads, shares, comments) and set specific thresholds for notifications, then the system should save these preferences and alert the user when the defined thresholds are exceeded.

Receiving Alerts Based on Customized Settings

Given a user has configured their alert settings for specific engagement metrics, when there is a significant change in those metrics that meet the user's defined thresholds, then the system should send an instant notification to the user via their preferred method (email, SMS, app notification).

Managing and Updating Alert Preferences

Given a user has previously set up customizable alert preferences, when they navigate to the alerts management section and modify their settings (adding/removing metrics or changing thresholds), then the system should successfully update and save the new preferences without errors.

Verifying Alert Notifications for Multiple Metrics

Given a user has set up alerts for multiple engagement metrics, when each metric reaches its respective threshold, then the user should receive distinct and accurate notifications for each metric that indicate which threshold was met along with the relevant data.

Testing System Performance Under High Engagement Changes

Given that a significant number of users are interacting with a published work, when engagement metrics fluctuate rapidly, then the alert system should maintain performance, sending out alerts within a defined response time of 5 minutes after the threshold condition is met.

User Interface for Custom Alert Settings

Given a user is accessing the customizable alert settings, when they view the interface, then it should be intuitive, allowing users to easily select metrics and set thresholds without requiring external assistance or extensive documentation.

User Feedback on Alert Effectiveness

Given a user has received alerts based on their customizable settings, when they provide feedback on the relevance and usefulness of the alerts, then their feedback should contribute to system improvements and user satisfaction metrics.

Instant Notification System

User Story: As an author, I want to receive instant notifications about engagement changes so that I can quickly respond to increasing interest in my work.
Description: This requirement entails developing an instant notification system that delivers alerts to users as soon as significant changes in engagement metrics are detected. The system will utilize push notifications, emails, or in-app messages to ensure that users are informed promptly. Speed is crucial, as quick responses can help capitalize on momentum or high engagement periods. The notification system will need to be reliable and efficient, ensuring that users receive alerts without delays, thus supporting them in making timely decisions based on audience interest.
Acceptance Criteria: Notification Delivery During High Engagement Events

Given an author has received a spike in engagement metrics (e.g., a 50% increase in reads), when the engagement threshold is met, then the author should receive a push notification, email, and in-app message within 5 minutes of the change.

User Preferences for Notification Types

Given a user has access to notification settings, when they select their preferred notification types (push, email, in-app), then the system should accurately save this preference and deliver notifications accordingly without errors.

Failure Scenario Handling

Given the notification system experiences a failure, when an engagement alert cannot be sent, then the system should log the error and retry sending the alert every 10 minutes until successful, ensuring no alerts are missed.

Threshold Settings Customization

Given an author wants to customize their engagement threshold for notifications, when they set their desired threshold for engagement spikes (e.g., 20% increase), then the system will successfully update and apply this threshold without affecting other users' settings.

Multi-User Notifications

Given multiple collaborators (authors, editors, marketers) are working on the same project, when significant engagement metrics change, then all notified users should receive alerts simultaneously via their selected methods of communication.

Real-time Analytics Dashboard Integration

Given the instant notification system is active, when a significant engagement change occurs, then the real-time analytics dashboard should reflect the updated metrics within 1 minute, allowing users to act on the engagement spike promptly.

User Feedback Mechanism

Given users receive notifications about engagement metrics, when they utilize feedback options to suggest improvements, then the system should capture, log, and prioritize these suggestions for future iterations of the notification system.

Analytics Dashboard Integration

User Story: As a publisher, I want my notifications integrated with the analytics dashboard so that I can understand the context of engagement changes and refine my strategies accordingly.
Description: This requirement involves integrating the real-time feedback alerts with the existing analytics dashboard within BookShelfHub. It should provide users with a comprehensive view of their engagement metrics alongside alert notifications. This integration will enable authors and publishers to correlate their engagement data with their promotional efforts, allowing them to see not only what is happening in real-time but also how those changes align with their overall marketing goals. This holistic view will facilitate informed decision-making and strategic planning for future campaigns.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of real-time feedback alerts into the analytics dashboard for immediate user access.

Given a user accesses the analytics dashboard, When there is a significant change in engagement metrics, Then the user should receive an instant notification in the dashboard indicating the change.

Ability to correlate engagement metrics with marketing activities and campaigns.

Given the user views engagement data on the analytics dashboard, When they select a specific campaign they ran, Then they should see the corresponding engagement metrics update to reflect how that campaign impacted the metrics.

Notification settings customization for user-specific engagement alerts.

Given a user navigates to settings in the analytics dashboard, When they choose to customize their notification preferences, Then they should be able to select which engagement metrics trigger alerts and receive confirmation of their changes.

Real-time updates of engagement metrics displayed on the analytics dashboard.

Given a user is monitoring the analytics dashboard, When a spike in reads or shares occurs, Then the dashboard should automatically refresh to show the updated engagement metrics within five seconds.

Historical view of alerts to analyze past engagement changes.

Given a user views the engagement metrics on the analytics dashboard, When they select the historical alerts option, Then they should see a timeline displaying past notifications along with corresponding engagement metric changes.

User-friendly interface for displaying feedback alerts within the dashboard.

Given a user has received multiple notifications for engagement metrics changes, When they view the dashboard, Then the notifications should be displayed in an organized manner, highlighting the most recent changes at the top of the alerts section.

User Training and Support Materials

User Story: As a new user, I want access to training materials so that I can effectively use the real-time feedback alerts feature and understand its benefits.
Description: This requirement entails developing comprehensive training and support materials aimed at educating users about the new engagement metrics alerts feature. These materials should include user guides, tutorial videos, and FAQs to assist users in leveraging the feature effectively. Proper training is essential for users to fully utilize the system's capabilities, helping to enhance their publishing strategies. Moreover, establishing a support line or chat for real-time assistance will ensure users feel supported and confident in navigating the new features offered by BookShelfHub.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a real-time feedback alert when engagement metrics, such as reads and shares, surpass predetermined thresholds after a marketing campaign has been executed.

Given the user has set engagement thresholds for reads and shares, when the actual engagement metrics exceed these thresholds, then the user should receive an instant notification through the platform.

Users can access and utilize the training materials provided for the engagement metrics alerts feature to understand its functionality and benefits.

Given the user has logged into their BookShelfHub account, when they navigate to the Training and Support section, then they should find user guides, tutorial videos, and FAQs related to the engagement metrics alerts feature.

Users are able to contact support through the established support line or chat function for real-time assistance regarding the alerts feature.

Given a user has a question about the engagement metrics alerts feature, when they reach out via the support line or chat, then they should receive a response from a support representative within 5 minutes.

Users can provide feedback on the effectiveness of the training materials and support services after using them.

Given the user has completed the training materials, when they are prompted to fill out a feedback form, then they should be able to submit their feedback concerning the quality and comprehensiveness of the training materials.

The user can utilize the tutorial videos to set up alerts according to their preferences without external assistance.

Given the user has accessed the tutorial videos, when they follow the instructions provided, then they should successfully set up their engagement alerts without requiring help from support.

Users can track their engagement metrics over time to assess the impact of their strategies and make adjustments as necessary.

Given the user has access to their engagement metrics dashboard, when they view the historical data for their alerts, then they should see a clear representation of engagement trends over a set period.

Audience Sentiment Analysis

This analytical tool gauges audience sentiment by categorizing feedback from reviews and social media interactions into positive, neutral, or negative. Users can gain insights into how their audience perceives their work, which allows for more targeted responses and adaptations in their writing or marketing strategies.

Requirements

Sentiment Categorization Engine

User Story: As an independent author, I want to analyze audience sentiment from reviews and social media, so that I can adapt my writing style and marketing strategies based on the feedback received.
Description: The Sentiment Categorization Engine automatically analyzes feedback from audience reviews and social media mentions, categorizing sentiments into positive, neutral, and negative. This feature employs natural language processing (NLP) algorithms to effectively parse user-generated content, providing users with actionable insights that can inform their marketing strategies and writing practices. By visualizing sentiment trends over time, users can adapt their approaches to better engage with their audience and improve overall reception of their works.
Acceptance Criteria: User Reviews Sentiment Analysis for New Book Launch

Given a collection of user reviews for a newly launched book, when the Sentiment Categorization Engine processes these reviews, then it should categorize at least 80% of the reviews into the correct sentiment categories (positive, neutral, negative) as validated against a manually scored set of the same reviews.

Social Media Interaction Feedback Analysis

Given a set of social media interactions for a recent book promotion, when the Sentiment Categorization Engine analyzes these interactions, then it should provide a sentiment summary report that accurately reflects the overall sentiment as positive, neutral, or negative, with at least 90% accuracy on sentiment classification.

Visualizing Sentiment Trends Over Time

Given multiple sets of audience feedback collected over a six-month period, when the Sentiment Categorization Engine compiles this data, then it should produce a visual graph displaying sentiment trends (positive, neutral, negative) over time, enabling users to identify key periods of audience engagement or disengagement.

Real-time Sentiment Analysis During Marketing Campaigns

Given ongoing marketing campaigns for various books, when audience feedback is received in real-time, then the Sentiment Categorization Engine should instantly categorize and report sentiment, allowing users to respond quickly to audience reactions.

Sentiment Alerts for Negative Feedback

Given the categorization of audience feedback, when negative sentiments surpass a defined threshold (e.g., 20% of total feedback), then the system should trigger an alert for the publishers to review and respond proactively.

Actionable Insights from Sentiment Analysis

Given categorized sentiments from audience feedback, when the Sentiment Categorization Engine generates a report, then it should include at least three actionable insights for users to modify their marketing or writing strategies based on the sentiments expressed.

Feedback Visualization Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want to see a visual representation of audience sentiment trends, so that I can quickly grasp how my audience feels about different publications and make informed marketing decisions.
Description: The Feedback Visualization Dashboard offers users a graphical representation of audience sentiments over time, allowing them to easily track shifts in public perception regarding their books or publications. This dashboard showcases metrics such as sentiment distribution percentages, trending topics, and visual cues like graphs or word clouds to highlight key themes in feedback. By leveraging this information, authors and publishers can make data-driven decisions to enhance engagement and address user concerns effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: User reviews the Feedback Visualization Dashboard to assess audience sentiment over the past month.

Given the user is on the Feedback Visualization Dashboard, when they select the last month as the time frame, then the dashboard should display sentiment distribution percentages for positive, neutral, and negative feedback in a pie chart format.

An author wants to identify trending topics from feedback received over the last quarter.

Given the user is on the Feedback Visualization Dashboard, when they select the last quarter as the time frame, then the dashboard should show a bar graph of the top five trending topics based on audience feedback.

The user wants to export the sentiment analysis data for external reporting purposes.

Given the user is on the Feedback Visualization Dashboard, when they click the 'Export Data' button, then the application should download a CSV file containing the sentiment distribution, trending topics, and visual graphs of the selected time period.

A publisher is interested in visualizing how audience sentiment changes after a marketing campaign.

Given the marketing campaign has concluded, when the user views the Feedback Visualization Dashboard for the period including the campaign, then the dashboard should highlight any significant shifts in sentiment distribution with different color codes for before and after the campaign.

An author wishes to analyze qualitative feedback comments to identify common themes.

Given the user is on the Feedback Visualization Dashboard, when they click on a word cloud representation of feedback comments, then the application should display a list of common phrases and keywords derived from the feedback.

Real-time Alerts for Negative Feedback

User Story: As an author, I want to receive real-time alerts for negative audience feedback, so that I can respond promptly to any concerns and manage my reputation effectively.
Description: The Real-time Alerts for Negative Feedback requirement enables users to receive instant notifications when negative sentiment surpasses a certain threshold. By integrating with feedback channels and employing sentiment analysis, this feature ensures that authors and publishers can respond quickly to potential issues, mitigating any adverse effects on their reputation or sales. The alerts can be configured for various channels such as email, SMS, or in-app notifications, providing flexibility in how users are informed.
Acceptance Criteria: Receiving Instant Notifications for Negative Sentiment After Publishing a New Book

Given a newly published book, when the negative sentiment from reviews or social media interactions exceeds the configured threshold, then the user receives an instant notification via their chosen alert channel (email, SMS, or in-app).

Customizing Alert Thresholds for Different Feedback Sources

Given the alert configuration settings, when the user sets different sentiment thresholds for various feedback sources, then the system should save these preferences and apply them correctly to each designated source.

Viewing Sentiment Analysis Metrics Post-Alert

Given that a negative feedback alert is triggered, when the user checks the sentiment analysis dashboard, then the user can see the real-time metrics indicating the level of negative sentiment and the specific feedback that triggered the alert.

Receiving Alerts for Multiple Authors under One Account

Given a user managing multiple authors within one account, when negative sentiment for any author exceeds the threshold, then the user receives separate alerts for each author indicating which author received negative feedback.

Integrating Alert Functionality with Channel Preferences

Given the user has specified their preferred channels for notifications, when the negative sentiment threshold is exceeded, then the alerting mechanism should correctly send notifications through all chosen channels without delay or errors.

Testing Different Scenarios of Negative Feedback Triggers

Given various scenarios of negative feedback across reviews and social media, when each scenario is tested against the alert system, then the alerts should trigger accurately according to the predefined thresholds for each scenario.

Understanding Response Times for Alerts Across Platforms

Given that alerts are sent via email, SMS, and in-app notifications, when negative sentiment is detected, then the time taken to deliver alerts should be logged and compared, ensuring no channel exceeds a specified response time tolerance.

Integration with Marketing Tools

User Story: As a marketer, I want to integrate audience sentiment analysis with my marketing tools, so that I can create campaigns that are responsive to audience feedback and increase engagement.
Description: This requirement ensures that the audience sentiment analysis feature integrates seamlessly with existing marketing tools. Users will be able to leverage sentiment insights to inform promotional campaigns, targeted advertising, and content creation strategies. The integration will also allow users to automate processes such as adjusting campaign messaging in response to real-time sentiment data, thereby enhancing marketing effectiveness and responsiveness to audience needs.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of Audience Sentiment Analysis with Email Marketing Tools

Given that the user has linked their email marketing tool with BookShelfHub, when they access the Audience Sentiment Analysis dashboard, then they should see real-time sentiment data reflected in their email campaign options.

Targeted Advertising Adjustment Based on Sentiment Data

Given that a user is running a targeted advertising campaign, when the Audience Sentiment Analysis identifies a shift in sentiment from positive to negative, then the user should receive an alert prompting them to adjust their advertising strategy accordingly.

Real-Time Reporting for Social Media Campaigns

Given that the user is tracking social media campaigns, when they view the Audience Sentiment Analysis, then they should be able to access a report that shows sentiment trends correlated with social media posts over the past month.

Automated Messaging Adjustments in Response to Sentiment Changes

Given that the sentiment analysis identifies a sudden decline in audience sentiment, when the user activates automated messaging adjustments, then the campaign messaging should change within 10 minutes to reflect a more positive tone based on sentiment insights.

User Training Module for Integrating Sentiment Insights into Marketing Strategies

Given that users need to understand how to leverage sentiment insights, when they enroll in the training module, then they should complete the course with a minimum score of 80% on the final assessment regarding integration into marketing strategies.

AI-Powered Recommendations for Content Adaptation

User Story: As a content creator, I want to receive AI-powered recommendations for adapting my work based on audience sentiment, so that I can ensure my writing aligns with reader expectations and preferences.
Description: The AI-Powered Recommendations feature analyzes collected sentiment data and generates personalized suggestions for content adaptation. This requirement leverages machine learning models to recommend specific changes or enhancements to writing based on audience preferences and feedback trends. By providing tailored recommendations, authors can improve their works strategically and enhance reader satisfaction, ultimately leading to increased sales.
Acceptance Criteria: As an author using BookShelfHub, I want to receive AI-generated recommendations for adapting my narrative based on the sentiment analysis of my audience's feedback so that I can enhance my writing to meet reader preferences.

Given that I have received feedback from at least 100 reviews, When I request content adaptation recommendations, Then I should receive at least five specific, actionable suggestions that align with the identified audience sentiment.

As a small publishing house, I want to generate a report on AI-powered recommendations based on sentiment trends so that the publishing team can strategize future releases effectively.

Given that I have access to the sentiment analysis data, When I generate the report for the last quarter, Then the report should include at least three trends in audience sentiment and corresponding recommendations for adaptations in upcoming publications.

As an independent publisher, I want to review the effectiveness of the AI-powered recommendations after implementing them so that I can measure their impact on audience satisfaction and sales.

Given that I have implemented the AI recommendations in my latest work, When I analyze sales data and audience ratings after one month, Then there should be a minimum increase of 10% in positive reviews and a 15% increase in sales compared to previous works without recommendations.

As an author, I want to ensure that the AI recommendations for content adaptation are relevant and personalized, so that I can trust the system for making changes in my work.

Given that I have specified my genre and target audience in BookShelfHub, When I receive recommendations from the AI, Then the suggestions should explicitly reference the genre specifics and audience demographics for at least 80% of the recommendations provided.

As a user, I want to ensure that the AI-powered recommendations can be adjusted based on my feedback loop, so that I can refine the adaptation process over time.

Given that I have provided feedback on the AI recommendations for my content, When I submit my feedback through the platform, Then the AI system should reflect updates in future recommendations based on my input within the next two iteration cycles.

As an editor, I want to analyze the historical effectiveness of past AI recommendations on audience sentiment, so that we can further improve the model.

Given the data from previous AI recommendations, When I run an analysis, Then the system should provide insights on at least three past recommendations, showing their correlation with changes in audience sentiment for at least 75% of the cases.

Engagement Trends Tracker

This feature tracks and analyzes engagement trends over time, allowing users to view historical data and identify patterns in audience behavior. By understanding these trends, authors and publishers can strategize future campaigns and content releases to align with periods of heightened audience interest.

Requirements

Data Visualization Dashboard

User Story: As an author, I want to view engagement trends in a graphical format so that I can quickly analyze audience behavior and adapt my content strategy accordingly.
Description: The Data Visualization Dashboard requirement entails creating an intuitive user interface where users can view and interact with engagement trends through various graphical representations, such as charts and graphs. The dashboard will provide insights into historical audience engagement data, highlighting key metrics such as views, shares, and comments over time. Its functionality will enable users to easily interpret the trends and make data-driven decisions regarding their content and marketing strategies. This feature is vital as it enhances the user experience by presenting complex analytics in a comprehensible format, thus facilitating better strategy formulation and campaign execution.
Acceptance Criteria: Dashboard User Interaction and Data Selection

Given a user has accessed the Data Visualization Dashboard, when the user selects a date range from the filter options, then the dashboard should update to display engagement trends specific to the selected timeframe.

Visual Representation of Engagement Metrics

Given the dashboard is loaded, when the user clicks on the 'Views' graph, then a detailed view should appear showing the breakdown of views per content type over the selected time period.

Identifying Trend Patterns

Given the engagement trends are displayed on the dashboard, when a user hovers over any point on the trends graph, then a tooltip should display the exact data points for views, shares, and comments at that specific time.

Exporting Data Insights

Given that the user has analyzed the trend data on the dashboard, when the user clicks the 'Export' button, then the system should generate a downloadable CSV file containing the displayed engagement metrics.

User Feedback on Dashboard Usability

Given that the user has interacted with the dashboard for at least 10 minutes, when the user completes a feedback form, then the system should successfully record the user's input and display a confirmation message.

Real-Time Data Refresh Functionality

Given that the dashboard is open, when the user clicks the 'Refresh' button, then the dashboard should update to show the most current engagement data without requiring a page reload.

Mobile Responsiveness of the Dashboard

Given that a user accesses the Data Visualization Dashboard from a mobile device, when the user views the dashboard, then the layout should adapt to fit the smaller screen without losing functionality.

Automated Trend Alerts

User Story: As a publisher, I want to receive notifications when engagement rises or falls beyond a certain level so that I can take immediate action to leverage or address audience interest.
Description: Automated Trend Alerts will notify users via email or in-app notifications when specific engagement metrics cross predefined thresholds. This feature allows authors and publishers to stay informed about significant changes in audience engagement, helping them to respond promptly to shifts in reader interest. It is crucial for proactive marketing and content planning, as it ensures that users never miss an opportunity to engage with their audience during peak interest periods. The implementation will require integrations with the existing notification system and the definition of customizable alert parameters based on user preferences.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives an automated email alert when their defined engagement metric crosses a specified threshold, notifying them of significant changes in audience behavior.

Given the user has set up threshold parameters for engagement metrics, When the engagement metric exceeds or drops below these thresholds, Then the user receives an email notification containing the relevant details of the threshold breach.

User receives an in-app notification when their engagement metrics show a marked trend, such as a 20% increase in audience interaction within a week.

Given the user has defined custom alert parameters for engagement trends, When the trend crosses the defined percentage change within the specified time frame, Then the user sees an in-app notification alerting them of the trend change.

User can customize the alert parameters for different engagement metrics, selecting prioritized metrics for notification based on their marketing strategy.

Given the user is in the alert configuration settings, When the user selects specific engagement metrics and sets thresholds for these metrics, Then these preferences are saved and reflected in the automated notification system.

User is able to review and edit previously set thresholds for engagement metrics in their profile settings.

Given the user navigates to their alert configuration section, When the user accesses the defined alert parameters, Then they can successfully edit and save the updated threshold values for any engagement metric.

User successfully integrates the automated trend alerts with their existing email and notification systems without technical issues.

Given the user has completed the initial setup of the automated trend alerts, When the integration process is completed, Then in-app and email notifications are delivered seamlessly to the user without errors.

Performance Benchmarking

User Story: As an independent publisher, I want to benchmark my performance against industry standards so that I can gauge where my titles stand in the market and adjust my strategies.
Description: The Performance Benchmarking requirement focuses on providing users with the ability to compare their engagement metrics against industry standards or similar titles within the BookShelfHub ecosystem. This feature aims to offer contextual insights that help authors and publishers understand how their engagement trends measure up against others, fostering a sense of competitiveness and motivation. By integrating with industry data sources, this feature will also enable users to identify potential gaps in their strategies and explore ways to improve their performance. Proper implementation will require robust analytics capabilities and clear reporting mechanisms.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors access the Engagement Trends Tracker to view their engagement metrics.

Given an author has logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Engagement Trends Tracker, then they should see a comprehensive dashboard displaying their engagement metrics compared to industry standards.

Publishers analyze historical engagement trends over the past year.

Given a publisher selects a specific timeframe in the Engagement Trends Tracker, when they generate the report, then they should receive an analysis of engagement trends over the specified period that highlights any significant changes or patterns.

Users compare their titles' engagement metrics with similar titles within BookShelfHub.

Given a user selects a title they want to compare, when they access the benchmarking tool, then they should be able to view comparative charts and data that show how their title's metrics stack up against similar titles.

Users receive recommendations for improving engagement based on benchmarking results.

Given a user has reviewed the comparison results, when they click on the 'Get Recommendations' button, then they should receive actionable insights and strategies specifically tailored to improve their engagement based on their performance gaps.

Authors and publishers set engagement goals based on benchmarks.

Given a user is viewing their performance benchmarks, when they select engagement metrics to set goals, then the system should allow them to input specific target numbers and save these goals for future tracking.

Users generate a report to share with stakeholders.

Given a user has analyzed their engagement metrics, when they choose to generate a report, then they should receive a PDF document summarizing their findings, trends, and benchmarks that can be downloaded or shared.

Admins monitor the overall system health and metrics adoption rates.

Given an admin accesses the system dashboard, when they review the user engagement metrics, then they should be able to see adoption rates of the Engagement Trends Tracker and system performance indicators such as uptime and response times.

Custom Reporting Tools

User Story: As a marketer, I want to generate custom engagement reports so that I can analyze specific metrics of interest and make informed decisions for upcoming campaigns.
Description: The Custom Reporting Tools requirement will enable users to create tailored reports based on selected engagement metrics over specific time frames. This feature allows authors and publishers to focus on the data that matters most to them, whether they want to analyze trends by month, quarter, or year. User customization will empower users to extract actionable insights and develop strategies more effectively. Implementing this feature will involve designing a user-friendly report builder interface and ensuring that it integrates seamlessly with the existing analytics system.
Acceptance Criteria: User generates a customized report focusing on engagement metrics for the last quarter.

Given the user is on the report builder interface, when they select engagement metrics and set the date range to the last quarter, then they should see a report generated with relevant metrics displayed correctly.

User saves a custom report for future access.

Given the user has created a custom report, when they click on the 'Save' button and name the report, then the system should save the report and display it in the user's saved reports list.

User exports a custom report to a CSV file.

Given the user has a custom report open, when they click on the 'Export' button and select CSV format, then a CSV file should be downloaded containing the report data.

User accesses historical data through custom reporting.

Given the user has selected a custom time frame in the report builder, when they run the report, then they should be able to view and analyze historical engagement metrics for that specific time frame.

User modifies an existing custom report and saves the changes.

Given the user has an existing custom report open, when they change one or more metric selections and click 'Save', then the updates should be applied to the report and reflected in the user's saved reports.

User filters engagement metrics to focus on a specific audience segment.

Given the user is in the report builder and selects audience segments, when they apply the filter and run the report, then the report should display only the engagement metrics for the selected audience segment.

Customizable Dashboard Widgets

Users can personalize their dashboard with a selection of widgets that display the audience engagement metrics that matter most to them. This flexibility enables authors and publishers to stay focused on specific goals and metrics that are relevant to their strategic objectives, enhancing user satisfaction and effectiveness.

Requirements

Widget Selection and Configuration

User Story: As an author, I want to customize my dashboard with specific engagement metrics so that I can easily monitor the performance of my works and make informed decisions about my marketing strategies.
Description: The system must allow users to select from a variety of available dashboard widgets, each designed to display different audience engagement metrics, such as page views, average reading time, or social media interactions. Users should be able to drag and drop these widgets into their dashboard area and configure them to show specific metrics pertinent to their individual or business needs. This feature promotes personalization, enabling users to tailor their dashboard for optimal engagement and focus on key performance indicators relevant to their strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User Customizes Dashboard with Widgets on First Use

Given a new user logs into BookShelfHub for the first time, when they access their dashboard, then they should see a default set of available widgets that they can select and drag onto their dashboard.

User Adds and Configures Widgets

Given a user is on their dashboard, when they drag a widget from the available widget list and drop it onto their dashboard area, then the widget should be added successfully, and the user should be able to configure its displayed metrics.

User Saves Customized Dashboard Layout

Given a user has customized their dashboard with various widgets and configurations, when they click the 'Save Layout' button, then the current state of their dashboard should be saved and reloaded correctly upon their next login.

User Removes Widgets from Dashboard

Given a user is viewing their customized dashboard, when they click the 'Remove' option on any widget, then the widget should be removed without affecting other widgets on the dashboard.

User Reorders Widgets on Dashboard

Given a user is on their dashboard with multiple widgets displayed, when they drag and drop any widget to a different position, then the widget should reposition correctly without affecting the functionality of other widgets.

User Filters Metrics in Widgets

Given a user has added a metrics widget to their dashboard, when they select specific metrics from the widget's configuration panel, then the widget should only display the selected metrics according to the user's preferences.

Responsive Dashboard Design

User Story: As a publisher, I want my dashboard to be accessible on any device so that I can check my metrics regardless of whether I'm in the office or on the go.
Description: The customizable dashboard must be designed to be responsive, meaning that widgets should adjust dynamically based on the device being used, whether it's a desktop, tablet, or smartphone. This ensures that users have consistent access to their personalized metrics across all devices, providing the flexibility to monitor performance any time and anywhere without compromising usability. This capability is crucial for maintaining engagement and encouraging users to utilize the platform regularly.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the BookShelfHub dashboard on a desktop computer and wants to view their audience engagement metrics.

Given the user is on the desktop dashboard, when they customize their widgets, then the layout should adjust to fit the screen size without losing any functionality or widget visibility.

User switches from a tablet to a smartphone while assessing their book's performance metrics on the BookShelfHub dashboard.

Given the user accesses the dashboard on a smartphone after using it on a tablet, when they log in, then the dashboard should display the same widgets in a responsive manner, adjusting the size and layout accordingly without any overlap or loss of visibility.

A publisher is reviewing their dashboard while traveling and uses a laptop to monitor real-time metrics during a marketing campaign.

Given the user is logged into the dashboard on a laptop, when they apply changes to their selected widgets, then the dashboard must dynamically refresh to reflect these changes immediately without requiring a page reload.

An author accesses the platform using various devices to ensure their customized dashboard remains functional and usable.

Given the author customizes their dashboard on a tablet, when they access the dashboard on a smartphone and a desktop, then they should see the same widgets in a correctly formatted, responsive design on each device.

Users intend to view their dashboard in both portrait and landscape orientations on a tablet and need to ensure responsiveness.

Given the user rotates their tablet from portrait to landscape mode, when they view the dashboard, then all widgets should adjust dynamically to utilize the available space efficiently without any scrolling or distortion of information.

Data Visualization Options

User Story: As an independent publisher, I want to see my engagement metrics as graphs or charts so that I can quickly understand trends and make data-driven decisions for my projects.
Description: The requirement includes offering different data visualization options for each widget, such as graphs, charts, or numeric displays. This allows users to view their metrics in the format that is most understandable and actionable for them. By providing visual representation of data, users can quickly identify trends and make strategic decisions based on insights, improving the overall effectiveness of their marketing efforts and audience engagement strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects different visualization formats for their dashboard widgets.

Given a user logged into BookShelfHub, When they navigate to the dashboard and choose a widget, Then they should see an option to select between graphs, charts, or numeric displays for data visualization, and the selected format should be immediately applied to the widget.

User saves their preferred visualization settings for future sessions.

Given a user has customized the visualization format for a dashboard widget, When they click on the 'Save' button, Then the selected visualization settings should be stored, and upon the next session, the widget should reflect the saved format without any additional configuration required by the user.

User encounters and resolves a scenario where no visualization options are available for a widget.

Given a user is on the dashboard and selects a widget with no visualization options, When they attempt to view the visualization settings, Then they should receive a notification indicating that no visualization formats are available for the selected widget, and the user experience should guide them to available widgets.

User switches between different visualization options and verifies data accuracy.

Given a user has a widget displaying data in one format, When they switch the visualization option, Then the data should continue to accurately represent the underlying metrics regardless of which visualization format is selected, and the user should be able to validate the accuracy by comparing displayed data to raw metrics.

User uses tooltip functionality to understand visualization options better.

Given a user is on the dashboard and hovering over different visualization options, When they view tooltips, Then the tooltips should provide descriptive explanations for each visualization format, aiding users in making informed choices.

Widget Refresh Rate Settings

User Story: As an author, I want to control how often my metrics are updated so that I can choose to see real-time data without overwhelming my dashboard.
Description: Users should have the ability to set refresh rates for their dashboard widgets, determining how frequently the metrics are updated. This functionality ensures that users can receive real-time insights or choose less frequent updates based on their preferences and the specific nature of their engagement metrics. This feature enhances user control over the data display, improving the relevance and timeliness of information presented.
Acceptance Criteria: Widget Refresh Rate Adjustment by User Preferences

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the dashboard settings and select a widget, then they can set the refresh rate to either real-time (1 minute) or intervals of 5, 10, or 30 minutes, ensuring the selection is saved upon exit.

Real-time Data Update Validation

Given the user has set the widget refresh rate to real-time, when an audience engagement metric is updated in the system, then the widget should refresh automatically to display the latest data without needing a manual refresh by the user.

Fallback to Default Refresh Rate

Given the user has not customized the refresh rate for a widget, when they access their dashboard, then the widget defaults to a refresh rate of 10 minutes and this behavior is consistent for all non-customized widgets.

User Notification on Refresh Rate Change

Given the user has changed the refresh rate for a widget, when they navigate away from the settings page, then they should receive a confirmation notification indicating that their preferred refresh rate has been successfully applied.

Error Handling for Invalid Refresh Rate Input

Given the user is on the refresh rate settings page, when they attempt to set an invalid refresh rate (e.g., 0 or negative values), then the system should display an error message and prevent the user from saving the changes until a valid value is entered.

Multiple Widget Synchronization

Given the user has multiple widgets on their dashboard, when they adjust the refresh rate for one widget, then the refresh rates for other widgets should remain independent unless modified by the user.

Tutorial for Dashboard Customization

User Story: As a new user, I want to have a tutorial on customizing my dashboard so that I can quickly learn how to utilize all the features available and optimize my experience.
Description: A guided tutorial should be provided to help users understand how to effectively use the customizable dashboard features. This tutorial will include step-by-step instructions on selecting, configuring, and arranging widgets, along with explanations of the various metrics available. By educating users on how to utilize the dashboard fully, we can enhance user satisfaction and adoption rates, ensuring that users can leverage the potential of the platform to its fullest.
Acceptance Criteria: User engages with the tutorial for dashboard customization to learn how to add and arrange widgets based on their specific project metrics.

Given the user is on the dashboard customization tutorial page, when they follow the step-by-step instructions to add a widget, then the widget should be successfully added to their dashboard.

User reviews the tutorial content to understand different audience engagement metrics and their implications.

Given the user accesses the tutorial, when they navigate to the section describing audience engagement metrics, then they should be able to view clear explanations and examples for each metric.

User completes the tutorial and is able to successfully customize the dashboard with the knowledge gained from the tutorial.

Given the user has completed the tutorial, when they customize their dashboard, then the dashboard should reflect the changes in real-time with the selected widgets properly displayed.

User attempts to rearrange widgets on their dashboard after completing the tutorial.

Given the user has finished the tutorial and is on their dashboard, when they drag and drop widgets to rearrange them, then the changes should be saved and reflected on their dashboard immediately.

User seeks help while utilizing the dashboard customization after the tutorial to ensure they have understood the instructions correctly.

Given the user is using the dashboard, when they click on the help icon, then they should see options for additional resources, including a FAQ section and contact support.

User evaluates the effectiveness of the tutorial on their ability to customize their dashboard.

Given the user has completed the tutorial, when they rate their experience on a scale of 1 to 5, then the average rating should be captured and analyzed for improvement opportunities.

Competitor Benchmarking Tool

This feature allows users to compare their audience engagement metrics against those of similar authors or books in their genre. By understanding how they stack up against the competition, authors and publishers can identify areas for improvement and leverage successful strategies observed in their peers.

Requirements

Audience Engagement Metrics Comparison

User Story: As an independent author, I want to compare my audience engagement metrics with those of my peers so that I can identify successful strategies and improve my marketing efforts.
Description: The Audience Engagement Metrics Comparison requirement enables users to view and analyze their audience engagement metrics side by side with those of selected peers in their genre. Users can select various metrics such as reader reviews, social media engagement, and sales figures, providing insights into where they stand relative to similar authors and books. This comprehensive analysis will help identify strengths and weaknesses in their marketing and audience interaction strategies. The tool will include visual graphs and charts to facilitate easy understanding and actionable insights, integrating with existing data sources in the BookShelfHub to provide a seamless user experience.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects three similar authors from the genre list and requests a comparison of audience engagement metrics.

Given the user has selected three authors when they request a comparison then the system displays a side-by-side comparison of audience engagement metrics for the selected authors, including reader reviews, social media engagement, and sales figures.

User generates a visual graph of their audience engagement metrics compared to selected peers.

Given the user has input their engagement metrics when the graph is generated then it should accurately reflect their metrics alongside the selected peers' metrics in a user-friendly format.

User clicks on a specific metric to gain detailed insights and actionable strategies based on the comparison.

Given the user has clicked on a specific audience engagement metric when the detailed insights are displayed then it should show suggested strategies based on successful peers' approaches and their own performance analysis.

User measures the impact of implemented strategies on their engagement metrics over time.

Given the user has implemented new strategies when they review their engagement metrics after one month then the system should show the trends indicating any improvement or decline in their engagement metrics compared to previous data.

User accesses the tool on different devices to compare engagement metrics seamlessly.

Given the user is using a mobile or tablet device when they access the audience engagement metrics comparison tool then the interface should be responsive and display all metrics accurately without loss of functionality.

User saves their selected authors and metrics for future comparisons.

Given the user has selected authors and metrics when they choose to save the selection then the system should store their preferences securely for easy access in future sessions.

Customizable Benchmarking Reports

User Story: As a publisher, I want to create customizable benchmarking reports so that I can focus on metrics that matter most to my business and strategize effectively.
Description: The Customizable Benchmarking Reports requirement allows users to generate tailored benchmarking reports that focus on specific data points and time periods. Users can select from various performance metrics, including engagement rates and sales trends, and filter results based on genres or similar titles. This feature will enable authors and publishers to extract relevant insights pertaining to their specific context and goals, ultimately aiding in strategic planning and marketing decisions. The reports will be exportable in multiple formats and can include recommendations based on the analysis to enhance their competitive edge.
Acceptance Criteria: User generates a benchmarking report focusing on engagement rates over the last quarter for their book compared to top-performing titles in their genre.

Given the user selects engagement rates and the last quarter as the time frame, when the user submits the request, then a benchmarking report must be generated that displays comparative metrics with a clear visual representation.

User customizes a benchmarking report by filtering results based on specific genres and sales trends for the past year.

Given the user chooses specific genres and sales trends, when the user applies the filters, then the report should update to reflect only metrics relevant to the specified filters before generation.

User exports the customized benchmarking report in multiple formats including PDF and Excel after generating the report.

Given the user has successfully generated a benchmarking report, when the user selects the export option, then the report should be available for download in both PDF and Excel formats, ensuring no data loss in the export process.

User requests recommendations based on the benchmarking analysis included in the generated report.

Given the user has generated a benchmarking report, when the user requests recommendations, then the report must include actionable insights that are relevant to improving engagement and sales for the specific context of the user's findings.

User views and compares their audience engagement metrics in the benchmarking report with those of similar authors.

Given the user has generated a benchmarking report, when the user views the report, then it must display their metrics alongside a selection of similar authors' metrics with clear comparisons highlighted for ease of understanding.

User saves a customized benchmarking report with specific parameters for future access.

Given the user has generated a report with specific customization, when the user selects the save option, then the customized report must be stored with identifiable tags for easy retrieval later.

Integration with Social Media Analytics

User Story: As an author, I want to see engagement metrics from my social media channels integrated with BookShelfHub so that I can have a full picture of my audience's engagement across platforms.
Description: The Integration with Social Media Analytics requirement allows for the collection and comparison of audience engagement metrics not only from BookShelfHub but also sourced from various social media platforms. This integration will provide a more comprehensive view of how an author's or publisher's promotions are performing across different channels. By providing insights across platforms, users can better understand their audiences’ preferences and behaviors, optimizing their engagement strategies accordingly. The integration will support major social media channels like Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram, thereby enriching the data available for benchmarking.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of Social Media Analytics for Audience Engagement Metrics Comparison

Given that a user integrates their social media accounts with BookShelfHub, when the user accesses the Competitor Benchmarking Tool, then they can view audience engagement metrics from Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram side-by-side with their own metrics.

Real-time Data Collection from Social Media Platforms

Given that the user has connected their social media accounts, when the user checks the audience engagement metrics dashboard, then the system should display updated metrics that are no more than 5 minutes old.

Historical Metrics Tracking

Given that the integration with social media analytics is completed, when the user navigates to the historical data section of the metrics dashboard, then the user should be able to view audience engagement metrics for the past 12 months for each social media platform.

Engagement Comparison with Genre Peers

Given that the user has access to benchmarking data, when the user enters their genre-specific filters, then the system should display comparative engagement metrics from similar authors or books.

Customized Alerts for Engagement Changes

Given that the user has set thresholds for engagement metrics, when the metrics exceed or fall below these thresholds, then the system should send automated alerts to the user via email.

Mobile Accessibility of Social Media Analytics

Given that the user is logged into BookShelfHub via mobile, when the user accesses the social media analytics section, then all engagement metrics must be clearly visible and accessible on their mobile device.

Peer Selection Mechanism

User Story: As a publisher, I want to select my peers based on specific criteria so that I can benchmark my performance against the most relevant competition to my work.
Description: The Peer Selection Mechanism requirement gives users the capability to define and select their peer group based on various criteria such as genre, audience size, and geographical location. This feature will enable authors and publishers to customize their benchmarking comparisons to include only the most relevant competitors. By defining their peer group accurately, users can ensure that their analyses and comparisons are more meaningful and tailored to their specific context, resulting in more actionable insights and improved marketing decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects specific genres for peer comparison before analyzing engagement metrics.

Given that the user wants to benchmark their audience engagement, when they access the Peer Selection Mechanism, then they should be able to filter peers by one or more genres and see an updated list of authors or books that fit the selected criteria.

User filters peers by audience size before generating a benchmarking report.

Given that the user is interested in comparing their engagement metrics with authors of similar audience sizes, when they use the audience size filter, then the list of peers should only include authors or books whose audience sizes fall within the specified range.

User compares their selected peer group to see engagement metrics side-by-side.

Given the user has selected their peer group based on defined criteria, when they view the benchmarking results, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of engagement metrics for their selected peers, highlighting differences and similarities.

User adjusts geographical location criteria when selecting peers for benchmarking.

Given that the user wants to refine their analysis by geographical relevance, when they set a geographical filter, then the system should update the peer group to include only authors or books from the specified locations.

User saves their peer selection criteria for future benchmarking sessions.

Given that the user has defined a specific peer group, when they choose to save their selection criteria, then the system should allow them to save and label the peer group for easy retrieval in future sessions.

User views a tutorial on how to effectively use the Peer Selection Mechanism.

Given that the user is new to the platform, when they access the Peer Selection Mechanism, then they should have the option to view a tutorial or guide that explains how to utilize the feature effectively.

Visual Data Representation

User Story: As an author, I want interactive visual representations of my benchmarking metrics so that I can quickly understand my engagement performance and share insights with my team.
Description: The Visual Data Representation requirement entails the creation of intuitive and interactive data visualization tools that help users understand their comparative metrics effortlessly. This includes the use of graphs, bar charts, and trend lines to illustrate changes over time, differences in audience engagement among peers, and areas needing improvement. Enhancing the analytical experience with visual aids will help users quickly garner insights, making it easier to communicate findings to internal stakeholders and pivot marketing strategies based on solid data.
Acceptance Criteria: User Interaction with Visual Data Tools

Given an author uses the competitor benchmarking tool, when they select a competing author or book to analyze, then the interactive graphs and charts display relevant audience engagement metrics such as views, shares, and comments for both options side by side.

Exporting Data Visualizations

Given an author has generated visual data representations, when they select the export option, then the system should allow them to download the visualizations in common formats like PNG and PDF with all data accurately represented.

Mobile Responsiveness of Visual Tools

Given an author accesses the competitor benchmarking tool on a mobile device, when they navigate to the visual data section, then the graphs and charts should automatically adjust to fit the screen without losing readability or functionality.

User Customization of Data Views

Given a user is within the visual data tool section, when they apply filters to view specific metrics such as a date range or a particular competitor, then the visualizations should refresh to reflect the applied filters accurately.

Trend Analysis Over Time

Given the author wants to visualize audience engagement trends, when they select the option to view metrics over a specified time frame, then the line charts should accurately depict changes in engagement metrics over that period.

Sharing Insights with Stakeholders

Given an author generates a report from the visual data tools, when they choose to share this report, then the system should provide an option to send the report via email with all visuals and analysis intact.

Tool Performance under Load

Given multiple authors are using the visual data representation simultaneously, when they generate reports, then the system should maintain a response time of under 3 seconds for data rendering.

Actionable Insights Recommendations

Based on the engagement metrics tracked, this feature provides tailored recommendations for future marketing actions and content adjustments. By highlighting what strategies have previously yielded positive results, this tool empowers users to make informed decisions that enhance their marketing and engagement strategies.

Requirements

Engagement Metrics Dashboard

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want a comprehensive dashboard that displays engagement metrics so that I can easily track performance and optimize our marketing strategies effectively.
Description: The Engagement Metrics Dashboard requirement focuses on providing users with an intuitive and visually appealing interface that consolidates key engagement metrics in real-time. This dashboard will display essential data points such as user interactions, content reach, audience demographics, and engagement rates in a clear and actionable format. The dashboard will enable users to monitor their marketing performance easily, identify trends, and make informed decisions based on data-driven insights. Its seamless integration with existing analytics tools enhances the overall user experience, giving users the ability to visualize and analyze engagement patterns at a glance.
Acceptance Criteria: As a user of BookShelfHub, I want to access the Engagement Metrics Dashboard to see a real-time overview of how my content is performing across various platforms.

Given that I am logged into my BookShelfHub account, when I navigate to the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, then I should see a visually engaging interface displaying user interactions, content reach, audience demographics, and engagement rates.

As a marketing manager, I want to filter the engagement metrics by date range to analyze the performance of my campaigns over a specific period.

Given that I am on the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when I select a specific date range from the filtering options, then the displayed metrics should update to reflect only the data relevant to that selected period.

As a user, I would like to export the engagement metrics data for further analysis in a spreadsheet application.

Given that I am viewing the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when I click on the 'Export' button, then I should receive a downloadable CSV file containing all the displayed engagement metrics data.

As an author, I want to receive notifications for any significant changes in engagement metrics so I can take timely action.

Given that I am viewing the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when there is a significant increase or decrease in engagement metrics, then I should receive an automated notification indicating the change and its context.

As a user, I want to compare engagement metrics for different content pieces side by side to evaluate which strategies are more effective.

Given that I am on the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when I select multiple content pieces to compare, then I should see a side-by-side comparison in a clear format, highlighting differences in user interactions and engagement rates.

As a user, I want the Engagement Metrics Dashboard to provide actionable insights based on the engagement metrics displayed to improve my marketing strategy.

Given that I am on the Engagement Metrics Dashboard, when I review the metrics, then I should see tailored recommendations at the bottom of the page that are generated based on the engagement data I am viewing.

Automated Recommendation Engine

User Story: As a content creator, I want automated recommendations based on past engagement data so that I can create more effective marketing strategies that engage my audience.
Description: The Automated Recommendation Engine requirement aims to utilize machine learning algorithms to analyze user engagement data and generate tailored recommendations for future marketing actions and content adjustments. By processing historical data of previously successful strategies, this feature will provide actionable insights such as suggested content types, optimal posting times, and targeted audience segments. Its integration with the platform's analytics will empower users to enhance their marketing campaigns based on proven results, ultimately leading to improved audience engagement and content performance.
Acceptance Criteria: As a marketing manager for an independent publisher, I want to receive recommended content types for future campaigns based on past engagement metrics to improve our marketing effectiveness.

Given past engagement data, when I access the Automated Recommendation Engine, then I should see at least three suggested content types that have historically resulted in high engagement rates.

As an author, I need to know the optimal posting times for promoting my new book based on previous successful strategies to maximize visibility.

Given a set of historical posting times and their corresponding engagement levels, when I query the recommendation engine, then it should provide me with at least two optimal posting times based on past performance.

As a small publishing house, we want to identify targeted audience segments for our upcoming marketing campaign based on previous successful demographics to enhance our outreach.

Given the historical engagement metrics, when I utilize the recommendation engine, then I should receive a list of at least three targeted audience segments that correlate with prior successful campaigns.

As a marketing analyst, I want to evaluate the effectiveness of the recommendations provided by the engine to ensure they enhance our current strategies.

Given a recent marketing campaign, when I compare the engagement rates before and after implementing the recommended actions, then there should be a measurable improvement of at least 15% in engagement metrics.

As a product manager, I need to ensure that the recommendation engine consistently updates its suggestions based on new engagement metrics to remain relevant.

Given the integration with real-time analytics, when new engagement data is available, then the recommendation engine should refresh its suggestions within one hour to reflect the latest trends.

As a user, I want to understand the rationale behind each recommendation provided by the engine to make informed decisions on marketing actions.

Given a set of recommendations, when I click on a specific suggestion, then I should see a detailed explanation that includes supporting historical data and engagement metrics.

As a user of BookShelfHub, I want to ensure that the recommendation engine is easy to navigate and interact with, allowing me to quickly access insights.

Given the user interface, when I access the recommendation engine, then I should be able to view recommendations within three clicks or less without encountering any error messages.

Content Adjustment Alerts

User Story: As a publisher, I want to receive alerts when my content engagement drops so that I can take immediate action to improve performance and keep my audience engaged.
Description: The Content Adjustment Alerts requirement is designed to notify users when specific engagement metrics fall below preset thresholds. This feature will help users identify underperforming content or marketing tactics in a timely manner, allowing for swift adjustments to be made to improve performance. Alerts will be customizable based on user preference, ensuring that each user receives relevant notifications that align with their goals. The timely alerts will help maintain optimal audience engagement levels and will be integrated within the platform’s existing notification systems for a cohesive user experience.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification alerting them of underperforming content based on engagement metrics dropping below preset thresholds.

Given a user has established engagement thresholds for their content, when the engagement metrics fall below these thresholds, then the user receives a notification alerting them to the specific content that requires adjustment.

User can customize their notification settings for content adjustment alerts.

Given a user is in the notification settings section, when they select specific metrics to monitor and define their thresholds, then those preferences are saved and used for future content adjustment alerts.

User views a historical report of content performance alongside alert notifications.

Given a user receives a content adjustment alert, when they access their performance report, then they can see a data visualization of engagement metrics over time for the alerted content.

User is able to dismiss an alert notification once they have acknowledged it.

Given a user has received an adjustment alert notification, when they select dismiss on the alert, then the alert is removed from their notification list and marked as acknowledged.

User can select the frequency of alert notifications (immediate, daily summary, or weekly summary).

Given a user is customizing their notification settings, when they choose their preferred frequency for receiving alerts, then the system updates and honors this setting for all future notifications.

User receives alerts for multiple content pieces simultaneously when thresholds are breached.

Given multiple pieces of content fall below their respective engagement thresholds, when the notifications are triggered, then the user receives a consolidated alert informing them of all underperforming content at once.

User can reactivate notification alerts after previously disabling them.

Given a user has disabled content adjustment alerts, when they navigate to the notification settings and choose to reactivate alerts, then the content adjustment alerts are enabled again for their account settings.

User Feedback Collection Tool

User Story: As a marketer, I want a tool to collect user feedback on my content so that I can understand their preferences and improve future marketing efforts accordingly.
Description: The User Feedback Collection Tool features a streamlined process for gathering feedback from audience members regarding content preferences and marketing effectiveness. This requirement involves creating customizable surveys and feedback forms that can be easily distributed through various channels, including email and social media. The collected data will be integrated into the engagement metrics dashboard for a holistic view of audience sentiment and preferences. This functionality is essential for continuously refining marketing strategies based on direct user input, ensuring a more tailored approach to content marketing.
Acceptance Criteria: User initiates a feedback collection process by creating a survey within the User Feedback Collection Tool and selects distribution channels such as email and social media.

Given the user has accessed the User Feedback Collection Tool, When they create a survey and select distribution channels, Then the survey should be successfully generated and shared through the selected channels.

After distributing the feedback surveys, user accesses the engagement metrics dashboard to view the collected feedback data.

Given the user has distributed surveys, When they navigate to the engagement metrics dashboard, Then they should see the collected feedback data integrated and displayed in a user-friendly format.

User customizes survey questions to target specific audience preferences and marketing effectiveness.

Given the user is on the survey creation page, When they create and customize survey questions, Then the tool should allow at least five different question types and save the customized survey for later use.

User analyzes the patterns and trends in collected feedback data to adjust their marketing strategies.

Given the user has access to feedback data, When they analyze the metrics, Then they should receive actionable insights on at least three areas for marketing strategy improvement based on the feedback analysis.

User utilizes the feedback collection tool to conduct A/B testing with two different surveys for the same audience.

Given the user has created two distinct surveys, When they distribute both surveys to the same audience segment, Then the tool should track and report which survey yields higher engagement and satisfaction rates.

User reviews the history of distributed surveys and feedback responses for effectiveness assessment.

Given the user has accessed the survey history log, When they review past surveys, Then they should see the completion rates and effectiveness scores for each survey, enabling easy comparison.

Performance Comparison Reports

User Story: As a project manager, I want to generate reports comparing different marketing campaigns so that I can identify the most effective strategies and optimize our marketing efforts.
Description: The Performance Comparison Reports requirement focuses on enabling users to generate comparative reports that evaluate the effectiveness of different marketing strategies against one another over set time periods. This feature will allow users to analyze the success rates of various campaigns, identify best practices, and make data-driven decisions moving forward. Integration with the existing analytics system will ensure comprehensive insights, enabling users to visualize performance trends that can guide future marketing efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to generate a performance comparison report to evaluate the marketing campaigns they ran over the last quarter.

Given the user has selected the report generation option, When the user selects the time period and marketing campaigns to compare, Then a comparative report should be generated displaying metrics such as engagement rates, conversion rates, and revenue for each campaign side by side.

User accesses the performance comparison reports to identify which marketing strategy performed the best last month.

Given the user has access to the performance reports, When they filter the data for the previous month, Then the system should display a list of all marketing strategies with a clear indication of their success metrics, highlighting the most effective strategy at the top.

User attempts to visualize the trends of their marketing campaigns over the past six months using the performance comparison reports.

Given the user has input the desired time frame of six months, When the report is generated, Then it should include visual graphs showcasing the trends in engagement and sales for each marketing campaign during that time.

User seeks to save and download the generated performance comparison report for offline analysis.

Given the report has been successfully generated, When the user clicks on the 'Download' button, Then a PDF version of the report should be created and downloaded to their local device without any loss of data or formatting.

User wants to share the generated report with team members for collaborative discussion.

Given the report is ready, When the user selects the 'Share' feature, Then the report link should be sent to the specified team members via email with correct access permissions.

User requires the system to notify them when new performance comparison reports are ready for review after scheduled marketing campaigns.

Given that a marketing campaign has concluded, When the user is logged into the system, Then they should receive a notification alerting them that new performance comparison reports are available for review.

Customizable Marketing Strategy Templates

User Story: As a small publisher, I want customizable marketing strategy templates so that I can save time and ensure I am following proven best practices in my campaigns.
Description: The Customizable Marketing Strategy Templates requirement will provide users with a library of templates that can be tailored to fit specific marketing goals and campaigns. This feature will include best practice guidelines and examples based on successful past campaigns, simplifying the creation of new marketing strategies. Users will be able to modify elements such as target audience, content types, and distribution methods within the templates. This functionality will streamline the marketing planning process and enhance user creativity by providing a structured starting point.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the library of customizable marketing strategy templates to create a new campaign for a book launch.

Given the user is on the template selection page, When they filter templates by 'Book Launch', Then they should see a list of relevant templates tailored for launching a book.

User selects a marketing strategy template and modifies elements such as target audience, content types, and distribution methods.

Given a user selects a template, When they customize fields for target audience and content types, Then those changes should save successfully and reflect in the preview of the marketing strategy.

User wants to view best practice guidelines and examples associated with a specific template.

Given the user is viewing a marketing strategy template, When they click on the 'Best Practices' section, Then they should see a list of guidelines and examples related to that template.

User attempts to create a new marketing strategy template from scratch based on previous successful campaigns.

Given the user selects 'Create New Template', When they input elements such as title, objectives, and strategies, Then the system should validate those inputs and allow them to save the new template successfully.

User shares a customized marketing strategy template with team members for collaboration.

Given the user has customized a marketing strategy template, When they click 'Share', Then team members should receive an email with access to the shared template and permission settings should apply correctly.

User accesses analytics to evaluate the effectiveness of a previously implemented marketing strategy based on the selected template.

Given the user is in the analytics section, When they select a marketing strategy template, Then they should see performance metrics and insights specific to strategies used in that template.

User wants to clone an existing customizable marketing strategy template to adapt it for a different campaign.

Given the user selects an existing template, When they click on 'Clone', Then a new copy of the template should appear in their library, ready for customization without altering the original.

Launch Strategy Optimizer

This feature analyzes various launch strategies by leveraging historical sales data and market trends. It provides users with tailored recommendations for optimal timing, promotional activities, and pricing strategies, ensuring authors can confidently execute their book launches for maximum impact.

Requirements

Data Analysis Engine

User Story: As an author, I want to receive tailored insights and recommendations for my book launch strategy so that I can maximize my book's visibility and sales potential.
Description: The Data Analysis Engine is a core component that processes and analyzes historical sales data and market trends to provide actionable insights. It should integrate seamlessly with the BookShelfHub platform, pulling in relevant data from various sources. The engine will utilize advanced algorithms to identify patterns, correlations, and insights that inform launch strategy decisions. By doing so, it will empower authors and publishers to make data-driven decisions regarding their book launches. Implementation of this engine is critical for delivering tailored recommendations and ensuring that users can optimize their launch strategies effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of Data Analysis Engine with BookShelfHub platform

Given that the Data Analysis Engine is integrated with BookShelfHub, When relevant historical sales data and market trends are fed into the engine, Then the engine should process the data and provide actionable insights within 2 seconds.

User access to analyzed insights

Given that the user has logged into BookShelfHub, When they navigate to the Launch Strategy Optimizer section, Then they should be able to view a dashboard displaying the insights generated by the Data Analysis Engine.

Identifying patterns and correlations

Given that the Data Analysis Engine has access to historical sales data, When the analysis is conducted, Then the engine should identify at least three significant patterns or correlations that inform launch strategy decisions for the user.

Tailored recommendations for users

Given that the Data Analysis Engine has completed its analysis, When the user requests launch strategy recommendations, Then the engine should provide at least five tailored strategies based on the identified trends and user input.

User interface for data summary

Given that the Data Analysis Engine has processed the data, When the summary reports are generated, Then users should be able to easily understand the summary report layout, including graphical representation of key metrics such as trends, insights, and recommendations.

System performance under load

Given that multiple users are querying the Data Analysis Engine simultaneously, When each user initiates a data request, Then the system performance should remain below threshold of 3 seconds response time for each query request.

Error handling for data input

Given that the data input contains errors, When the Data Analysis Engine attempts to process this data, Then it should accurately identify the errors and provide a user-friendly message detailing the issues found.

Recommendation Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want to have an easy-to-use dashboard that presents me with clear recommendations for my book launch strategy so that I can implement actions quickly and efficiently.
Description: The Recommendation Dashboard is an intuitive interface that displays personalized recommendations for launch timing, promotional activities, and pricing strategies. This component will pull from the Data Analysis Engine and present insights in a user-friendly manner, including visualizations and actionable suggestions. The dashboard sits at the forefront of the user experience, allowing authors and publishers to easily digest complex data and make informed decisions at a glance. This feature is essential for streamlining the decision-making process and ensuring that users can quickly adapt their strategies based on real-time data.
Acceptance Criteria: User visits the Recommendation Dashboard to obtain insights for their upcoming book launch.

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Recommendation Dashboard, then they should see personalized recommendations for launch timing, promotional activities, and pricing strategies relevant to their specific book.

User interacts with the visualizations presented on the Recommendation Dashboard to understand trends and recommendations.

Given the user is on the Recommendation Dashboard, when they hover over a visualization, then a tooltip should display detailed data points and insights supporting the recommendations.

User receives notifications about updates to their recommendations based on new data inputs or changing market trends.

Given the user has opted in for notifications, when any significant change occurs in the data affecting their recommendations, then the user should receive a push notification alerting them to review their dashboard.

User explores different scenarios based on modifying pricing strategies on the Recommendation Dashboard.

Given the user accesses the pricing strategy section of the dashboard, when they adjust the suggested price range sliders, then the visualizations and recommendations should dynamically update to reflect the new pricing input.

User generates a report from the Recommendation Dashboard to share with their team for collaborative decision making.

Given the user is on the Recommendation Dashboard, when they click on the 'Generate Report' button, then a PDF report containing all current recommendations and visualizations should be produced for download.

User reviews the historical performance data linked to the current recommendations on the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Recommendation Dashboard, when they click on the historical performance option, then a new section should open displaying key metrics and analytics from past launches relevant to their current recommendations.

User customizes the layout of the Recommendation Dashboard for personalized use.

Given the user is in the settings mode of the Recommendation Dashboard, when they rearrange or hide specific widgets, then their layout customization should be saved for future sessions.

User Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As an author, I want to provide feedback on the effectiveness of the recommendations I received after my book launch so that the system can improve and better serve future users.
Description: The User Feedback Mechanism is a vital feature that enables users to provide feedback on the effectiveness of the recommendations they receive. This feedback will be collected through a simple form or rating system after book launches, analyzing user satisfaction and the outcomes of followed recommendations. The mechanism will feed into the Data Analysis Engine, allowing continuous improvement and refinement of recommendation algorithms based on real-world effectiveness. This feature ensures that the BookShelfHub platform evolves based on user experiences and needs, enhancing overall user satisfaction and trust.
Acceptance Criteria: User submits feedback after utilizing the Launch Strategy Optimizer for their recent book launch.

Given the user has accessed the Launch Strategy Optimizer, when they complete a book launch, they should be prompted to submit feedback through a simple form within the platform, reflecting on the effectiveness of the recommendations provided.

Feedback submitted by the user must be successfully recorded in the system for analysis.

Given the user has completed the feedback form, when they submit their feedback, then the system must store the feedback in the database without errors and confirm successful submission to the user.

Users should be able to rate the effectiveness of the recommendations on a scale of 1 to 5.

Given the user is submitting feedback, when they reach the rating section, then they should have the option to select a rating from 1 to 5, with 1 being 'not effective' and 5 being 'very effective', and an option for additional comments.

Users can view a summary of their feedback submissions for their book launches at any time.

Given the user is logged into their BookShelfHub account, when they navigate to the feedback section, then they should be able to see a summary of all their previous feedback submissions, including ratings and comments for each launch.

The Data Analysis Engine should periodically analyze the feedback collected to identify trends and areas for improvement.

Given feedback has been collected over a specified period, when the Data Analysis Engine runs its analysis, then it should identify at least three significant patterns in user satisfaction and present this information in a report format for review.

Integration with Social Media Platforms

User Story: As an author, I want to post my book launch announcements on social media from within the platform so that I can easily reach my audience and increase my book's visibility.
Description: The Integration with Social Media Platforms feature allows users to easily share their book launch details and promotional activities on various social media networks directly from the platform. This functionality will include scheduling posts, creating engaging content, and tracking engagement metrics post-launch. By linking the BookShelfHub platform with social media channels, users can enhance their marketing reach and connect with a broader audience during their book launch, ultimately increasing visibility and potential book sales. This requirement is crucial for maximizing the impact of launch strategies across diverse marketing channels.
Acceptance Criteria: User schedules a social media post for their book launch event from the BookShelfHub platform.

Given the user has created a book launch event and chosen a social media platform, when they schedule the post, then the post should appear on the selected social media platform at the designated time, with all specified content intact.

User creates engaging content for their social media promotion directly within BookShelfHub.

Given the user has access to the content creation tool, when they create and save a promotional post, then the content should be formatted correctly and include any links or images specified by the user.

User analyzes engagement metrics of their social media posts after launch using the BookShelfHub platform.

Given the user has posted the launch promotion on social media, when they access the engagement metrics report, then the report should display accurate data regarding likes, shares, comments, and overall reach of the posts.

User links their social media accounts to the BookShelfHub platform.

Given the user is on the integration settings page, when they connect their social media accounts, then the platform should confirm the successful linking of each account with visual indicators and provide options for managing these connections.

User receives recommendations for optimal posting times based on historical data.

Given the user is preparing to launch their book, when they access the Launch Strategy Optimizer, then the platform should present tailored recommendations for posting times that maximize audience engagement, based on previous launch data.

User wants to track the performance of their posts after the launch.

Given the user has launched their book and promotional posts are live, when they check the tracking dashboard, then they should be able to view real-time statistics on post performance, including engagement metrics and demographics of interacting users.

Analytics Report Generation

User Story: As a publisher, I want to generate detailed analytics reports after my book launch so that I can assess the effectiveness of my strategies and improve for future launches.
Description: The Analytics Report Generation feature will enable users to generate detailed reports post-launch, summarizing key metrics such as sales performance, audience engagement, and promotional effectiveness. These reports will pull data from the Data Analysis Engine and present it in a comprehensive, readable format. Users can customize reports based on specific parameters, helping them analyze the success of their launch strategies and make informed decisions for future launches. The feature is essential for fostering continuous improvement and learning within the user community.
Acceptance Criteria: Analytics Report Generation for a New Book Launch

Given a user has launched a new book and has accessed the Analytics Report Generation feature, when they input the relevant parameters such as launch date and promotional activities, then the system should generate a report summarizing key metrics including total sales, audience engagement metrics, and promotional effectiveness within 5 minutes of the request.

Customization of Analytics Reports

Given a user is in the Analytics Report Generation feature, when they select customization options such as date range, specific metrics to include, and layout preferences, then the system should save these preferences and generate a report that reflects the user's selections without errors.

Exporting Analytics Reports

Given a user has successfully generated an Analytics Report, when they choose to export the report in PDF or Excel format, then the system should create a downloadable file that maintains the formatting and includes all data accurately as presented in the report preview.

Integration with Data Analysis Engine

Given the Analytics Report Generation feature is active, when the user requests a report, then the system should pull real-time data from the Data Analysis Engine ensuring that all reported metrics are up-to-date and reflective of the latest sales and engagement data.

User Accessibility and Support

Given a user navigates to the Analytics Report Generation section, when they require assistance or need clarification on any feature, then a help guide or tooltips should be available to them within the interface, ensuring they can easily understand how to utilize the feature effectively.

Performance Tracking Over Time

Given a user has generated multiple reports over several book launches, when they view their report history, then the system should allow them to compare metrics over time, displaying trends in sales performance and engagement clearly in a graphical format.

Feedback Mechanism for Report Generation

Given a user has used the Analytics Report Generation, when they complete a report, then they should be prompted to provide feedback on the feature's usability and effectiveness, which should be stored for future improvements in the system.

In-app Tutorial for Launch Strategies

User Story: As a new author, I want to have access to tutorials that guide me through the use of the platform's features for my book launch strategy so that I can feel confident in implementing them effectively.
Description: The In-app Tutorial for Launch Strategies is designed to guide users, especially first-time authors, through the process of utilizing the platform’s features effectively for their book launches. This feature will provide step-by-step instructions, tips, and best practices for leveraging the recommendations, dashboard, feedback mechanisms, and social media integration. The tutorial ensures users gain confidence and competence in executing their launches, leading to higher satisfaction and engagement with the platform. It's crucial for onboarding new users and promoting the successful use of the feature set.
Acceptance Criteria: In-app Tutorial Navigation for New Users

Given a first-time user on the BookShelfHub platform, when they access the Launch Strategy Optimizer feature, then the in-app tutorial should automatically display with an easy-to-follow step-by-step guide to using the feature effectively.

Content Clarity and Effectiveness of the Tutorial

Given the in-app tutorial is displayed, when the user completes the tutorial prompts, then 90% or more of the users should report that the content is clear, effective, and easy to understand through a post-tutorial survey.

Feedback Mechanism Integration

Given the in-app tutorial, when users complete the tutorial and provide feedback, then the collected feedback should be reflected in a central database for review and further improvement within 24 hours.

Social Media Integration Guidance

Given the tutorial is in use, when a user reaches the section on social media integration, then they should see practical examples and links to relevant resources for effectively promoting their book on social media.

Tutorial Completion Tracking

Given that a user interacts with the in-app tutorial, when they finish the entire tutorial, then their user profile should reflect completion of the tutorial, allowing for targeted follow-up assistance if needed.

Accessibility Standards Compliance for the Tutorial

Given the in-app tutorial, when it is displayed, then it must meet WCAG 2.1 AA accessibility standards, ensuring users with disabilities can effectively engage with all tutorial content.

Integration of Tips and Best Practices

Given the tutorial is presented, when users navigate through the tips and best practices section, then at least five actionable insights should be offered that relate directly to the Launch Strategy Optimizer features.

Scenario Planning Tool

Users can create multiple launch scenarios by adjusting variables such as timing, budget, and marketing channels. The Scenario Planning Tool allows authors to visualize potential outcomes in a simulated environment, facilitating informed decision-making and risk management before the actual launch.

Requirements

Variable Adjustment Capabilities

User Story: As an author, I want to adjust variables like budget and timing in the Scenario Planning Tool so that I can simulate different launch scenarios and make informed decisions based on the potential outcomes.
Description: This requirement involves enabling users to adjust key variables such as timing, budget, and marketing channels within the Scenario Planning Tool. It allows users to experiment with different combinations and settings to gauge their potential impact on a book launch. By creating a flexible environment for input adjustments, authors can quickly generate multiple scenarios to find optimal strategies. This feature will significantly enhance decision-making and strategic planning during the book launch process.
Acceptance Criteria: User adjusts budget for a book launch in the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given the user is on the Scenario Planning Tool, when they adjust the budget variable, then the system should display potential changes in projected sales and expenses based on the new budget.

User modifies timing for a book launch within the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given the user is adjusting the timing variable, when they select a different launch date, then the tool should update the projected sales performance and marketing outreach accordingly.

User experiments with different marketing channel combinations in the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given the user is exploring marketing channels, when they select multiple channels, then the tool should simulate and display potential outcomes for audience engagement and sales increase for each combination.

User creates multiple scenarios to analyze optimal launch strategies.

Given the user has adjusted different variables for multiple scenarios, when they save these scenarios, then each scenario should be retrievable with all previous adjustments intact.

User evaluates potential risks associated with variable adjustments in the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given the user has adjusted various variables, when they request a risk assessment report, then the system should provide feedback on risks based on the current scenario settings.

User shares their adjusted scenarios with team members for collaboration.

Given the user has created a scenario, when they choose to share this scenario, then the selected team members should receive notification and access to view the scenario in real-time.

User resets variables to default settings in the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given the user has made several variable adjustments, when they initiate a reset to default settings, then all variables should revert to their original values without affecting saved scenarios.

Outcome Visualization

User Story: As a user, I want to visualize the potential outcomes of my launch scenarios so that I can understand the implications of my decisions and select the best strategy.
Description: This requirement pertains to the capability to visualize potential outcomes of various launch scenarios created using the Scenario Planning Tool. The visualization should graphically represent success metrics such as expected sales, audience reach, and ROI based on the adjusted variables. This feature will provide users with clear, comparative insights into potential outcomes, helping them to make better-informed strategies for their launches. It enhances clarity and dependency on analytical tools while optimizing marketing efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: User visualizes potential launch outcomes for three different scenarios using varying budget allocations and marketing strategies.

Given a user has created three launch scenarios with different variables, When the user requests outcome visualization, Then a graphical representation shows metrics like sales projections, audience reach, and ROI for each scenario side by side.

User adjusts the marketing channel variable in an existing scenario to see its impact on sales and audience reach.

Given a user modifies the marketing channel in a launch scenario, When the user refreshes the outcome visualization, Then the updated graph reflects the new sales projections and audience reach based on the adjusted channel.

User collaborates with team members to discuss varying scenarios and outcomes visualized by the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given a user shares the outcome visualization results with team members, When team members access the visualization, Then it should be viewable in real-time with the ability to leave comments on each scenario.

User wants to export the visualized outcome data for reporting purposes.

Given a user has generated outcome visualizations, When the user clicks the export button, Then the data is saved as a PDF report containing all graphical metrics and key insights from the visualization.

User requests to compare outcomes between two distinct launch scenarios for an easier decision-making process.

Given a user has two scenarios created, When the user selects 'compare scenarios,' Then the outcome visualization displays a comparative view highlighting differences in sales, audience reach, and ROI metrics.

Integrated Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want to have an integrated analytics dashboard that combines data from my scenario planning and actual performance metrics so that I can track progress and adjust my strategies in real-time.
Description: This requirement includes developing an integrated analytics dashboard that consolidates data from the Scenario Planning Tool alongside other performance indicators from the BookShelfHub platform. This dashboard will provide insights into user-defined metrics, historical data, and predictive analytics for upcoming book launches. By having an all-in-one analytics view, authors and publishers can track performance in real-time, integrating scenario planning insights with overall sales and marketing data for enhanced strategic decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: Dashboard Integration with Scenario Planning Tool Data

Given the user accesses the Integrated Analytics Dashboard, When they select a specific book launch scenario, Then the dashboard should display the corresponding data from the Scenario Planning Tool alongside historical performance metrics and predictive analytics.

Real-Time Data Updates

Given the user has applied changes in the Scenario Planning Tool, When they refresh the Integrated Analytics Dashboard, Then the dashboard must reflect the updated metrics within 30 seconds.

User-Defined Metrics Display

Given the user has customized their metrics in the dashboard settings, When they view the Integrated Analytics Dashboard, Then the dashboard should show these user-defined metrics clearly and accurately.

Performance Comparison Across Scenarios

Given the user has multiple scenarios created in the Scenario Planning Tool, When they view the Integrated Analytics Dashboard, Then there should be a feature to compare the performance metrics of the selected scenarios side by side.

Exportable Analytics Reports

Given the user is viewing the Integrated Analytics Dashboard, When they choose to export the data, Then the system should allow them to export the current dashboard view as a CSV or PDF file without loss of data quality.

Historical Data Access

Given the user is utilizing the Integrated Analytics Dashboard, When they request to view historical data for a specific time frame, Then the dashboard should display all relevant historical performance metrics for that period.

Scenario Comparison Features

User Story: As an author, I want to compare multiple launch scenarios side by side so that I can easily assess their differences and select the most viable option for my book launch.
Description: This requirement involves creating features that allow users to seamlessly compare different scenarios side by side. Users should be able to select multiple scenarios and analyze a comparative report that highlights key differences such as projected revenue, estimated costs, and associated risks. This functionality will support users in making data-driven decisions by providing a clear comparison, thereby reducing uncertainty and improving the quality of planning.
Acceptance Criteria: A user wants to compare multiple launch scenarios to evaluate the projected revenue for their book launches under different marketing strategies and budget allocations.

Given the user has created at least two distinct launch scenarios, when they select the scenarios for comparison, then a side-by-side comparison report should display projected revenue, estimated costs, and associated risks for each scenario.

An author is interested in understanding the impact of different budget allocations on the profitability of their upcoming book launch.

Given the user has input varying budget amounts for three different scenarios, when they request a comparison report, then the report should clearly show the profitability metrics for each scenario highlighted in the comparison.

A publisher needs to evaluate the risks associated with different book launch timelines and marketing strategies to make informed decisions.

Given multiple scenarios with varying timelines and marketing channels have been created, when the user compares these scenarios, then the system should indicate the associated risks and uncertainties of each scenario in the report.

An author wants to analyze the effects of adjusting their marketing channels on anticipated sales outcomes for their book launch.

Given the user has created scenarios with differing marketing channels, when they initiate a comparison, then the system should display the expected sales outcomes for each marketing channel clearly within the comparative report.

A small publishing house aims to gather insights into how their investment in various marketing channels influences overall launch success.

Given the user has defined several scenarios focusing on different marketing investments, when a comparison is generated, then the report should detail the potential ROI for all defined marketing channels across the selected scenarios.

A user wishes to see a visual representation of the differences between various launch scenarios to aid in their decision-making process.

Given multiple scenarios are selected for comparison, when the user requests for a visual comparison, then the system should generate an intuitive visual chart that highlights the key differences among the scenarios effectively.

An author needs to compare the outcomes of launching their book in different seasons to identify the best time for their launch.

Given the user has created scenarios for different launch seasons, when the scenarios are compared, then the report should distinctly feature performance indicators like market conditions and audience engagement specific to each season.

User Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As a user, I want to provide feedback on the Scenario Planning Tool so that my suggestions can help improve the features and functionalities for future updates.
Description: This requirement focuses on implementing a user feedback mechanism within the Scenario Planning Tool. Users will have the option to provide feedback on the scenarios generated, usability of the tool, and overall experience. Collecting user feedback will be crucial for iterative improvements and updates to the tool, ensuring it meets user needs effectively. This will help in making informed decisions regarding future enhancements and addressing any potential issues users face.
Acceptance Criteria: User provides feedback on generated launch scenarios using a feedback form available within the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given a user has created a launch scenario, when they access the feedback form and submit their comments, then the system must record the feedback successfully and confirm submission with a confirmation message.

User rates the usability of the Scenario Planning Tool on a scale from 1 to 5.

Given a user is using the Scenario Planning Tool, when they rate its usability, then the system must accept and save the rating, making it available for review by the development team.

Users can view a summary of previously submitted feedback and ratings.

Given a user has submitted feedback or ratings, when they request to view their submission history, then the system must display a list of all their past feedback and ratings in a clear format.

Feedback is categorized by type (e.g., usability, features, bugs).

Given the user feedback has been collected, when an admin reviews the feedback, then the system must automatically categorize the feedback into relevant types for analysis.

Notify users when their feedback leads to a product update or enhancement.

Given a user has submitted feedback, when that feedback results in a tool update, then they must receive an email notification detailing how their feedback contributed to the change.

User can edit or delete their submitted feedback.

Given a user has submitted feedback, when they choose to edit or delete their feedback, then the system must allow them to do so and confirm the action with an appropriate message.

Aggregate user feedback and ratings for analytics purposes.

Given that multiple users have submitted feedback and ratings, when the analysis report is generated, then it must include metrics such as average rating, common feedback themes, and actionable insights for future enhancements.

Audience Simulation Model

This feature enables users to simulate audience reactions based on demographic data and behavioral trends. By projecting how different audience segments might respond to various launch tactics, authors can tailor their strategies to engage their target readers more effectively.

Requirements

Demographic Data Input

User Story: As an author, I want to input and manage demographic data of my target audience so that I can create accurate simulations and tailor my marketing strategies accordingly.
Description: The Demographic Data Input requirement enables users to enter and manage demographic information related to their target audience. This data includes age, gender, location, and interests, which are essential for building accurate audience profiles. By facilitating easy data entry and modification, this feature enhances user engagement and allows for tailored marketing strategies. Accurate demographic data will improve the effectiveness of simulations, leading to better-informed decision-making for authors regarding their launch tactics.
Acceptance Criteria: User enters demographic data for audience simulation.

Given a user is on the Demographic Data Input page, when they input valid data for age, gender, location, and interests, then the system should save this data and display a confirmation message.

User attempts to modify existing demographic data.

Given a user has previously entered demographic data, when they navigate to edit that data, then they should be able to successfully update the information and receive a confirmation that the changes have been saved.

User tries to enter invalid demographic data.

Given a user is on the Demographic Data Input page, when they input invalid information (e.g., non-numeric values for age), then the system should display appropriate error messages for each invalid field and prevent submission until corrections are made.

User accesses the demographic data report after input.

Given a user has entered demographic data, when they navigate to the demographics report section, then they should see a summary of all entered data in a clear and organized format.

User needs help while entering demographic information.

Given a user is on the Demographic Data Input page, when they click on the help icon, then the system should display a tooltip or a help guide explaining each demographic field and its importance.

User needs to delete previously entered demographic data.

Given a user has demographic data saved, when they select the delete option for a specific demographic entry, then the system should remove that entry and confirm the deletion with a message.

Behavioral Trend Analysis

User Story: As a publisher, I want to analyze behavioral trends of my audience so that I can refine my marketing strategies to better connect with potential readers.
Description: The Behavioral Trend Analysis requirement focuses on collating and interpreting behavioral data from potential readers based on past purchases, reading habits, and engagement metrics. This feature will analyze trends and provide insights into audience preferences, helping authors understand what resonates with their target segments. The analysis will incorporate machine learning algorithms to improve accuracy over time, ensuring that strategies reflect real-world behaviors, ultimately leading to more effective engagement tactics.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors use the Behavioral Trend Analysis tool to analyze past purchase data and identify which genres have the highest engagement among their target audience.

Given the user selects a specific demographic segment, when they run the Behavioral Trend Analysis, then the system provides a report outlining the top three genres with the highest engagement metrics based on past purchase data and engagement levels.

A marketing manager accesses the insights generated from the Behavioral Trend Analysis to formulate a targeted marketing campaign for a new book launch.

Given the marketing manager accesses the insights page, when they filter by audience segment and genre, then the system displays tailored marketing strategies and expected audience engagement levels for the selected filters.

Authors review the AI-generated insights from the Behavioral Trend Analysis to refine their understanding of audience preferences before launching a new book.

Given the authors have received the Behavioral Trend Analysis report, when they review the insights, then they can see clear visualizations of trends analyzed with comparisons to past launches and expected audience reactions.

The system updates its machine learning model based on user feedback from previous analysis reports to improve accuracy over time.

Given user feedback is collected after each report release, when the feedback is aggregated, then the system must refine its algorithms to increase prediction accuracy by at least 15% in the next analysis cycle.

The Behavioral Trend Analysis tool generates a comparison report for different audience segments to help identify which segment is more likely to respond to various engagement tactics.

Given the user selects multiple audience segments, when they generate a comparison report, then the system shows a side-by-side breakdown of projected responses and engagement tactics effectiveness for each segment.

Authors receive alerts about significant shifts in audience behavior based on the latest trend analysis results.

Given the behavioral analysis has been completed, when a significant shift in audience behavior is detected, then the system should send automated alerts to authors highlighting these shifts and suggested actions to adapt their strategies.

Simulation Results Dashboard

User Story: As an author, I want to view simulation results on a dashboard so that I can easily compare various strategies and select the most effective one for engaging my audience.
Description: The Simulation Results Dashboard requirement entails creating an intuitive interface that displays the results of audience simulations based on the input demographic and behavioral data. This comprehensive dashboard will visualize potential audience reactions in various scenarios, such as different marketing messages, pricing strategies, or launch dates. The ability to compare different simulations side-by-side will provide users with insights that empower them to make data-driven decisions, improving the outcomes of their marketing strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User opens the Simulation Results Dashboard after conducting an audience simulation based on specified demographic data.

Given the user has conducted an audience simulation, when they access the Simulation Results Dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of the simulation results displaying audience reactions clearly.

User wants to compare two different simulation outcomes side-by-side to determine the most effective marketing strategy.

Given the user has performed at least two audience simulations, when they select the compare option in the Simulation Results Dashboard, then they should be able to view the results of both simulations side-by-side in a clear format.

User seeks to analyze specific audience response metrics like engagement and purchase likelihood for different marketing messages.

Given the user has selected a simulation with specific metrics, when they view the Simulation Results Dashboard, then the dashboard should display detailed metrics including engagement rates and purchase likelihood for each audience segment.

User attempts to refresh the Simulation Results Dashboard to access the latest simulation data.

Given the user is viewing the Simulation Results Dashboard, when they click the refresh button, then the dashboard should update with the latest simulation results without any lag or errors.

User is looking for guidance on interpreting the simulation results displayed on the dashboard.

Given the user is on the Simulation Results Dashboard, when they hover over any data point, then a tooltip should appear with a brief explanation of the metric being displayed.

User wants to export the simulation results for further analysis in another tool.

Given the user has accessed the Simulation Results Dashboard, when they click the export button, then the results should be downloadable in a CSV format without data loss or errors.

User attempts to customize the dashboard view to focus on specific audience segments.

Given the user has specific audience segments selected, when they customize the dashboard filters, then only the relevant simulation results for those segments should be displayed accordingly.

Customizable Simulation Scenarios

User Story: As a user, I want to customize simulation scenarios so that I can explore various marketing tactics and anticipate audience reactions effectively.
Description: The Customizable Simulation Scenarios requirement allows users to create and modify various launch scenarios based on different marketing approaches, adjusting parameters like budget, messaging, and timing. This feature offers flexibility and creativity to authors and publishers, enabling them to test multiple strategies in a controlled environment. The goal is to understand how different approaches might influence audience response, thus allowing for dynamic and adaptable marketing strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User creates a customizable simulation scenario for a new book launch, incorporating diverse audience demographics.

Given a user accesses the Audience Simulation Model, when they create a new simulation scenario with specified budget, messaging, and timing parameters, then the scenario should save successfully and be retrievable from the scenario list.

User modifies an existing simulation scenario for a targeted audience response.

Given a user selects an existing simulation scenario, when they modify parameters such as budget and messaging, then the changes should be reflected accurately when the scenario is previewed or saved.

User deletes a simulation scenario no longer needed for future testing.

Given a user has a list of simulation scenarios, when they choose to delete a specific scenario, then that scenario should be removed from the list and no longer be accessible.

User analyzes the predicted audience response from a customizable simulation scenario.

Given a user has created and run a simulation scenario, when they access the analytics dashboard, then they should see a detailed report of projected audience responses based on the applied parameters.

User shares a customizable simulation scenario with team members for feedback.

Given a user has developed a simulation scenario, when they click the share option and input team member emails, then the selected users should receive a notification and access to review the scenario.

User generates a comparison report between multiple simulation scenarios.

Given a user has at least two simulation scenarios saved, when they request a comparison report, then the system should provide a side-by-side analysis of key parameters and predicted outcomes for each scenario.

User saves a simulation scenario as a template for future use.

Given a user creates a simulation scenario, when they select the save as template option, then the scenario should be stored in a templates section for easy access and reuse in the future.

Real-Time Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As an author, I want to receive real-time feedback on my simulated strategies so that I can refine my approach based on direct audience input prior to launch.
Description: The Real-Time Feedback Mechanism requirement introduces a feature where users can receive immediate feedback on their simulated audience reactions. By integrating a system that allows the community or focus groups to respond to proposed strategies in real-time, authors will gain actionable insights before launching their campaigns. This interactivity enhances the simulation's relevance, providing authors with more empirical data to support their decision-making.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors want to gather immediate feedback from a focus group after presenting a new book marketing strategy using the audience simulation model.

Given an author has submitted a new marketing strategy for a simulated audience, when feedback is provided by the focus group, then the author should receive real-time notifications of all feedback submitted within 5 minutes.

Editors at a publishing house need to evaluate different audience segments' reactions to a proposed book cover design.

Given the editor requests feedback on a book cover design, when audience segment A is simulated, then the feedback module must accurately reflect demographic responses within 10% accuracy of initial predictions.

A marketing team seeks to adjust their campaign strategy based on audience reactions gathered through the feedback mechanism.

Given that audience feedback has been collected on a planned campaign strategy, when the marketing team reviews the feedback, then the platform must present actionable insights derived from the feedback within a user-friendly dashboard interface.

Authors want to know the effectiveness of their proposed book title across different audience demographics before finalizing it.

Given the author inputs several book title options into the system, when real-time feedback is gathered from the target audience segments, then the system should display a comparative analysis of the title options based on audience preference ratings within 24 hours.

A focus group is configured to react to proposed social media content for an upcoming book launch.

Given the social media content is scheduled for audience simulation, when focus group members provide their feedback, then the real-time feedback loop must display the aggregated results categorically by engagement score within 15 minutes.

Users want to ensure that feedback can be provided anonymously to encourage candid responses.

Given the real-time feedback mechanism is active, when a user chooses to give feedback, then the system must provide an option for anonymity and confirm the feedback has been submitted without revealing the identity of the user.

The platform needs to track engagement levels over time for different simulated strategies to inform future campaigns.

Given various feedback sessions have been conducted, when the user accesses historical data, then the system should show engagement trends over the last three months, highlighting successful and unsuccessful strategies clearly.

Performance Predictions Dashboard

A comprehensive dashboard that presents key performance indicators (KPIs) for simulated book launches, including estimated sales figures, engagement metrics, and visibility rates. This feature provides a clear overview of expected outcomes, helping users gauge the effectiveness of their planned strategies.

Requirements

KPI Visualization

User Story: As a publisher, I want to see visual representations of key performance indicators so that I can quickly assess the potential success of my book launches and adjust my strategies accordingly.
Description: The KPI Visualization requirement entails the development of an intuitive graphical interface that displays key performance indicators (KPIs) related to project launches. It should visually represent estimated sales figures, engagement metrics, and visibility rates through charts and graphs. This feature helps users to easily interpret data, thereby enhancing decision-making processes before launching a new book. The visualizations must be customizable so users can focus on metrics that are most pertinent to their specific strategies. Integration within the existing dashboard will allow the feature to smoothly complement other analytics tools, promoting a better user experience and data comprehension.
Acceptance Criteria: Display of KPIs on the Performance Predictions Dashboard

Given the user is on the Performance Predictions Dashboard, when they select a book launch project, then the dashboard should display all relevant KPIs such as estimated sales figures, engagement metrics, and visibility rates in a clear, graphical format.

Customizable KPI Filter Options

Given the user is viewing the KPIs on the Performance Predictions Dashboard, when they access the customization settings, then they should be able to filter metrics to display only those that are pertinent to their specific strategies.

Chart Rendering and Responsiveness

Given the user selects different KPIs to visualize on the dashboard, when they adjust their screen size or access the dashboard on a mobile device, then the charts and graphs should automatically resize and maintain readability without loss of data clarity.

Data Accuracy and Consistency

Given the user accesses the KPI Visualization, when they refresh the dashboard, then the updated data should accurately reflect the latest available metrics without any discrepancies or delays.

Exporting Dashboard Visualizations

Given the user has selected specific KPIs and visualizations on the dashboard, when they select the export function, then an accurate and well-formatted report of the selected KPIs should be generated for external use.

Integration with Other Analytics Tools

Given the user is navigating through the dashboard, when they access other analytics tools, then there should be a seamless transition between different analytics views, maintaining context and data integrity.

User Feedback Mechanism for Visualizations

Given the user is using the KPI Visualization, when they encounter an issue or have suggestions, then they should be able to provide feedback easily through a dedicated interface on the dashboard.

Simulation Scenarios

User Story: As an author, I want to simulate different marketing strategies for my book launch, so that I can find the most effective approach that maximizes my sales and visibility.
Description: The Simulation Scenarios requirement involves enabling users to create and evaluate multiple book launch scenarios by adjusting various parameters such as marketing channel budgets, target audiences, and promotional strategies. By implementing this feature, users can visualize how different strategies may impact their projected sales and audience engagement. This capability will allow them to optimize their marketing efforts based on data-driven outcomes before executing their plans. The results of the simulations should be easily interpretable and directly tied into the existing performance predictions, giving users comprehensive insights into their potential book launches.
Acceptance Criteria: User creates a new simulation scenario for a book launch, setting parameters for marketing budgets and target audience demographics.

Given the user is on the Performance Predictions Dashboard, when they select 'Create New Simulation', then they should be able to input marketing budgets and select target audience demographics without errors.

User evaluates the expected sales figures after adjusting various parameters in their simulation scenario.

Given the user has adjusted marketing channel budgets and target audiences, when they view the simulation results, then the estimated sales figures should be updated in real time reflecting these changes and should be within 5% accuracy compared to baseline predictions.

User simulates multiple promotional strategies to assess their impact on projected audience engagement.

Given the user has defined multiple promotional strategies, when they run the simulation, then they should see a detailed report highlighting engagement metrics for each strategy allowing for direct comparison.

User saves their simulation scenario and retrieves it for later review.

Given the user has completed a simulation scenario, when they choose to save their scenario, then they should be able to retrieve it from their saved scenarios list without any data loss.

User shares their simulation results with team members for feedback.

Given the user has run a simulation, when they select the 'Share Results' option, then they should be able to generate a shareable report that can be sent via email to team members without formatting errors.

User analyzes the simulation results against current performance data.

Given the user has accessed both the simulation results and current performance data, when they view the comparison, then they should see visual indicators (e.g., charts) that pinpoint differences between projected and actual performance clearly.

Real-Time Updates

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to see real-time updates on my simulation adjustments, so that I can make timely decisions and optimize my book launch plan effectively.
Description: The Real-Time Updates requirement focuses on providing live updates to the Performance Predictions Dashboard during the simulation phase. This feature ensures that any changes made to marketing strategies or parameters instantly reflect in the predicted outcomes, allowing users to see how their decisions impact potential performance immediately. By integrating real-time analytics, users can make quicker and more informed decisions during their planning stages. This functionality will also include notifications for significant changes in metrics, ensuring that users remain alerted to critical performance shifts as they adjust their strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User modifies their marketing strategy in the Performance Predictions Dashboard during a simulation session.

Given a user is in a live simulation session, when they adjust any marketing parameter, then the dashboard updates to reflect the new performance predictions within 5 seconds.

User receives notifications for significant changes in KPIs during a simulation.

Given the user has started a simulation, when there is a significant change in estimated sales figures or engagement metrics, then the user receives a notification alerting them of the change immediately.

User wants to analyze the impact of multiple simultaneous adjustments to their strategy.

Given a user is running a simulation, when they make multiple changes to different marketing parameters, then the dashboard should reflect an aggregated performance prediction that combines all adjustments in real-time.

User checks the metrics to assess the effectiveness of their current strategy.

Given a user is currently viewing the dashboard after making changes, when they refresh the page, then all displayed metrics should remain consistent with the latest changes made without needing to restart the simulation.

User adjusts the target audience demographics for a book launch simulation.

Given the user is in the simulation phase, when they select new target demographics, then the dashboard must update the visibility rates and engagement metrics to reflect the impact of the new audience immediately.

User examines historical data to compare against current predictions.

Given the user is viewing the Performance Predictions Dashboard, when they access historical performance data, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of past predictions versus current metrics, with clear visual indicators of performance changes.

Email Alerts for Performance Metrics

User Story: As a publisher, I want to receive email alerts for significant changes in performance metrics, so that I can quickly adjust my strategies without constantly monitoring the dashboard.
Description: The Email Alerts for Performance Metrics requirement aims to provide users with automatic email notifications when certain performance metrics exceed or fall below predefined thresholds during the simulation process. This feature will increase user engagement and proactive decision-making by keeping them informed even when they are not actively using the platform. Users can set their own threshold values for key metrics, ensuring that alerts are personalized and relevant to their specific goals, which will support strategic pivots when necessary and enhance overall campaign effectiveness.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets a performance metric threshold for email alerts in the Performance Predictions Dashboard.

Given the user is on the Performance Predictions Dashboard, when they set a threshold for a specific performance metric, then an email alert should be triggered when the metric exceeds or falls below this threshold during the simulation process.

User receives email alerts when performance metrics exceed set thresholds.

When the simulation runs and a performance metric exceeds the user's predetermined threshold, then the user should receive an email notification summarizing the metric's performance and its current value.

User customizes alert settings for multiple performance metrics.

Given the user is on the alert settings page, when they customize threshold values for multiple performance metrics, then all specified metrics should send separate email alerts according to their individual thresholds during simulations.

User attempts to set a threshold that is below the minimum allowed value.

When the user tries to set a threshold value below the minimum allowed limit for a performance metric, then they should receive an error message indicating the threshold value is invalid and prompting them to enter a valid value.

User updates their email address for receiving metric alerts.

Given the user is on the account settings page, when they update their email address and save the changes, then future alert emails should be sent to the updated email address during the simulation processes.

User verifies the email alert contains accurate metric details.

When the user receives an email alert for a performance metric, then the email should contain accurate and up-to-date information regarding the specific metric, including the metric name, value, timestamp, and whether it is above or below the threshold.

User Training Module

User Story: As a new user, I want a training module that guides me through using the Dashboard features, so that I can effectively utilize the tool for my publishing strategies.
Description: The User Training Module requirement is designed to create an interactive training resource that helps new users familiarize themselves with the Performance Predictions Dashboard. This module will feature tutorials, best practices, and walkthroughs explaining how to leverage the dashboard's features effectively. By integrating this training module into the platform, users will feel more confident in utilizing the dashboard's analytical capabilities and make the most of the performance predictions. It is aimed at reducing the learning curve and enhancing user satisfaction by providing essential guidance on feature usage.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to access the User Training Module after logging into the Performance Predictions Dashboard for the first time.

Given the user is logged into the Performance Predictions Dashboard, when they select the 'User Training Module' from the menu, then the training module should load seamlessly without errors and should contain a welcome introductory video and access to tutorials.

User is following a tutorial on how to interpret the engagement metrics displayed in the Performance Predictions Dashboard.

Given the user has selected a tutorial on engagement metrics, when they view the tutorial, then the content should be clear, easy to understand, and include visual examples from the dashboard with practical applications explained.

User is completing a walkthrough on setting up a simulated book launch in the Performance Predictions Dashboard.

Given the user is engaging with the setup walkthrough, when they follow the instructions, then at the end of the walkthrough, the user should successfully set up a simulated book launch and receive a confirmation message with key next steps. Additionally, the progress should be trackable in the system for future reference.

User wants to access best practices for maximizing visibility rates during their simulated book launch.

Given the user selects the best practices section in the User Training Module, when they navigate through the best practices, then they should find detailed tips and strategies with actionable items and links to relevant resources that can be easily understood and applied in real scenarios.

User seeks help on troubleshooting issues encountered while using the Performance Predictions Dashboard.

Given the user wants assistance during their use of the dashboard, when they access the help section of the User Training Module, then the user should find a well-organized FAQ and a troubleshooting guide with clear steps to resolve common issues.

User completes the entire User Training Module and wants to provide feedback.

Given the user has gone through all components of the training module, when they reach the feedback section, then they should be able to submit their feedback successfully and see a confirmation of receipt with an appreciation note for their input.

Competitor Launch Comparison

This tool allows users to compare their simulated launch strategies with actual launches of similar titles in the market. By analyzing competitors' successes and failures, authors can glean insights and adapt their approaches to stand out in a crowded marketplace.

Requirements

Competitor Launch Analysis

User Story: As an independent author, I want to compare my launch strategy with similar titles in the market so that I can learn from competitors' successes and failures and improve my promotional approach.
Description: The Competitor Launch Analysis capability enables users to analyze various launch strategies of comparable titles in the market. This feature provides users with data-driven insights into successful and unsuccessful launch tactics employed by competitors. It emphasizes key performance indicators, such as initial sales volume, marketing strategies, pricing, and audience engagement metrics, allowing authors and publishers to make informed decisions about their own launch plans. By integrating this analysis tool seamlessly with the BookShelfHub platform, users can better understand market trends and tailor their launches to meet changing consumer preferences, ultimately increasing the chances of success.
Acceptance Criteria: User is analyzing a competitor's launch strategy for a similar book title they are planning to publish next month.

Given the user selects a competitor title, when they view the launch analysis, then they see a comparison of initial sales volumes, marketing strategies, pricing, and audience engagement metrics from the competitor's launch.

User wants to filter launch strategies by key performance indicators to identify successful tactics.

Given the user applies filters for initial sales volume above 500 units and marketing strategies including social media, when they view the results, then they only see launch strategies that meet these criteria.

User needs to export the analyzed data for a presentation to their publishing team.

Given the user has completed an analysis of competitor launch strategies, when they click on the export button, then the data is downloaded in CSV format, including all relevant metrics and comparisons.

User interacts with the visual representation of competitor launches on the dashboard.

Given the user is on the Competitor Launch Analysis dashboard, when they hover over the visual graphs, then they see tooltips that display detailed information about each competitor's launch metrics.

User wishes to receive notifications about market trend updates relevant to their analyzed titles.

Given the user subscribes to market trend notifications, when new data regarding similar book launches is available, then they receive an email notification summarizing the key insights.

User reviews historical data to understand long-term trends in book launch success rates.

Given the user accesses the historical analysis section, when they select a date range, then they can see a graphical representation of launch success rates over time for similar book genres.

User wants to compare multiple competitors side-by-side in the analysis tool.

Given the user selects multiple titles for comparison, when they view the comparison page, then they can see all selected competitors’ launch strategies side-by-side for direct analysis.

Insights Dashboard

User Story: As a publisher, I want to view a dashboard that aggregates competitor data and market trends so that I can quickly identify opportunities to enhance my launch strategy.
Description: The Insights Dashboard is designed to provide a comprehensive visual representation of competitor performance and market trends. By aggregating data from successful competitors' launches, users can view trends in sales performance, audience engagement, and marketing effectiveness in a single unified interface. The dashboard will include customizable widgets for tracking specific metrics that matter most to the user, such as average review scores, social media buzz, and launch timing efficiency. By leveraging this feature, users can gain actionable insights and quickly adapt their strategies to improve their competitive edge in the publishing landscape.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Insights Dashboard to evaluate how their book's launch can be enhanced by analyzing data from competitors' similar titles.

Given the user is logged in to BookShelfHub, When they navigate to the Insights Dashboard, Then the dashboard should display a summary of competitor performance metrics, including sales figures, review scores, and social media engagement rates for the selected category.

A user customizes the widgets on their Insights Dashboard to focus on specific metrics that are important to their marketing strategy.

Given the user is on the Insights Dashboard, When they select and adjust the widgets for average review scores and social media buzz, Then the dashboard should reflect these changes in real-time, accurately displaying the selected metrics.

The user wants to compare the sales performance metrics of their own recent launch with that of a successful competitor.

Given the user has input their book launch details, When they select the competitor’s book for comparison, Then the dashboard should generate a side-by-side analysis showing key sales performance trends and metrics.

An author wishes to generate a report from the Insights Dashboard for a marketing meeting with their team.

Given the user is on the Insights Dashboard, When they select the 'Generate Report' option, Then a comprehensive report summarizing competitor performance and market trends should be generated and downloaded in PDF format.

A user analyzes historical data trends over a specific time period using the Insights Dashboard.

Given the user selects a custom date range on the Insights Dashboard, When they apply the changes, Then the dashboard should update to show historical data trends relevant to the defined time period for selected competitors.

Launch Strategy Simulator

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to simulate different launch strategies to see their potential outcomes, so that I can choose the most effective approach for my book launch.
Description: The Launch Strategy Simulator is a powerful feature that allows users to create and test hypothetical launch strategies based on their understanding of competitor successes. Users can input various parameters such as pricing, timing, promotional channels, and messaging to simulate outcomes based on historical data from similar titles. This tool enhances the decision-making process by enabling users to visualize potential results and iterate on their strategies before executing them in real life. The simulator will provide valuable feedback on the probable success rate of different approaches, helping users to optimize their launch plans.
Acceptance Criteria: User inputs multiple launch parameters to create a new simulated launch strategy using historical sales data from existing titles.

Given that the user has entered launch parameters for a simulated launch strategy, when they click 'Simulate', then the system should generate predicted outcomes based on historical data, displaying metrics such as expected sales, customer engagement, and profitability.

User compares their simulated launch strategy against competitor launches to identify potential strengths and weaknesses.

Given that the user has completed their simulation, when they select the 'Compare to Competitors' option, then the system should display a clear comparison of their strategy metrics with at least three relevant competitors, highlighting differences and insights for improvement.

User adjusts their launch strategy parameters based on simulation feedback and wishes to re-simulate the outcomes.

Given that the user has made adjustments to their launch parameters after reviewing feedback, when they initiate a new simulation, then the system should overwrite the previous simulation results and display updated predicted outcomes instantly without errors.

User wants to save their simulated launch strategy for future reference and further edits.

Given that the user has created a launch strategy simulation, when they click 'Save', then the system should allow them to name the simulation and store it in their account, making it accessible for future edits or comparisons.

User attempts to simulate a launch strategy without entering any parameters and expects an error message.

Given that the user has not entered any simulation parameters, when they click 'Simulate', then the system should display a clear error message indicating that all required fields must be filled in before proceeding.

User seeks guidance on how to best utilize the Launch Strategy Simulator feature within the BookShelfHub platform.

Given that the user accesses the Help section, when they look for information on the Launch Strategy Simulator, then the system should display a comprehensive guide with examples and FAQs that clearly explain how to use the feature effectively.

Competitor Alerts

User Story: As an author, I want to receive alerts for new competitor launches and marketing activities so that I can remain informed and adjust my promotional efforts accordingly.
Description: Competitor Alerts is a notification system that tracks competitors' new launches and major marketing activities in real-time. Users can set parameters to receive alerts on specific titles, genres, or competitor actions, giving them timely information about market movements. This feature empowers users to stay informed of noteworthy launches and promotional tactics that may influence their strategies. By having up-to-date insights on the competitive landscape, users can adapt their marketing efforts quickly and effectively, enhancing their responsiveness and strategic positioning.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets alerts for specific competitor titles and genres they are interested in tracking.

Given the user is logged into BookShelfHub, when they navigate to the Competitor Alerts settings and input specific titles or genres, then they should receive a confirmation message that their alerts have been successfully created and activated.

User receives a notification when a competitor launches a new title within their tracked genres.

Given the user has set alerts for specific genres, when a competitor launches a new title in those genres, then the user should receive a notification via email or through the BookShelfHub platform within 24 hours of the launch.

User can view all their active competitor alerts in a centralized dashboard.

Given the user has created multiple competitor alerts, when they navigate to the 'My Alerts' dashboard, then they should see a comprehensive list of all active alerts with relevant details like title, genre, and date of the last notification.

User can modify existing alerts for competitor titles and genres.

Given the user is on the Competitor Alerts page, when they select an existing alert to modify and change the parameters, then the modifications should be saved and reflected in their alert settings immediately, along with a confirmation message.

User receives a weekly summary of competitor activities in their tracked genres.

Given the user has set up alerts for specific genres, when the weekly reporting period ends, then the user should receive a summarized report via email detailing all competitor launches and significant marketing activities for the relevant week.

User receives alerts for competitor marketing campaigns and promotions in real-time.

Given the user has set alerts for specific competitors, when those competitors initiate a major marketing campaign, then the user should be notified immediately through the BookShelfHub platform and via email with details of the campaign.

User can delete existing competitor alerts they no longer want to track.

Given the user is on the 'My Alerts' dashboard, when they select an existing alert and choose to delete it, then the alert should be removed from their list and a confirmation message should appear stating that the alert has been successfully deleted.

Market Trend Report

User Story: As a strategist, I want to generate reports on market trends that highlight shifts in consumer preferences and successful strategies so that I can align my publishing efforts with market demands.
Description: The Market Trend Report feature provides users with detailed reports on emerging trends within the publishing market based on competitor launches and consumer behavior. By analyzing data from multiple sources, this feature highlights shifts in readership, popular genres, and effective marketing tactics. This structured report will help users identify potential opportunities and threats within their niche, allowing for strategic planning in their launch evaluations. Users will be able to customize the report based on specific queries or interest areas relevant to their publishing focus.
Acceptance Criteria: User accessing the Market Trend Report feature to generate a report for their upcoming book launch based on their selected genres and competition.

Given a user has selected specific genres and competitors, when they click on 'Generate Report', then the system should provide a detailed Market Trend Report summarizing current trends related to the chosen genres along with a comparison of competitors' successful launches.

User customizing the Market Trend Report to focus on specific marketing tactics used in recent launches.

Given a user is looking to analyze marketing tactics, when they input their focus areas and generate the report, then the system should reflect these focus areas in the Market Trend Report and include relevant data points that support the user's queries.

User reading the generated Market Trend Report to gain insights for their upcoming launch.

Given a user has generated a Market Trend Report, when they open the report, then it should be well-structured, displaying insights on readership, popular genres, and effective marketing tactics relevant to their selected areas, with clear navigation and understandable visualizations.

User comparing their own launch strategy with provided data from the Market Trend Report.

Given a user has reviewed the Market Trend Report, when they analyze the findings and apply them to their own launch strategy, then they should be able to identify at least three actionable insights that can be integrated into their planning.

User sharing the Market Trend Report with their team for collaborative discussion.

Given a user has generated a Market Trend Report, when they select the 'Share' option, then the system should allow them to send the report via email or share it through collaboration tools, ensuring all team members have access to the report.

User receiving notifications about updates in market trends or new competitor launch data.

Given a user has opted in for notifications, when there are significant updates in market trends or competitor launches, then the system should send an email notification to the user summarizing the key updates and linking them to the Market Trend Report.

User exporting the Market Trend Report to a PDF format for offline access.

Given a user has completed their analysis of the Market Trend Report, when they click on 'Export to PDF', then the system should generate a downloadable PDF version of the report that is formatted for easy reading and offline access.

Feedback Simulation Engine

A unique feature that simulates potential feedback from readers based on different launch approaches. By understanding how audiences might react to various themes, cover designs, and promotional copy, authors can fine-tune their strategies for better reception and success.

Requirements

Theme Feedback Simulation

User Story: As an author, I want to simulate reader feedback on various book themes so that I can choose the best theme that resonates with my target audience.
Description: The Feedback Simulation Engine must allow authors and publishers to input different themes for their books. The system will analyze each theme and simulate potential reader feedback based on historical data and audience preference models. This feature will help users adapt their content to meet market demand, ultimately leading to higher acceptance rates of their work. The benefit is twofold: it provides strategic insights into theme effectiveness and enhances the author's ability to connect with readers, fostering a better alignment of book themes with audience expectations.
Acceptance Criteria: Authors input various themes into the Feedback Simulation Engine to gauge potential reader reactions before finalizing their publishing strategy.

Given an author has entered multiple themes into the Feedback Simulation Engine, when the author requests feedback simulation results, then the system should provide simulated reader feedback for each theme, ranked by predicted acceptance levels.

Publishers use the simulation results to decide on the best theme to pursue for their upcoming book launch.

Given a publisher has accessed the simulated feedback for a selected theme, when they compare the results with historical data, then they should be able to identify a theme that scores above a defined acceptance threshold.

Authors seek to refine their themes based on target demographics to ensure wider reach and engagement.

Given that an author has defined a target demographic, when they input themes into the Feedback Simulation Engine, then the system should provide demographic-specific feedback, showing how each theme resonates with the identified audience.

The system tracks user interactions and modifications made by authors to themes after analyzing previous feedback simulations.

Given an author modifies a theme based on the feedback simulation results, when the author re-submits the modified theme into the system, then the system should log the changes and provide updated simulated feedback.

Authors are required to evaluate the impact of different promotional strategies based on theme feedback to optimize their marketing approach.

Given that an author has simulated feedback for multiple themes, when they choose a promotional strategy for the top scoring theme, then the system should provide adjusted feedback based on this promotional context to evaluate its effectiveness.

The Feedback Simulation Engine interfaces with the author's project dashboard, providing quick access to theme feedback.

Given an author is logged into their BookShelfHub dashboard, when they select the Feedback Simulation option, then they should be able to access and view simulation results at any point during their project workflow without delays.

Authors save their feedback simulation reports for future reference and strategy development.

Given an author has completed a feedback simulation for one or more themes, when they choose to save the report, then the system should store the report, enabling the author to retrieve it at any later date.

Cover Design Simulation

User Story: As a publisher, I want to test different book cover designs by simulating reader feedback so that I can select the design that will attract the most readers.
Description: The Feedback Simulation Engine should include a module for simulating reader reactions to different book cover designs. Authors and publishers can upload various cover options to the platform, which will analyze potential feedback based on factors like aesthetics, genre trends, and user engagement metrics. This requirement is essential for ensuring that the cover design effectively captures attention and markets the book effectively, ultimately increasing sales potential.
Acceptance Criteria: User uploads multiple cover designs for a new book into the Feedback Simulation Engine.

Given the authors have uploaded at least three different cover designs, when they initiate the feedback simulation, then the system should generate simulated reader reactions for each design based on predefined metrics (aesthetics, genre trends, user engagement).

User receives a feedback report after running the simulation on cover designs.

Given the simulation has been completed, when the author requests the feedback report, then the system should provide a detailed report that includes qualitative and quantitative analysis of potential reader reactions for all uploaded cover designs.

User wants to compare the simulated feedback for different cover designs based on engagement metrics.

Given the simulation for multiple cover designs has been run, when the author selects the engagement metrics comparison, then the system should display a comparative analysis of reader engagement metrics for each cover design in a graphical format.

System analyzes user-uploaded covers within the context of current genre trends.

Given that the uploaded book covers are within a specific genre, when the author runs the simulation, then the system should compare the designs against current data on popular genre trends and suggest adjustments based on the analysis.

User seeks to validate the accuracy of the simulated feedback against real-world results post-launch.

Given that the book has launched with a selected cover design, when the author compares actual sales data and reviews against the simulated feedback prior to the launch, then the author can evaluate the accuracy of the simulation’s predictions with a success measure of at least 75% alignment.

User wants to ensure the Feedback Simulation Engine is intuitive and easy to navigate.

Given that the user is a first-time author, when they interact with the Feedback Simulation Engine, then they should be able to complete the upload and simulation process within 10 minutes without external assistance, with a satisfaction rating of at least 80% based on usability testing.

User approaches the simulation process with a specific target audience in mind.

Given the author can specify demographic details of their target audience, when the author runs the feedback simulation with this specified audience, then the system should use these demographics to tailor simulated feedback accordingly, reflecting the preferences and biases of the defined audience.

Promotional Copy Testing

User Story: As a marketer, I want to test multiple versions of promotional copy to understand which one resonates better with the audience to maximize my marketing efforts.
Description: This requirement involves the development of a feature within the Feedback Simulation Engine that allows users to input various versions of promotional copy for their books. The system will simulate reader reactions based on historical data related to language, messaging trends, and promotional channels. This feature will provide authors and marketers with actionable insights on how to craft compelling promotional content that drives engagement and sales.
Acceptance Criteria: User inputs multiple versions of promotional copy for a book to test which version resonates best with simulated reader feedback.

Given the user has access to the Feedback Simulation Engine, when they input at least three different versions of promotional copy, then the system must generate simulated feedback for each version within five seconds.

User wants to understand how different messaging trends impact reader engagement based on historical data.

Given the user has selected a promotional copy version, when they request feedback simulation, then the system must analyze at least five historical messaging trends relevant to the promotional copy and display a comparison of predicted reader engagement.

An author wishes to see the effects of varying cover designs along with promotional copy on reader perceptions.

Given the user has uploaded different cover designs and corresponding promotional copy, when they initiate the simulation, then the system must generate feedback that includes reader sentiment analysis for each combination of cover and copy within ten seconds.

A marketing team seeks to evaluate the effectiveness of promotional channels used in conjunction with specific promotional copy.

Given the user has selected a specific promotional channel and copy version, when they run the simulation, then the system must output data on the predicted reach and engagement metrics for that promotional channel within fifteen seconds.

The author wants to refine their promotional strategies based on various simulated reader demographics.

Given the user has specified demographic parameters for their target audience, when they conduct a simulation, then the system must adjust feedback results to reflect expected reactions from at least three defined demographic groups.

A small publishing house needs to generate a report on reader reactions to multiple promotional strategies before a book launch.

Given the user has completed simulations for various promotional copies, when they request a summary report, then the system must compile feedback analytics including overall reader sentiment, engagement scores, and comparative insights across strategies in a downloadable format.

Comprehensive Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As an author, I want to access an analytics dashboard that summarizes simulated feedback so that I can make informed decisions about my publishing strategy.
Description: The Feedback Simulation Engine must feature a comprehensive analytics dashboard that provides real-time insights on simulated feedback metrics, such as predicted readership engagement, theme appeal, cover attractiveness, and promotional effectiveness. This dashboard will serve as a valuable tool for authors and publishers to evaluate different strategies in one place, allowing for data-driven decision-making that enhances their publishing efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: Author accesses the analytics dashboard of the Feedback Simulation Engine after running multiple simulated feedback scenarios on their book's marketing strategies.

Given the author has created at least three different simulated feedback scenarios, When they access the analytics dashboard, Then they should see real-time metrics for predicted readership engagement, theme appeal, cover attractiveness, and promotional effectiveness.

An author wants to compare the performance metrics of different book cover designs using the analytics dashboard.

Given the author has entered various cover designs into the system, When they select the option to compare cover designs on the analytics dashboard, Then they should receive a side-by-side analysis of the predicted attractiveness scores for each cover.

The publisher reviews the overall effectiveness of a marketing campaign using the analytics dashboard provided by the Feedback Simulation Engine.

Given the publisher has executed a marketing campaign with various promotional copies, When they access the analytics dashboard, Then they should be able to view an aggregated effectiveness score along with individual metrics for each promotional copy used.

An editor checks if the analytics dashboard is displaying correctly on mobile devices for on-the-go access.

Given the analytics dashboard is designed to be responsive, When the editor accesses the dashboard on a mobile device, Then all key metrics should load properly and remain easily readable on the screen.

An author runs an analysis of simulated feedback for different thematic approaches to their manuscript via the dashboard.

Given the author has input several thematic approaches, When they click on the ‘Analyze Themes’ button on the dashboard, Then they should receive detailed metrics showing predicted audience engagement levels for each theme.

A group of authors collaborates and wants to share analytics insights derived from the feedback simulation engine during a virtual meeting.

Given multiple authors are using the same analytics dashboard, When one author generates a report of their metrics and shares it, Then all collaborating authors should be able to access and view the same report in real-time without discrepancies.

A user wants to ensure the accuracy of the predicted feedback metrics on the analytics dashboard after updating marketing copies.

Given the user has updated the marketing copies, When they refresh the analytics dashboard, Then they should see updated metrics reflecting the changes made to the marketing copies.

Integration with Marketing Tools

User Story: As a publisher, I want to integrate the Feedback Simulation Engine with my marketing tools so that I can leverage simulated feedback directly in my campaigns.
Description: To enhance the utility of the Feedback Simulation Engine, this requirement involves creating seamless integrations with existing marketing tools and platforms used by authors and publishers. This will enable users to deploy their simulated feedback insights into their actual marketing campaigns, ensuring that strategies are consistent and aligned with audience expectations. The integration aims to simplify the user experience and enhance the overall effectiveness of marketing efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of Feedback Simulation Engine with Social Media Marketing Tools.

Given a user has set up their Feedback Simulation Engine and selected a social media platform, when they initiate an integration process, then they should be prompted to authorize connection to their marketing accounts and successfully link them without errors.

Deployment of simulated feedback insights to an email marketing platform.

Given a user has simulated feedback in the Feedback Simulation Engine, when they export this feedback to an email marketing platform, then the feedback details should be accurately reflected in the email campaign setup interface, including themes, cover designs, and promotional copy.

Testing the integration with a marketing analytic tool.

Given a user has integrated the Feedback Simulation Engine with a marketing analytics tool, when they analyze their campaign performance, then the insights from the simulated feedback should be included in the analytics dashboard, showing trends and audience reactions.

User experience in setting up an integration with multiple marketing tools simultaneously.

Given a user is on the integration setup page, when they select multiple marketing tools for integration, then there should be a logical flow that allows them to successfully authorize and complete integrations for all selected tools without confusion or loss of data.

Accessibility of integration support documentation during the process.

Given a user is attempting to integrate the Feedback Simulation Engine with a marketing tool, when they access the support section, then they should see relevant documentation and guides that assist with the integration process, including troubleshooting steps.

Ability to receive notifications for successful and failed integrations.

Given a user has initiated an integration process with a marketing tool, when the process completes, then they should receive a notification indicating whether the integration was successful or if any errors occurred, including a summary of potential issues.

Feedback simulation accuracy in marketing strategies.

Given a user has utilized the Feedback Simulation Engine to craft specific marketing strategies based on simulated feedback, when those strategies are deployed, then they should see an improvement in audience engagement metrics compared to previous campaigns without simulated feedback.

User Experience Optimization

User Story: As an end user, I want a seamless and intuitive interface for the Feedback Simulation Engine so that I can easily utilize its functionalities without feeling overwhelmed.
Description: The Feedback Simulation Engine should focus on optimizing the user experience, ensuring that authors and publishers can easily navigate through the process of inputting data, receiving feedback simulations, and analyzing results. This requirement includes an intuitive interface, streamlined workflows, and contextual help resources. By enhancing the user experience, we aim to ensure higher adoption rates and reduce the learning curve associated with using the feature.
Acceptance Criteria: User navigates to the Feedback Simulation Engine after logging into BookShelfHub to input a new book project.

Given the user has logged in, when the user selects the Feedback Simulation Engine, then the system should load the interface within 3 seconds without errors.

User inputs different launch approaches related to their book, including themes and cover designs, into the Feedback Simulation Engine.

Given the user is on the input screen, when they enter data for at least three different launch approaches and click 'Submit', then the system should save the inputs and display a confirmation message.

User receives simulated feedback based on their input for different themes and promotional copies.

Given the user has submitted their inputs, when the simulation runs, then the results should show feedback ratings and comments for each input approach within 5 seconds, reflecting potential reader reactions.

User analyzes the feedback simulation results for insights.

Given the user has received the simulation results, when they view the feedback, then they should be able to filter results by theme and access contextual help, with at least 90% of users finding the analysis tools intuitive.

User seeks assistance while using the Feedback Simulation Engine.

Given the user is on any page of the Feedback Simulation Engine, when they click on the help icon, then contextual help should display relevant resources within 2 seconds in a user-friendly format.

User completes the entire feedback simulation process and navigates back to the dashboard.

Given the user has finished analyzing results, when they click 'Back to Dashboard', then they should be returned to the dashboard without losing any unsaved data in the process.

Budget Impact Analyzer

This tool enables authors to analyze the financial implications of different launch strategies, providing a breakdown of costs versus projected returns. By understanding the potential ROI of their investments, users can allocate their budgets effectively to maximize profitability during and after the launch.

Requirements

Dynamic Cost Projection

User Story: As an author, I want to input different launch strategies and costs to see their potential financial impacts so that I can choose the most lucrative option for my book launch.
Description: The Dynamic Cost Projection requirement enables users to input various launch strategies and their associated costs. It analyzes these inputs in real-time to provide users with a detailed projection of potential returns on investment (ROI). This tool will assist authors in making informed financial decisions by depicting how each strategy impacts their overall budget and profitability. The functionality will include a user-friendly interface for inputting costs, an engine to calculate projections based on sales data, and visual representations of cost versus return to simplify complex financial decisions. The integration will ensure that authors can seamlessly access this tool within the existing framework of BookShelfHub, allowing for quicker decision-making during the publishing process.
Acceptance Criteria: User Input of Launch Strategies and Costs

Given an author has accessed the Dynamic Cost Projection tool, when they input various launch strategies and associated costs, then the system should successfully capture and save these inputs for analysis.

Real-Time ROI Projection Calculation

Given the launch strategies and costs have been entered, when the author requests a return on investment projection, then the system should calculate and display the projected ROI based on the provided data without noticeable delay.

Visualization of Costs Versus Returns

Given the ROI calculation has been performed, when the author views the projection results, then the system must display a clear visual representation of costs versus projected returns, enabling easy comparison.

User-Friendly Interface with Input Validation

When the author is inputting costs and strategies, then the input fields should validate entered data to ensure all required fields are completed with acceptable values, providing user-friendly error messages for invalid entries.

Integration with Existing BookShelfHub Framework

Given that the Dynamic Cost Projection tool is being accessed, then it should seamlessly integrate within the existing BookShelfHub framework, allowing for easy navigation without disrupting the user's workflow.

Access to Historical Sales Data for Projections

When the author utilizes the Dynamic Cost Projection tool, they should have access to historical sales data from BookShelfHub that informs the projections, ensuring calculated estimates are based on realistic benchmarks.

Exporting Cost Projection Results

Given that the author has viewed the ROI projections, when they choose to export the projection results, then the system should provide the option to download the data in multiple formats (e.g., PDF, Excel) without compromising formatting or data accuracy.

ROI Comparison Tool

User Story: As an author, I want to compare the projected ROI of several launch strategies simultaneously so that I can identify the best financial opportunity for my book.
Description: The ROI Comparison Tool requirement allows users to compare the projected financial outcomes of multiple launch strategies side by side. This feature will evaluate ROI predictions based on different investment scenarios, providing authors with comprehensive insights into which strategies may lead to higher profitability. It will employ data visualization techniques to present the advantages and disadvantages of each scenario, enhancing the user's ability to gauge potential returns effectively. This tool will also incorporate historical sales data and market trends to inform projections, ensuring authors are equipped with up-to-date information when making decisions. Integration within the BookShelfHub interface will streamline user experience and improve accessibility to vital financial insights.
Acceptance Criteria: Author wants to evaluate different launch strategies using the ROI Comparison Tool to determine the most profitable approach before finalizing their budget.

Given the author has entered multiple launch strategies with their associated costs and projected returns, when they request a side-by-side comparison, then the tool displays a visual comparison of ROI for each strategy, allowing the author to identify the highest potential return.

An author wants to utilize historical sales data to enhance the projections for their chosen launch strategies, ensuring that the recommendations are grounded in real-world performance metrics.

Given the author selects the option to include historical sales data, when the analysis is performed, then the ROI Comparison Tool incorporates past sales trends into the projected ROI calculations for a more accurate forecast.

Users need to present the analysis results of various launch strategies with clear data visualizations to stakeholders to facilitate decision-making.

Given that the analysis has been performed, when the user requests a report, then the tool generates a report with clear graphs and charts illustrating the ROI comparison, which can be easily exported or shared with stakeholders.

An author wishes to understand the implications of adjusting their budget on the ROI of their launch strategies to make informed financial decisions.

Given the author has modified the budget allocation for one or more strategies, when they perform the ROI calculation again, then the tool updates the ROI results instantly to reflect the new budget and provides insights on how the changes impact potential profitability.

Authors want to access a user-friendly interface that allows them to easily navigate between different strategies and view detailed insights without technical knowledge.

Given the user navigates to the ROI Comparison Tool, when they explore different launch strategies, then the interface allows for seamless navigation, providing clear and accessible information on each strategy's financial implications without requiring technical expertise.

Visual Budget Breakdown

User Story: As an author, I want to see a visual breakdown of my budget allocations for different launch strategies so that I can easily understand my expenses and adjust my plans.
Description: The Visual Budget Breakdown requirement provides authors with a clear and interactive breakdown of their budget allocation for each launch strategy. By using pie charts, bar graphs, and other visual tools, this feature will illustrate how each component of the budget plays into the overall financial picture. Authors will benefit from this capability by understanding where the majority of their expenses lie and adjusting their strategy accordingly. Additionally, this tool will enable authors to simulate various budget scenarios, helping them to strategically allocate funds according to anticipated returns. The integration of this visual tool within BookShelfHub will promote a better understanding of financial management and enable authors to make more strategic decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: Visualizing Budget Allocations for Launch Strategy

Given an author has entered their budget details for a specific launch strategy, when they navigate to the Visual Budget Breakdown, then they should see a pie chart representing the percentage allocation of the budget across different categories (e.g., marketing, distribution, editing).

Interactive Adjustment of Budget Components

Given an author views the Visual Budget Breakdown, when they click to adjust any specific budget component (e.g., increase marketing budget), then the pie chart and bar graph should dynamically update to reflect the new allocations in real-time.

Scenario Simulation for Multiple Launch Strategies

Given an author wants to compare different launch strategies, when they select the 'Simulate Scenario' option and input varying budget amounts for each category, then they should receive a comparative visualization that displays potential ROI for each strategy.

Exporting Budget Breakdown Reports

Given an author wants to share their budget analysis, when they select the 'Export' option, then they should be able to download a PDF report containing the visual budget breakdown and key metrics with a clear layout.

Displaying Projected Returns Based on Budget Adjustments

Given an author is inputting different budget amounts, when they submit the new budget details, then projected returns and ROI should be recalculated and displayed alongside the updated visuals.

User-Friendly Tooltip Descriptions for Budget Components

Given an author hovers over any component in the Visual Budget Breakdown, when they view the tooltip, then they should see a concise description of what that budget component entails and its significance.

Forecasting Future Sales

User Story: As an author, I want to forecast future sales based on my chosen launch strategy so that I can better understand the potential success of my book.
Description: The Forecasting Future Sales requirement will implement an algorithm that utilizes historical sales data and market analysis to predict future sales performance based on different launch strategies. Authors will be able to input their chosen strategy and receive forecasts of expected sales, helping them understand the potential success of their planned launches. This forecasting tool will help authors make data-driven decisions, minimizing the risk of financial loss as they invest in their book launches. The feature will integrate smoothly into BookShelfHub’s existing analytics section, enhancing the overall capabilities of the platform. Additionally, the tool will provide insights tailored to the author's genre and target audience, ensuring all projections are relevant and accurate.
Acceptance Criteria: Author inputs their data for a launch strategy involving a new book release in the system, specifying details such as budget allocations, target audience, and marketing channels to be analyzed for forecasting.

Given that the author has input their launch strategy details, when the author requests a sales forecast, then the system should generate a sales forecast report that includes expected sales figures for the next 6 months and a comparison of different strategies users may select.

An author wants to compare the financial implications of two different launch strategies, each with a different budget and marketing approach, to decide which one to implement.

Given that the author has selected two different launch strategies, when they initiate the analysis, then the system should display a side-by-side comparison of the projected ROI, total costs, and potential sales for each strategy in an easily digestible format.

An author wants insights on how their genre influences sales forecasts; they input genre-specific data and request the analysis through the platform.

Given that the author has specified their book's genre and input the relevant data, when the forecasting tool processes the information, then the system should generate insights tailored to that genre, including historical sales trends and market analysis relevant to similar books.

An author has received the sales forecast and wants to visualize the data to better understand the projections over time.

Given that the author has the sales forecast report, when they access the report, then the system should present the data in graphical formats, such as line charts and bar graphs, illustrating projected sales over the specified time frame.

An author aims to adjust their budget after reviewing the initial sales forecast to see how it affects projected outcomes.

Given the original forecast data, when the author changes budget allocations for marketing and operations, then the system should automatically update the sales forecast report to reflect the new projections based on the revised inputs.

A small publishing house wishes to evaluate the cumulative impact of multiple book launches conducted in parallel using the forecasting tool.

Given that the publishing house inputs multiple launch strategies for different books, when they run the forecasts, then the system should aggregate the sales projections and present a comprehensive report showing totals and averages among the launches for a clearer operational overview.

An author requires detailed metrics from the sales forecasts to present to potential investors as part of a funding round.

Given that the author desires to demonstrate the viability of their book launch strategy, when they generate a report, then the system should provide an investor-ready document that clearly outlines key metrics such as expected sales, costs, and anticipated ROI in a professional format.

Press Articles

BookShelfHub Launches Innovative Cloud Platform for Independent Publishing: FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE

Contact: Jane Doe Director of Marketing BookShelfHub Email: jane.doe@bookshelfhub.com Phone: (123) 456-7890

City, State - Date: January 28, 2025 The future of independent publishing just got brighter with the launch of BookShelfHub, a groundbreaking cloud-based platform designed specifically for independent authors, small publishing houses, and editors. This robust new platform combines project management, royalty tracking, inventory management, and advanced marketing tools into a single, easy-to-use interface that streamlines the entire publishing process.

The platform offers Real-Time Co-Editing, enabling collaboration among authors, editors, and marketers simultaneously, ultimately enhancing creativity, accountability, and productivity.

"At BookShelfHub, we understand the unique challenges faced by independent authors and publishers," said John Smith, CEO of BookShelfHub. "Our mission is to empower them with the tools they need to navigate the complexities of publishing while focusing on what they do best—creating captivating stories."

Notable features include the Integrated Feedback Loop and Project Dashboard. The Integrated Feedback Loop allows team members to leave comments and suggestions directly on manuscripts, ensuring vital communication during the editing process. The Project Dashboard keeps everyone updated on project timelines and milestones to enhance workflow.

The platform is particularly beneficial for small publishers who manage multiple titles at once. Features like the Earnings Breakdown Dashboard and Projected Earnings Calculator give users actionable insights into their sales performance, allowing them to make data-informed decisions regarding marketing strategies.

Additionally, BookShelfHub offers robust marketing capabilities through tools such as Audience Targeting Insights, Marketing Impact Analyzer, and the Multichannel Campaign Scheduler. These features help users optimize their marketing strategies by tracking audience engagement across various platforms and adjusting efforts in real time.

"Creative marketing is essential for independent authors and publishers looking to thrive in today’s crowded literary landscape," said Lucy Turner, Head of Marketing at BookShelfHub. "With our built-in marketing tools, we aim to simplify the process and help users reach their audience more effectively."

In an increasingly digital world, independent authors require streamlined access to resources that nurture their talent. BookShelfHub addresses this need by offering a centralized platform that focuses on enhancing user experience while lowering operational complexity and costs.

To further support authors during their publishing journey, BookShelfHub includes features like personalized tutorials, an interactive Q&A forum, and a best practices library designed to enhance the onboarding process and user satisfaction.

"BookShelfHub isn’t just about technology; it’s about fostering a community that celebrates storytelling in all its forms," Smith concluded.

BookShelfHub is now available for registration at www.bookshelfhub.com. Independent authors, small publishers, and creative marketing specialists alike are encouraged to explore the platform features that will elevate their publishing experience.

For more information, interviews, or to access product demos, please contact Jane Doe using the information provided above.

END

Revolutionizing Publishing: Introducing BookShelfHub for Independent Authors: FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE

Contact: Emily Johnson
Public Relations Specialist
BookShelfHub
Email: emily.johnson@bookshelfhub.com
Phone: (987) 654-3210

City, State - Date: January 28, 2025 In a bid to revolutionize the publishing process for independent authors and small publishers, BookShelfHub launches a new cloud-based platform aimed at simplifying project management, royalty tracking, and marketing. BookShelfHub provides all essential tools in one place, ensuring a seamless publishing experience from manuscript development to market engagement.

Recognizing the increasing challenges independent authors face in navigating the traditional publishing landscape, BookShelfHub integrates a multitude of features tailored to enhancing creativity and reducing operational burdens.

"It is challenging for independent authors to break through the noise while managing the complexities of publishing, and that’s where BookShelfHub comes in," stated Mark Thompson, COO of BookShelfHub. "Our platform enables authors and publishers to focus on creating quality content while we take care of all the logistical details."

Among its standout features are the Signature Workgroups, which help authors and their teams create customized collaboration environments for different projects. Coupled with the Smart Content Generator, authors will see a boost in their marketing efforts as it produces tailored promotional content that resonates with target readers.

Moreover, the Geographic Performance Insights feature allows authors to see where their books are performing best. This data insight provides clarity on effective marketing strategies tailored for different regions.

"We are excited to provide tools that allow authors to visualize their journey and enhance their audience connections," said Rachel Green, Senior Product Manager at BookShelfHub. "From tracking sales to crafting custom marketing campaigns, we aim to highlight what matters most for our users."

The launch of BookShelfHub comes as many independent authors are seeking more adaptable and insightful solutions. Additionally, the platform's affordability ensures it is accessible to everyone looking to enter the literary marketplace.

Interested users can sign up today at www.bookshelfhub.com to experience the numerous capabilities offered by BookShelfHub that aim to empower their publishing ambitions.

For further media inquiries or to arrange interviews with the leadership team, please reach out to Emily Johnson using the contact information provided.

END

BookShelfHub Unveils Comprehensive Solution for Efficient Independent Publishing: FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE

Contact: Michael Roberts
Media Relations
BookShelfHub
Email: michael.roberts@bookshelfhub.com
Phone: (555) 123-4567

City, State - Date: January 28, 2025 In a significant affirmation of the independent publishing industry, BookShelfHub introduced a comprehensive cloud-based platform designed to enhance the workflow of independent authors and publishers.

The newly launched BookShelfHub platform integrates essential tools such as project management, royalty tracking, marketing campaigns, and audience analytics, making it the ultimate solution for those eager to navigate the publishing world efficiently.

"In a time where independent authors need every advantage, BookShelfHub stands as a supportive ally," said Jennifer Lee, Chief Marketing Officer at BookShelfHub. "We are equipping our users with an all-in-one platform that tackles the complexities of publishing so they can focus on telling their stories."

BookShelfHub features innovative functionalities including the Campaign Customization Wizard, which guides authors through creating tailored marketing campaigns. The platform also introduces an Engagement Metrics Visualization tool, allowing users to easily assess how their audience interacts with content.

Moreover, BookShelfHub promotes a collaborative atmosphere with features like the Collaborative Idea Board and Real-Time Co-Editing to encourage creativity during the manuscript development and editing process.

"Creating an engaging and interactive publishing process is at the heart of our mission," Jennifer continued. "We believe that storytelling should be supported with robust tools that inspire collaboration and creativity."

BookShelfHub’s user-centric design and comprehensive features ensure that independent authors can maximize their impact in the literary market. The platform invites all authors, editors, and marketing professionals to explore its features and leverage the advantages provided by this innovative solution.

To learn more or initiate your BookShelfHub journey, visit www.bookshelfhub.com. For media inquiries or to arrange interviews with company representatives, please contact Michael Roberts using the details given above.

END

Create products with ease

Product Details

Personas

Rising Indie Author

Tech-Savvy Small Publisher

Creative Marketing Maven

Data-Driven Literary Agent

Aspiring Book Dealer

Product Ideas

Product Features

Real-Time Co-Editing

Requirements

Collaborative Annotation

Version Control System

Integrated Chat Functionality

Change Notification System

User Roles and Permissions Management

Integrated Feedback Loop

Requirements

Real-time Commenting System

Feedback Tagging and Categorization

Discussion Thread History

Resolve and Acknowledge Feedback

Feedback Summary Report

User Permissions Management

Project Dashboard

Requirements

Interactive Timeline View

Task Assignment and Notification System

Real-time Collaboration Tools

Progress Tracking and Reporting

Milestone Management

Version Control System

Requirements

Change Tracking

Version Comparison

Restore Previous Versions

User Access Controls

Version History Log

Collaborative Idea Board

Requirements

Real-time Collaboration

Idea Categorization

Voting System for Ideas

Commenting and Feedback Functionality

Visual Idea Mapping

Access Control and Permissions

Task Assignment & Scheduling

Requirements

Task Assignment Interface

Deadline Setting

Meeting Scheduling

Progress Tracking

Team Notifications

Signature Workgroups

Requirements

Custom Workgroup Creation

Team Member Invitations

Workgroup Discussion Threads

Workgroup File Sharing

Workgroup Analytics Dashboard

Earnings Breakdown Dashboard

Requirements

Dynamic Filters

Visual Graphs and Charts

Export Earnings Reports

Real-time Updates

Customizable Dashboard Layout

Projected Earnings Calculator

Requirements

User Data Integration

Trend Analysis Visualization

Custom Variables Input

Export Forecast Reports

Market Comparison Tool

Real-time Updates

Geographic Performance Insights

Requirements

Geographic Sales Mapping